Home

Dell PowerVault TL2000 User's Manual

1. F 1 F 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Appendix G Library Configuration Form Use this form when planning your library configuration Keep this document in a secure location and update it when changes are made to the library configuration General Information TL2000 TL4000 Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Plelelzcie e Olglecgic O x i383 2 8 NM D v v Ols im SR K RA o lt lt o 5 NS gt 55 R S a Oo is Library Network Settings Enabled Disabled gt 0l gt zl slU 28 a 2 FER EEO ERAAN lt o WN WN DNS Servers IP Addresses EKM Servers IP Addresses Encryption Settings Logical Libraries Number in 1 2 3 4 library Mode Random ON OFF Random ON OFF Random ON OFF Random ON OFF Sequential ON OFF Sequential ON OFF Sequential ON OFF Sequential ON OFF Autoload ON OFF Autoload ON OFF Autoload ON OFF Autoload ON OFF Loop ON OFF Loop ON OFF Loop ON OFF Loop ON OFF Magazine Assignment _ Upper Left _ Upper Left _ Upper Left _ Upper Left C Lower Left C Lower Left C Lower Left C Lower Left L Upper Right L Upper Right L Upper Right L Upper Right C Lower Right C Lower Right C Lower Right C Lower Right Number of Active Slots Drive Serial 4U Position 4 4U Position 4 4U Position 4 4U Position 4 Numbers 4U Position 3 4U Position 3 4U Position 3 4U Position 3 2U 4U
2. Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Note Review the information in Installation Planning before installing your library To install a desktop or rack mounted 2U library or 4U library perform the procedures in this chapter in the order they are presented Using the Library Configuration Form Installing Your the Appendix G Library Configuration Form on page G 1 Enter library information such as serial numbers types of drives etc and configuration settings on the Library Configuration Form and store in a safe location for future reference Be sure to update this form any time changes are made to your library hardware or configuration Before beginning the installation and configuration of your library make a copy of Library Complete these procedures to install your library hardware Removing and Storing 2 ge 4 4 A p a o a ae Choosing a Location Choose a location that meets the following criteria Table 4 1 Location criteria Room temperature Power source 10 357 C 50 95 F Note If the temperature in the room where the library will be installed varies by 15 C 30 F from the room where the library was stored allow the library to acclimate to the surrounding environment for at least 12 hours before unpacking it from the shipping container e AC power voltage 100 127 VAC 200 240 VAC 4 2 A Note The 4U library requires two separate power sources to imp
3. 4 3 Figure 4 19 Attaching a SCSI host interface cable to the 2U library a77ug101 Figure 4 20 Attaching host interface cables to the 4U library THE CONFIGURATION SHOWN IN THIS FIGURE IS USED FOR EXAMPLE ONLY THIS CONFIGURATION IS NOT SUPPORTED a77ug134 Figure 4 21 Attaching a SAS interface cable to the 2U library 3 Attach the other end of the host interface cable as follows e For a SCSI library connect the host interface cable to the connector on the SCSI host bus adapter or to the connector on the previous device on the SCSI bus Attach the terminator f in Figure 4 19 to the remaining SCSI connector on the back panel of the library if the library is the last or only Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 17 device on the SCSI bus Otherwise attach one end of a SCSI cable to the remaining port and the other end to the next device on the SCSI bus Make sure that the last device on the SCSI bus is properly terminated Note Only cables and terminators specified for Ultra160 or Ultra320 use or labeled as Multi Mode should be used Note The host bus adapter should be LVD SCSI A single ended SE SCSI host bus adapter will work but will severely degrade performance and limit cable length If there are any SE devices on the same SCSI bus the entire SCSI bus will negotiate down to SE speed and severely degrade performance e For a Fibre Channel library connect the host interface cable to the h
4. 41 10 Power Management 1 11 Media shee es amp 2 Library epecincitons et ew amp amp eZ Product Environment 1 14 Supported Device Drivers 1 14 Chapter 2 User Interfaces 2 1 Operator Control Panel o amp amp el Operator Control Panel Philosophy Soe 8 e ged Power ON Display va ge aie Note about the Front Panel LEDs noa pos aAA Input Modes a amp 23 Power ON OFF 8 24 Web User Interface 2 2 D4 LODI s s p e se amp amp 4 WH 8 wit System Status koa 2 amp 220 Web User Interface Help Paces ie amp amp eo Logging out of the Web User Interface 2 8 Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 1 Determining the Number of Logical Libraries 3 1 Basic Guidelines s s amp e e e s s amp sol Library Sharing 2 a amp amp 1 Using Multiple Logical Libraries for ee Sharing i 4 Using Multiple Control Paths ss 3 Using Multiple Control Paths for Path plover Library Partitioning and Element Addressing Logical Unit Number an aan Host Interfaces SCSI Interface SAS Interface Fibre Channel Interface Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Using the Library Coon Bost Installing Your Library Choosing a Location Unpacking the Library Verifying the shipment Installing the Library Foot Pads fo
5. 1 Log on to the Web User Interface Refer to Login on page 2 5 2 Quiesce all drives then unload all drives 3 Click Service Library then Key Path Diagnostics Key Path Diagnostics Drive IP Address Drive Test Ethernet Test EKM Path Test EKM Config Test 4 121 221 2374 i Passed iv Passed x Failed N A 5 F 11 221 242 Passed amp Passed In Progress gt N A N A F 9 11 221 204 i Passed io Passed x Failed N A 5 9 11 221 224 Passed amp Passed In Progress i 01 02 2008 15 25 40 Figure 5 58 Service Library Perform Key Path Diagnostics page 4 Click Start Tests Note If you have just enabled encryption on your library wait for all LME drives to be displayed in the table and the Start Tests button to become active Each test will show a result of Passed or Failed If a test fails the remaining tests will not be executed and the test will show a result of N A The IP Address may show N A for the following reasons 1 Drive is not encryption capable 2 EKM Server Settings on the Configure Library gt Encryption page are not configured correctly Test results will clear e When the test is rerun e When the library is rebooted The time and date of the last test will appear below the Key Path Diagnostics screen If any of the tests fail refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting on page 7 1 for additional information Service Library Upgrade Firmware Consider these re
6. ANSI American National Standards Institute application managed encryption Tape encryption that is controlled by an application I 1 archive To collect and store files in a designated place ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange A 7 bit coded character set 8 bits including parity check that consists of control characters and graphic characters assigning a device The establishing of the relationship of a device to a running task process job or program assignment The naming of a specific device to perform a function asynchronous Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific events such as common timing signals attention notice A word for calling attention to the possibility of danger to a program device or system or to data Contrast with caution and danger ATTN Attention B backup To make extra copies of documents or software for safekeeping bar code A code that represents characters by sets of parallel bars of varying thickness and separation which are read optically by transverse scanning bar code label Paper bearing a bar code and having an adhesive backing The bar code label must be affixed to a tape cartridge to enable the library to identify the cartridge and its volume serial number bar code reader A laser device that is specialized for scanning and reading bar codes and converting them into either the ASCII or EBCDIC
7. 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 11 10 12 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 16 10 17 10 18 10 19 10 21 10 20 10 21 10 22 10 23 10 24 Library front panel LEDs 10 22 Access hole for the left a facing rear of library 10 23 Access hole for the right magazine adine rear of library 10 24 Left magazines pulled out of a 4U library facing front of library 10 25 Mounting brackets and anchors for securing the library in a rack one bracket and anchor on each side of the library 10 26 10 25 Front view of rack arg screw A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 placement Configuration of a one palon system Configuration of a two partition system Configuration of a three partition system Configuration of a four partition system Examples of SCSI element addressing Figures 10 26 A 4 1X X Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Tables 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 9 1 10 1 11 3 1 3 2 3 3 4 1 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 6 1 Minimum firmware levels for common library features i i 2U library and 4U library front panel descriptions 2U library and 4U ign rear panel descriptions Tape drive model and host ieee ipe Library storage capacity and data transfer rate Physical Speck oanig Power Specifications Operati
8. Isolating Drive Sled Problems Prior to replacing a drive sled CRU verify that the following activities have been performed 1 BEFORE POWERING OFF THE LIBRARY write the drive dump to flash It is important to preserve the drive dump on the drive for analysis by Technical Support Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 9 Note If you are instructed by Dell Technical Support to copy the drive dump to your host computer use one of the following methods e Web User Interface Refer to Service Library Save Drive Dump on page 5 61 Using the ITDT Firmware Update Dump Retrieval e ITDT Refer to and Drive Test Tool on page 9 5 2 Ensure that the drive firmware is at the latest level To determine current library and drive firmware version using the Operator Control Panel e Library firmware Monitor gt Library gt Identity e Drive firmware Monitor gt Drives gt Identity select a drive Drive firmware is identified in the FW Rev field 3 Try reseating the drive sled Note The drive sled is hot pluggable so it is not necessary to power off the library See Removing i i e 4 Cycle power to the library 5 If air does not flow from the drive sled cooling fan grill on the rear of the library replace the drive sled CRU Several library error codes also point to cooling problems See Removing Installing Adding a Tape Drive Sled on page 10 3 ge 10 3 6 If the drive is experiencing permanent
9. Monitor gt Library gt Status Monitor Library gt Library status Library on Status Logical libraries Configure gt Logical Libraries Configure Configure Library gt configure Logical Libraries Chapter 5 Operations 5 5 Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Information Menu Navigation Shortcuts Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info Logs library Monitor gt Library gt Error Log Service Library gt View Wien Library on Logs page 5 59 Magazines Monitor gt Inventory gt Monitor Library gt Monitor Library graphical Magazines Inventory Inventory on representation page 5 39 Control gt Magazines Manage Library gt Release Manage Library Magazine ag N 5 O O 5 O 5 h D an e O Mode library Configure gt Library Settings gt igure Configure Library gt change Mode i General Library General on page 5 43 Mode library Monitor gt Library gt Identity itor Monitor Library gt Library Monitor Library current Library onl Identity ibrary Identity O O ch D O Netmask current Monitor gt Library gt Network itor Configure Library gt address Library on Network Library Networ page 5 50 E O 5 O 5 ch D an e O Netmask Configure gt Network gt igure Configure Library gt Address modify Netmask Network on Network Library N
10. Write Append Error A write type command failed because the point at which to append data was unreadable Jl 00 Erase failure An Erase command failed to erase the required area on the media 52 00 Cartridge fault A command could not be completed due to a fault in the tape cartridge 53 00 Media Load Eject Failed Sense Key 03 An attempt to load or eject the cartridge failed due to a problem with the cartridge 53 00 Media Load Eject Failed Sense Key 04 An attempt to load or eject the cartridge failed due to a problem with the drive 53 02 Media Removal Prevented An Unload command has failed to eject the cartridge because media removal has been prevented 5A 01 Operator medium removal request 5D 00 Failure Prediction Threshold Failure Prediction thresholds have been exceeded indicating that a failure may occur soon 5D FF Failure Prediction False A Mode Select command has been used to test for Failure Prediction system 82 82 Drive requires cleaning The drive has detected that a cleaning operation is required to maintain good operation 82 83 Bad Code Detected The data transferred to the drive during a firmware upgrade is corrupt or incompatible with drive hardware Appendix C Sense Data C 11 Table C 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name 12 13 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Continued Byte 13 ASCQ Byte 12 ASC Sense Key
11. 10 22 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide ithe pees a 4 Pa fw j A Pok a pee Cee Phe a a77ug025 Figure 10 21 Access hole for the left magazine facing rear of library Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 23 i Ei ATTE E Rem We Pet re _ Operation i PlaGein Storage tocation On fear panel a77ug024 Figure 10 22 Access hole for the right magazine facing rear of library b Push the end of a straightened paper clip into the access hole for each magazine at the back of the library DO NOT push the paper clip in more than 4 inch While holding the paper clip have a second person pull the magazine out from the front of the unit Note To prevent dropping the magazine support both ends of the magazine before it clears the front edge of the library 10 24 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide e eeg a 7ug246 Figure 10 23 Left magazines pulled out of a 4U library facing front of library 2 Insert the cartridge magazines removed from the defective library into the same positions in the replacement library enclosure Insert the cartridge magazines removed from the replacement library enclosure into the same positions in the defective library to return to Dell Wait for inventory of the magazines to complete a If inventory is successful 1 The replacement library enclosure will complete with the Re
12. B2 B3 B4 Cartridge did not transport completely magazines are inserted then retry operation Accessor controller does not respond on command Isolating a Librar Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem on page 7 10 Possible Replacement CRUs e Primary Library Enclosure e Secondary Library Controller Card Chapter 8 Error codes 8 3 Table 8 1 Main Error Codes continued Network initialization failed 1 Refer to Isolating Web User Telnet Interface initialization failed Interface Problems on page 7 11 Webserver initialization failed 2 If the error recurs contact Ping command did not reach target TCHAD EEP POE Cannot Upgrade from USB Not supported Cannot Upgrade from FTP 1 Retry the Firmware upgrade C9 Cannot Upgrade Robotic from Flash 2 If the error recurs contact technical support Do ROM error ROM checksum incorrect Tsolating a Librar RAM error Power on Self Test POST failed Sec Seeks So Enclosure Problem on page 7 10 D NVRAM Non Volatile Random Access Memory error Possible replacement CRUs Read Write operation to NVRAM failed N e Primary Library Controller Card 69 CTC Channel to Channel Error Timer unit failed during e Secondary Library Enclosure POST D7 Fatal System error can occur because of an over temperature condition Ensure that the environment meets the Environmental Specifications refer to Communication to displ
13. Configure Library General on page 5 43 Monitor Library Library Status on pag e 5 36 Monitor Library Manage Library Manage Library Move Media on page 5 41 Monitor Library Drive Status on Monitor Library Save Restore Save Restore on page 5 26 Note From this location you can not only save and restore your library configuration but you can also restore factory defaults Configure gt Drive gt Control Configure Library gt Path Drives save and restore Control path enable Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Information Activity Date and time current setting Date and time set Dedicated Cleaning slot removing reinstating DHCP current status DHCP modify Diagnostics run drive Head test Diagnostics run drive Media test Diagnostics run drive Normal Read Write test Diagnostics run drive POST Diagnostics run Key Path diagnostics if feature is available Diagnostics run Library Verify test Diagnostics run Slot to Slot test Diagnostics run System Test Menu Navigation Shortcuts Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info Monitor Monitor gt Library gt Status gt Date Time Configure gt Set Date and Time 2 Configure gt Library Settings System Status Configure Library gt Date amp Time Library Date amp ime on
14. Element Address l Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine Drive 1 257 257 1 3 a 7ug162 Front side Figure 3 2 Configuration of a two partition system 3 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Configuration of a 3 Partition System A three partition system must have at least three drives installed A drive must be installed in drive position 1 another drive must be installed in drive position 2 and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4 Partition 1 will contain the first drive and the first magazine Partition 2 will contain the second drive and the second magazine Partition 3 will contain any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4 Partition 3 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4 STE assignments e Logical Library 1 Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 x1000 through 4104 0x1008 e Logical Library 2 Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 x1000 through 4107 0x100B e Logical Library 3 Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 x1000 through 4119 0x1017 Drive 4 Element Address Drive 3 PATA Element Address Drive 3 Element Address 256 Drive 2 Drive 2 Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine 2 4 Magazine Magazine 1 3 Drive 1 Drive 1 Element Address Element Address 256 256 Front side a77ug163 Figure 3 3 Configuration of a three partition system Configuration of a 4 Partition System A four partition
15. Install the library mounting brackets J as shown on the 2U library on each side of the library using the screw that was removed from your library and an additional short counter sunk screw included in the rack kit The 4U rack anchors and mounting brackets are similar 7 With library rack anchors and_mounting brackets installed slide the librar onto the rails as shown inline igen pase lanl ae 10 onpacd 4 14 Gently push the library into the rack to lock the REAR anchors installed on each side of the library When the library stops the front mounting brackets will be flush with the vertical rack rails Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 13 a 7ug267 TTT Y Ya WHYTE YY seennaeeahs OB a77ug266 Figure 4 16 Sliding the 4U library into the rack 8 Using a 2 Phillips screwdriver secure the library to the rack see Figure 4 17 on page 4 15 or Figure 4 18 on page 4 16 by placing a screw in the center hole 4 14 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide of each mounting bracket and tightening them i 00 N D N N Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 15 Figure 4 17 Securing the 2U library to the rack te gt i oe ia te i EE Oe 88 AN E E i v a a 5TA AT aT F n U E J x B55 a 7ug265 Figure 4 18 Securing the 4U library to the rack 9 Install either the round or the square rack hole covers for the 4U library as shown
16. Isolating a Power Supply Problem on page 77 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 13 7 14 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Chapter 8 Error codes If an error occurs during operation of the library the library stops the current operation and displays an error code on the LCD screen Unless otherwise noted in Error codes on page 8 2 try to resolve the error by cycling power to the library and retrying the last operation If the error persists contact technical support Example error code EVENT 6 8D 07 Where e 6 indicates the position in sequence list 0 being the most recent e 8D 07 indicates the error code 8D sled blocked The event log with the library also includes a date stamp for each event Press SELECT to display the associated time stamp in the following format yy mm dd hh mm ss HH Where e yy is the year e mm is the month e dd is the current day e hh is hours e mm is minutes e ss is seconds e HH is 1 100 second The time stamp is set to zero at system start A description of each error code and possible solution is provided in Error codes Preparing to resolve an error code 1 Record the error information that is displayed on the Operator Control Panel display or Web User Interface screen 2 If possible cycle library power and retry the operation e If the error recurs refer to Error codes on page 8 2 for information about reso
17. LVD tape devices support a bus length of 25 meters 82 ft point to point and 12 meters 39 ft using multi drop interconnection daisy chaining For each daisy chained device the maximum cable length must be reduced by 0 5 meters 1 611 Important A faster bus does not imply that an attached device will support that data rate but that multiple devices can operate on the bus at that maximum speed For a detailed table of SCSI terms and related specifications refer to the SCSI Trade Association Web site at performance if possible avoid daisy chaining SAS Interface A drive sled with a SAS Serial Attached SCSI interface can be linked directly to controllers SAS is a performance improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS enables multiple devices up to 128 of different sizes and types to be connected simultaneously with thinner and longer cables its full duplex signal transmission supports up to 6 0 Gb s The SFF 8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 5 and Ultrium 6 tape drives are compatible with SAS 1 or SAS 2 cables The SFF 8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 tape drives are compatible with SAS 1 cables In addition SAS drives can be hot plugged SAS drives will auto negotiate speed There are no configurable topologies thus no feature switches associated with SAS The SAS Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 half height drive sleds are single ported and can only be attached to one host The Ultrium 4 full height Ultrium 5
18. Many WORM method for storing data on tape The LTO Ultrium 6 Ultrium 5 and Ultrium 4 drives enables WORM support when a WORM tape cartridge is loaded into the drive WORM Media Because standard read write media are incompatible with the WORM feature a specially formatted WORM tape cartridge see Figure 6 2 is required Each WORM cartridge has a unique worldwide cartridge identifier WWCID which comprises the unique CM chip serial number and the unique tape media serial number Ultrium 6 WORM cartridges are two tone black and silvery gray a67b0024 Figure 6 2 Ultrium Data and WORM Tape Cartridges Data Security on WORM Media Certain built in security measures help ensure that the data written on a WORM cartridge does not become compromised for example e The format of an Ultrium 6 Ultrium 5 or Ultrium 4 WORM Tape Cartridge is unlike that of standard read write media This unique format prevents a drive Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 3 that lacks WORM capable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge For LTO 6 native data capacity is 2500 GB and compressed data capacity is 6250 GB e When the drive senses a WORM cartridge the firmware prohibits the changing or altering of user data already written on the tape The firmware keeps track of the last appendable point on the tape WORM Media Errors The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur e Information in the servo manufacturer s word
19. Product Environment The library is designed to operate in a general business environment The library meets the acoustical requirements for general business area category 2D Category 2D states that the library should be installed a minimum of 4 m 13 ft from a permanent work station To allow for service access install the library a minimum of 0 9 m 3 ft from all obstacles The library is a precision computer peripheral To ensure maximum longevity of your library locate the library away from dust dirt and airborne particulates e Keep the library away from high traffic areas especially if the floor is carpeted Carpeting harbors dust and people walking on the carpet can cause the carpet fibers and the dust to become airborne e Keep the library out of printer copier rooms because of toner and paper dust Additionally do not store paper supplies next to the library e Keep the library away from moving air caused by doorways open windows fans and air conditioners Ensure that the machine covers are always kept closed to minimize any contamination from airborne particles Supported Device Drivers The latest levels of device drivers can be downloaded by visiting http support dell com Note The TL2000 and TL4000 libraries utilize the generic SCSI drivers in RHEL 4 and 5 Depending on the ISV you are using you will use either the sg or st driver Please refer to your ISV documentation for more information on which
20. Securing the 2U library to the rack 4 15 Securing the 4U library to the rack 4 16 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 35 4 36 4 37 4 38 4 39 4 40 4 41 4 42 4 43 4 44 4 45 TH 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 Attaching a SCSI host interface cable to the 2U library i Attaching host miterat E to the 4U library Attaching a SAS ae bie to the 2U library Removing the proledive label from the power receptacle Log in screen on the Web User ieaie The 2U library Configure Library General screen Example The 4U library Concur Library General screen The 4U library Configure Library loki Libraries page The Configure library Path Failoy r Feature Activation screen Feature Key verification screen Feature Activation Key screen Configure Library Encryption Activation screen The Configure Library Drive screen Configure Library Network Page Warning Screen The Configure Library eee Recess screen The Configure Library Date and Time screen The Configure Library Logs a Tacs screen The Configure Library Email Notification screen Configure bibon SNMP jage 2U library left magazine 2U library right magazine 2U library I O station in the left mao E 4U library left magazines 2 AU library right magazines 4U library I O station in the lower left magazine F
21. Target 2 IP Address 0000 00 0 Version SNMPv1 V IPv4 OE or Host name and domain SS 0 0 0 0 Version IPv4 address or Host name and domain Audit Logging Ti SNMP V3 SECURITY User Name intial O O Authentication Authentication Password pekk Privacy DES Vv a 7ug278 Figure 4 38 Configure Library SNMP page Note For information about SNMP SNMP Messaging on page 1 7 and Appendix F SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps on page F 1 Note If SNMP is not enabled cleared all SNMP fields are disabled SNMP e Enabled Check this box to have SNMP traps sent to an SNMP Management console e Community Name An SNMP community name is a text string that acts as a password to authenticate messages that are sent between the SNMP remote management application and the library Enter your preferred name or leave as public SNMP DESTINATIONS Target 1 IP Address If SNMP traps are enabled enter an IP address where SNMP traps are sent e Target 2 IP Address Enter an optional second IP address where SNMP traps are sent or leave as 0 0 0 0 Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 35 e Target 3 IP Address Enter an optional third IP address where SNMP traps are sent or leave as 0 0 0 0 e Version The library offers three versions of the SNMP protocol v1 v2 and v3 Select a version for each Target IP address e Audit Logging If SNMP is enabled and Audit Logging is enabled
22. The drive sled is a customer replaceable unit CRU and is hot pluggable which is designed for easy removal and replacement Shipping lock and The shipping lock which secures the accessor during shipping and_associated label storage label are stored on the rear panel of the library for future use See Removing and location Storing the Shipping Lock on page 4 4 Note The shipping lock must be removed before powering ON the library to allow the accessor to function properly USB port Used to save restore library configuration information on a USB device Library Control An LED showing the status of the Library Control Board Board LCC LED LED flashing 1 flash per second normal operation Serial port This port is used to communicate serially with the library using an RJ 11 connector For use by Service Personnel 1 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 1 2 2U library and 4U library rear panel descriptions continued een E e e Ethernet port This port is used to connect the library to a network LED e 10 100 Link Description Green Link Integrity Flashing Network synchronization negotiation Steady On Good connection Off No connection between NIC and hub Activity Description Amber Port traffic indicator Flashing Network traffic present Steady On Heavy network traffic Off No traffic meee drive LED __ This LED indicates the c
23. and Ultrium 6 drives are dual ported and can be attached to a maximum of two hosts The intention of the second port is for redundancy for failover rather than sharing Sharing between these two hosts is limited to Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 9 active passive cluster failover LAN free drive sharing is not supported Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 SAS drive sleds use the SFF 8088 connection at the drive sled end and SFF 8088 or SFF 8470 at the host adapter end Fibre Channel Interface Fibre Channel allows for an active intelligent interconnection scheme called a Fabric to connect devices Everything between the ports on Fibre Channel is called the Fabric The Fabric is most often a switch or series of switches that takes the responsibility for routing The library allows the selection of the following Fibre channel port behaviors e LN Port default setting an automatic configuration that tries arbitrated loop first then switched fabric e L Port arbitrated loop e N Port point to point protocol in a switched fabric topology Cables and Speeds Ultrium 3 Ultrium 4 Ultrium 5 and Ultrium 6 Fibre Channel tape drives use LC duplex fiber optics cables The maximum distances that the library supports on a Fibre Channel link is determined by the link speed the type of fiber 50 micron or 62 5 micron and the device to which the library is attached If the library attaches to an HBA Host Bus Adapter refer to the distances
24. default data keys specified in the key manager This setting applies to all drives in the TL2000 TL4000 logical library Internal Label Selective Encryption Check your tape backup software application documentation to see if this feature is supported Internal Label Encrypt All Check your tape backup software application documentation to see if this feature is supported 10 A primary and secondary key management server can be set for each logical library Each partition has its own Encryption and key management settings Maintaining primary and secondary key management servers are desired for maximum availability of encrypted backup and recovery These settings are required for Library Managed Encryption only Enter the EKM Server Setting information e Primary IP address IPv4 or IPv6 Enter the IP address of the primary key management server e Primary TCP port After entering the Primary IP address the library will automatically set the value of the Primary TCP port e Secondary IP address IPv4 or IPv6 Enter the IP address of the secondary key management server e Secondary TCP port After entering the Secondary IP address the library will automatically set the value of the Secondary TCP port Note The Default Port for TCP SSL disabled is 3801 The Default Port for SSL is 443 These values are the default values set by the library They can be changed depending on the user configuration but the user has to make
25. fan motion stopped The subcode indicates which drive sled fan is affected Refer to Isolating Drive Sled Problems on page 7 9 Subcode 01 drive sled 1 bottom Subcode 02 drive sled 2 IC Bus Failure Power Supply x fan failed Redundancy might be at risk The subcode indicates which power supply fan is affected Refer to Isolating a Power Supply Problem on page 7 7 Subcode 01 1st PS fan from bottom Subcode 02 2nd PS fan from bottom DF Power Good signal that is changed from 2 to 1 Power Supplies F6 No drive installed A drive was never Install at least one drive installed 8 14 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Chapter 9 Service Procedures Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots In the event of a severe mechanical problem with the library or if circumstances require you to remove tape cartridges do the following If the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface is still operational 1 Move the tapes from the drive s to the magazines using the Manage Library gt Move Media command Web User Interface or Control gt Move Cartridges command Operator Control Panel See Manage Library Move Media on Releasing the If neither one of these processes works see Magazines Manually Releasing the Magazines Manually If the directions in Steps 1 and 2 above do not allow you to remove the tapes do
26. m 81 ft with the appropriate cable and terminator The table below gives the maximum bus length between terminators for the LVD interface Table 3 2 Maximum bus length between terminators Maximum Bus Length Between Terminators in Type of Interconnection meters Multi drop daisy chain 1 server and 12 LVD multiple drives Note The maximum bus lengths stated in this table include the internal length of the bus For maximum performance multiple SCSI buses may be required see Using Multiple SCSI Buses and Ultrium Tape Drives must be the only target devices that are active on the bus Note Daisy chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus performance SCSI cables connectors and host bus adapters Note For maximum performance the quantity of tape drives that you can attach to one SCSI bus is limited and is based on the type of bus that you have and the amount of data compression achieved Ultra160 SCSI buses have a bandwidth of 160 MB per second The table below lists the types of SCSI buses and gives the recommended maximum quantity of drives that you can attach Table 3 3 Recommended maximum quantity of drives per SCSI bus Type of Drive Ultra 160 SCSI Bus LVD Ultrium 3 1 drive at 2 1 compression Using Multiple SCSI Buses The library has two SCSI connectors for each tape drive in the library Each drive can be daisy chained using a SCSI bus jumper 3 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Li
27. on page 5 58 7 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table continued Cartridge VOLSER is reported Probable cause cartridge with no label or damaged label as unknown Ensure that cartridge is properly labelled If cartridge is properly labelled unload the cartridge from drive and perform an inventory OCP Control gt Re Inventory Web Manage Library gt Perform Inventory If VOLSER is again reported as Unknown run Library Verify Service gt Library Verify DRIVE ID SCSI SAS OR FIBRE CHANNEL LOOP Changed drive ID but the host server does not recognize the new ID Ensure that all devices on the same bus network have unique ID numbers Ensure that you cycle power on the library after changing the ID Reboot the host server Tape library performance The library is not efficiently backing up data Check the network bandwidth from the host computer If you are backing up data over a network consider comparing to a local only backup Ensure that the library and tape drive are on their own SCSI bus and not daisy chained to another tape drive or to the hard drive being backed up Ensure that the library is connected to a LVDS SCSI bus and there are no single ended SE devices on the same bus because this will cause the entire bus to negotiate down to SE speed 4 Use an Ultral60 SCSI bus and high quality cabling with the li
28. or homogeneous similar applications Some applications and some servers do not allow for sharing a library between systems Configurations can be created that enable the library to process commands from multiple heterogeneous applications and multiple homogeneous applications From the library s Web User Interface or Operator Control Panel the following actions can be performed e Configure the library so that it is partitioned into separate logical libraries that independently communicate with separate applications through separate control paths This configuration requires no special capabilities from the server or application For more information see Using Multiple Logical Libraries for Library Sharing on page 3 2 e Configure any single logical library including the entire physical library so that it is shared by two or more servers that are running the same application Depending on the capabilities of the server and application there are several ways to set up this type of configuration Three typical ways include Configuring one server host to communicate with the library through a single control path all other servers send requests to that server through a network Configuring all of the servers to communicate with the library through a single common control path This configuration is used in high availability environments Multi initiator configurations are only supported by certain adapters and
29. power supply was shipped to you and return to Dell Replacing a Library Controller Card Read Me before Continuing The Library Controller Card contains a copy of the vital product data VPD for your library The VPD contains your current library configuration A backup copy of this VPD is contained within the electronics of the Library Enclosure When the Library Controller Card is replaced the new replacement card should contain zeros O s in key VPD locations Upon detection of these zeros the library will automatically attempt to write VPD data to the new Library Controller Card from the backup copy of the VPD contained in the Library Enclosure In rare occurrences the new Library Controller Card may contain valid non zero VPD data left over from having been installed previously in another library If this occurs the library which is expecting to see zeros in the VPD area will instead detect valid VPD data and will not know which copy of the VPD is the correct one It will detect a VPD Mismatch and display on the Operator Control Panel a screen entitled VPD Selection where it is asking you to determine which copy of VPD should be written to the new Library Controller Card Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 11 If the message VPD Selection is displayed at the Operator Control Panel carefully highlight the VPD from Enclosure option to copy that version of the VPD to the new Library Controller Card Th
30. to anchor the replacement library enclosure to the rack Proceed _to Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure on page 10 27 10 26 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Desktop Installation 1 Place the library in its permanent location 2 Proceed to Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure 1 Connect all cables to the replacement library enclosure 2 Power ON the replacement library enclosure 3 Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version a Visit http www support dell com to download the latest levels of library and drive firmware b Using the Web User Interface Service Library gt Upgrade Firmware upgrade library and drive firmware 4 Run the Library Verify test Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify This diagnostic requires a blank or scratch data cartridge 5 Proceed to Returning the Defective Library Enclosure Returning the Defective Library Enclosure 1 Remove the shipping label H in Figure 10 15 on page 10 16 and lock E from the rear panel of the defective library place the lock in the slot located in the top center of the library and secure with the shipping lock label This will secure the library accessor for shipping 2 Using the replacement library enclosure packagi
31. you must designate a reserved slot which can be used to hold the cleaning cartridge e I O Station Enabled If checked the I O Station is enabled If not the first 3 slots in a 4U library or the 1st slot in a 2U library are configured as storage See Configure Library General on page 5 43 e Auto Clean Enabled Automatically cleans drive when drive requests cleaning and cleaning cartridge is present in a reserved slot or a dedicated cleaning slot All cleaning cartridges must have CLN as part of the bar code The Universal Cleaning Cartridge has the bar code label CLNUxxLx e Bar Code Label Length Reported to Host Choose between 6 and 8 With 6 the first six characters of the cartridge VOLSER Volume Serial Numbers will be reported to the host With 8 All characters in the VOLSER first six characters plus the two character media type identifier will be reported to the host e Click one of the following 4 24 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Refresh Click this button to update the current screen Apply Selections Click this button to submit the changes made to the screen General Library Name Library Mode Random O Sequential Autoload Loop Active Slots 33 1 0 Station Enabled w Auto Clean Enabled C Barcode Label Length a ly Reported To Host a77ug066 Refresh _ Apply Selections Figure 4 24 The 2U library Configure Libr
32. 0 IPv4 address or Host name and domain omain Name a 7ug065 Figure 4 37 The Configure Library Email Notification screen 2 If you would like to be notified when an error occurs select Notify Errors 3 If you would like to be notified when a warning occurs select Notify Warnings 4 In To Email Address enter the email address to which the information will be sent 5 In SMTP Server Address IPv4 or IPv6 enter the IP Address of the SMTP server associated with the email address 6 Enter the Domain Name for your library This field cannot be blank when using event notification 4 34 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Note If you attempt to enter a blank value for the Domain Name a warning message will appear It will say If you are using Event Notification then a value is required for the Domain Name 7 Click one of the following e Refresh to cancel all of your entries and leave the settings as they were e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Configuring SNMP settings This page shows the current SNMP configuration of the library and allows modification to the configuration When a change is requested a box checks to confirm the changes Click SNMP in the left navigation pane to display the SNMP page Enabled vi ee SNMP DESTINATIONS e isv3 isv3 storagetucson ibm com tucson ibm com Version SNMPv1 V IPv4 address or Host name and domain
33. 63 WORM Media v s x so Data Security on WORM Media i ow amp amp 60 WORM Media Errors 6 4 Cleaning Cartridge 2 2 2 1 1 64 Bar Code Label 2 64 Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels 0 Write Protect Switch 2 2 1 1 www 66 Handling the Cartridges 2 2 1 1 2 6 7 Provide Training 2 1 1 6 7 Ensure Proper Packaging 6 8 Provide Proper Acclimation and Favinonmental Conditions e amp w amp mi Perform a Thorough fappeenon oe ew amp 2 Handle the Cartridge Carefully 69 Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges 6 10 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 1 Installation Problems sa amp 7 6 Library Recovery Problem Determination s oaos a Pe Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems 7 7 Isolating a Power Supply Problem 7 7 Isolating Drive Sled Problems 7 9 Isolating a Library Controller Card vs SO Enclosure Problem 7 10 Isolating Web User Interface Problems 7 11 Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems 7 12 Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems 7 12 Identifying a Suspect Cartridge Zz Chapter 8 Error codes 8 1 Chapter 9 Service Procedures 9 1 Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots 9 1 Releasing the Magazines Manually 9 1 Using the ITDT Firmware oe Dump Retrieval and Drive Test Tool gt amp amp
34. Cartridge Ultrium 3 Data Cartridge Ultrium 3 WORM Cartridge Ultrium 2 Data Cartridge Ultrium 1 Data Cartridge READ ONLY LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge An Ultrium 3 Tape Drive must have a minimum firmware level of 54xx for it to be compatible with the WORM cartridge To determine the complete specifications of the bar code and the bar code label contact your sales representative When attaching a bar code label to a tape cartridge place the label only in the recessed label area see J in Figure 6 1 on page 6 1 A label that extends outside of the recessed area can cause loading problems in the drive Attention Do not place any type of mark on the white space at either end of the bar code A mark in this area may prevent the library from reading the label Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 5 3 2 D Figure 6 3 Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 6 Tape Cartridge The volume serial number LTO123 and bar code are printed on the label Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels Apply the following guidelines whenever using bar code labels Do not reuse a label or reapply a used label over an existing label Before you apply a new label remove the old label by slowly pulling it at a right angle to the cartridge case Use peel clean labels that do not leave a residue after being removed If there is glue residue on the cartridge remove it by gently rubbing it with your finger Do not use a s
35. Configure Library Event Notification page The following elements are displayed on the Event Notification page Notify Errors Select this item to be notified of library errors via email Notify Warnings Select this item to be notified of library warnings via email To Email Address Enter the email address of the individual you would like to receive the errors and or warnings Chapter 5 Operations 5 55 Note The TL2000 TL400 email address field cannot be empty clear The email notification setup allows the user to turn off the feature by deselecting the notify error and notify warnings boxes The user can add an invalid email as long as the email address format is correct i e A xXxx xxx SMTP Server Address IPv4 or IPv6 Enter the address of the email server of the individual you would like to receive the errors and or warnings This can be an Pv4 or IPv6 address or a host name and domain If a host name and domain is listed the IPv4 or IPv6 address will be resolved from the DNS using that name and the address will be stored rather than the name If the address changes a new name or a new address will need to be entered Domain Name Enter the Domain Name for your library This field cannot be blank when using email notification Note If you attempt to enter a blank value for the Domain Name a warning message will appear It will say If you are using Email Notification then a value is required for the Domain Name Clic
36. Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 3 Plug the other end of each power cord into the nearest properly grounded power outlet Use separate power sources for each power supply for redundant power Attention To disconnect all power from the library remove the power cord from each outlet The power button removes power from portions of the library and the drives but the power supplies still have AC power at their inputs 4 Remove the protective plastic on the exterior surfaces of the library 5 Turn ON the library using the power button Check the Operator Control Panel display to make sure the library is receiving power If it is not check the power connections and your power source During the Power On Self Test POST all four LEDs are illuminated briefly followed by a flashing Ready LED When the initialization sequence is complete the Home screen see Power ON Display will be displayed Configuring Your Library Note Review the information in Installation Planning before configuring your library The library can be configured using the Operator Control Panel and or the Web User Interface The recommended method for configuring your library is using the Web User Interface For complete detailed configuration information on all of the functions available on our library using both the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface see a For default library settings see Con
37. Depending on the changes made you will either be disconnected and need to login again or reboot the library If a reboot is required the following Warning message will appear after the Submit button is clicked Changes Will Take Effect After A Reboot a 7ug171 Figure 5 44 Warning Screen The library must be rebooted or the changes will not take place Configure Library User Access This page allows the user to add and modify user accounts See Login on page 2 5 for information about user types The Configure Library gt User Access page is accessible only to the Admin and Service login Access is denied to User and Superuser logins The Admin login has access to all library functions except Service Library gt Advance Diagnostics The Service login has access to all library functions including Service Library gt Advance Diagnostics Roles _ Disable Superuser Disable User Passwords Role User New Password Enter Up To Twenty Characters eeccee Repeat Password eeccee Support Contact Support Name Support Phone Support Email Password Rules Minimum Number Of Characters Minimum Number Of Upper Case Alphabetic Characters A Z Minimum Number Of Lower Case Alphabetic Characters a z Minimum Number Of Numeric Characters 0 9 Minimum Number Of Special Characters amp _ s lt gt Maximum Number Of Identical Consecutive Characters Maximum Number O
38. Drive 0 Statio n 2 1 No Cleaning Required Clean a 7ug259 Figure 5 51 No Cleaning Required If there is no cleaning cartridge in the library Clean cannot be selected and the Slot displays N A See Figure 5 52 Clean Drive Slot Drive N A 10 a7 7ug260 Figure 5 52 No cleaning cartridge in library Note If the library is configured for Auto Clean and a cleaning cartridge is resident in a reserved slot the library automatically loads the drive with a cleaning cartridge The drive completes a cleaning and the library returns the cleaning cartridge to the reserved slot If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present in a reserved slot Auto Clean status on the Web User Interface Status screen shows Chk Media Rsvd Slot Clean Drive fiot pene wo om a 7ug122 Figure 5 53 Service Library Clean Drive page Service Library Advanced Diagnostics for Service Personnel Only This menu is for use by Service Personnel only Service Library View Logs This page allows the library logs to be viewed after entering the following e Log Type Error Trace Logs all the error messages Informational Trace Logs all the informational messages created as the library operates Warning Trace Logs all warning messages created by the library Warning messages will not stop a library s operation but does remind the user of issues that may become a problem Ex
39. Figure 5 42 The Configure Library Drives page for a 4U library Click one of the following e Refresh to cancel the changes made to the screen e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Note When configuration changes of a disabled drive are made from the Operator Control Panel OCP the drive powers ON after committing changes When configuration changes of a disabled drive are made from the Web Interface RMU the drive does not power ON after committing changes Configure Library Network This page shows the current network configuration of the library and allows modification to the configuration When a change is requested a pop up box checks confirms the request 1 Click Network in the left navigation pane to display the Network page Network Protocol Stack Host Name Domain Name Enable SSL for Web Ethernet Settings IPv4 Enable DHCP Static Address Subnet Mask Gateway address DNS Primary DNS Secondary IPv6 DNS Primary DNS Secondary Enable Stateless Auto Config Enable DHCP Static Address Prefix length Gateway address Figure 5 43 Configure Library Network Page IPv6 only w ATL008 storage tucson ibm com O Auto iv 2002 90B E006 646 9 1 1 224 119 2002 90B E006 646 9 11 224 121 a o 2002 90B E006 198 9 11 198 225 64 2002 908 E006 198 1 a77ug074 Important Do not click the Submit button until all changes have been made to the Network page Once the Su
40. Half 100 Mbit Full Please refer to http support dell com to determine the availability of manual Ethernet settings in your library s firmware Enter IPv4 settings if applicable a Enable DHCP Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by the DHCP server b Static Address Enter the assigned IPv4 address The format of an IPv4 IP address is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods c Network Mask Enter the assigned IPv4 Network Mask d Gateway address Enter the assigned IPv4 Gateway address This address allows access outside the local network Enter IPv6 settings if applicable a Enable DHCP Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by the DHCP server b Enable Stateless Auto Config Stateless Auto config is ALWAYS on not defeatable c Static Address Enter the assigned IPv6 address The format of an IPv6 IP address is a 128 bit numeric address written as 8 groups of four numbers separated by colons d Prefix length The default prefix length is set to 64 but can be set to any length depending upon the address used e Gateway address Enter the assigned IPv6 Gateway address This address allows access outside the local network Click one of the following Chapter 5 Operations 5 51 e Refresh to cancel the changes made to the screen e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Note
41. I O Station Enabled box is not checked the slots are configured as storage Note The number of I O Station slots and storage are automatically assigned when the I O Station Enabled box is checked or unchecked Dedicated Cleaning Slot Earlier versions of the 4U library contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot DCS This DCS can be retained and is supported by future library firmware updates Library firmware after 1 95 will allow removal of the DCS thus enabling this slot to be used as a storage slot To remove the DCS perform the following procedures using the Operator Control Panel OCP 1 Navigate to the Library Settings Logical Library Settings screen Configure gt Library Settings or Logical Library Settings Select General Scroll down to Remove DCS Select No or Yes Select Save then press the Enter button A py Attention If your library originally contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot and was removed it can only be reinstated by restoring factory default settings To enable automatic cleaning of the drives when needed a slot must be reserved a cleaning cartridge must be present in the reserved slot and Auto Clean must be enabled Reserving Slots Reserving a slot is accomplished by reducing the Active Slot count in any particular logical library Slots are reserved beginning with the last available slot in the last magazine of the library A cleaning cartridge in a reserved slot is available to any logical li
42. Intervention Required A cartridge is present in the drive but could not be loaded or unloaded without manual intervention 04 10 Logical unit not ready auxiliary memory not accessible 04 12 Logical unit not ready offline 08 01 Logical unit communication failure 09 00 Track following error servo 0C 00 Write Error A Write operation has failed This is probably due to bad media but may be hardware related 11 00 Unrecovered Read Error A Read operation failed This is probably due to bad media but may be hardware related 11 12 Auxiliary memory read error The drive reported that it is unable to read the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge 14 00 Recorded Entity Not Found A space or Locate command failed because a format violation prevented the target from being found 14 03 End Of Data not found A Read type operation failed because a format violation related to a missing EOD data set 14 10 Not Ready Auxiliary memory not accessible The drive is not able to become ready because it is unable to access the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge 17 01 Recovered data with retries 1A 00 Parameter list length error The amount of parameter data sent is incorrect 20 00 Invalid Command Operation Code The Operation Code in the command was not a valid Operation Code 24 00 Invalid field in CDB An invalid field has been detected in a Command Descriptor Block 25 00 LUN not supported The command was addressed to a non
43. Logs screen Service Save Drive Dump Service Library Perform DE page 5 20 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 29 5 29 9 30 9 30 5 31 5 32 5 34 9 36 5 37 9 39 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 42 5 42 5 44 5 45 5 45 5 45 5 47 5 47 5 49 5 50 5 50 5 52 5 52 5 54 5 55 5 55 5 56 5 58 5 59 5 59 5 59 5 60 5 61 5 61 5 62 5 58 5 59 5 60 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 7 1 7 2 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 10 17 10 18 10 19 Service Library Perform Key Path Diagnostics page The Service Library peede Pinware page showing one Ultrium 3 SAS Half Height V2 drive and one Ultrium 4 SAS Half Height drive e Service Library Reboot page The LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge Ultrium Data and WORM Tape Cartridges Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 6 Tape Cartridge Setting the write protect ei Double boxing tape cartridges for shippihg Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge A 250w power supply with LEDs A 80w power supply without LEDs Access holes for the left magazine Access holes for the right magazine Left magazine pulled out of the 2U library Left Magazines pulled out of the 4U Library 9 4 ESD label Shipping Lock and Label erage Location Shipping Lock and Label i Library drive sled
44. P Change network settings to IPv4 only before downgrading firmware 5D 5E ON m Verify that autoclean is enabled 2 Check for an expired cleaning cartridge and replace if necessary 3 Refer to Configuring I O Stations and Reserving Slots Cleaning cartridge expired Replace cleaning cartridge 62 63 4 6 Invalid cartridge Drive rejected the data cartridge as invalid Invalid cleaning cartridge Drive rejected the cleaning cartridge as invalid 8 12 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 8 3 Warning events continued Invali D nvalid upgrade cartridge Drive rejected Not supported the upgrade cartridge as invalid Medi d tie t t nee a ome a Ensure that diagnostic tape is not write protected protected Medium error incompatible medium for l Replace incorrect cartridges write operation Refer to your host application documentation for problem SCSI echo buffer overwritten determination information Download prevented due to Older firmware image doesn t support current bar code incompatible bar code reader hardware reader hardware No downgrade possible Download prevented due to Older firmware image doesn t support current library incompatible LCM controller hardware No downgrade possible Download prevented due to Older firmware image doesn t support current robotics incompatible Rob Code controller hardware No downgrade possible D
45. PIN is enabled but before it is entered Configure Save Restore Use this menu item to restore the factory default settings 5 26 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Save Restore Restore Passwords Restore All Restore Library Config Save Library Config Figure 5 19 Configure Save Restore menu e Restore Passwords This menu item restores the factory default for both the RMU Admin user access password and the service password a 7ug045 e Restore all This menu item restores all factory default settings refer to Table 54 e Restore Library Config This menu item restores your saved library configuration from a USB device If you have more than one saved configuration file dbb on your USB device press Select then use the up and down keys to move between the different files When the correct configuration file is displayed press Select again e Save Library Config This menu item saves your library configuration to a USB device Note Ensure the USB device is formatted for FAT12 FAT16 or FAT32 and does not use autorun files Note Configuration files saved with one version of library firmware may not be compatible with other versions of firmware It is recommended to save a configuration file each time the library firmware is upgraded Restore the library using a configuration file that was saved with the same version of firmware currently installed in the library Import
46. Position 2 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 2U 4U Position 1 2U 4U Position 1 2U 4U Position 1 Drive types Fibre Channel Drive settings SAS Drive settings SCSI Drive settings Role Password Role Password Role Password Role Password 4U Position 4 4U Position 3 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 Logical Library Position Speed Port type Loop ID Logical Library Position ID Logical Library Position ID 4U Position 4 4U Position 3 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 Logical Library Position Speed Port type Loop ID Logical Library Position Logical Library Position AU Position 4 AU Position 4 AU Position 3 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 4U Position 3 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 Logical Library Position Speed Port type Loop ID Logical Library Position Logical Library Position G 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide AU Position 4 4U Position 3 2U 4U Position 2 2U 4U Position 1 Logical Library Position Speed Port type Loop ID Logical Library Position ID Logical Library Position Appendix H Accessibility Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability such as restricted mobility or limited vision to use the HTML version of the customer documentation successfully
47. SCSI transport element full invalid test number SCSI parameter list length error Refer to your host application documentation for problem SCSI parameter list error invalid field determination information supported 7 SCSI wrong checksum SCSI command sequence error SCSI drive disabled Check your configuration settings SCSI I O Station disabled SCSI flash image does not fit bootcode SCSI media removal prevented by drive Refer to your host application documentation for problem SCSI media removal prevented by determination information library SCSI flash image does not fit personality Check the version of firmware that is used for the upgrade SCSI source slot or drive empty Chapter 8 Error codes 8 11 Table 8 3 Warning events continued SCSI drive type not supported in this Check whether a version of firmware is available that library supports this drive type For a list of supported drives refer to Ultrium Tape Drives on page 1 9 L i 1 i SCS incompatib MA GAA GAA eack your configuration settings not accessible SCSI source not ready Complete move process and retry operation SCSI destination source not ready SCSI library controller busy Complete process and retry operation QO SCSI Cannot make reservation Refer to your host application documentation for problem SCSI invalid slave robotic controller determinafion normato request Check robotics statu
48. SCSI drive in middle position half height SAS drive in bottom position on back panel of a 4U library SAS cable B SCSI terminator Fibre Channel cable Bthernet cable Prowse O SOSS Owes S 5 If present remove the conductive tape from the drive sled refer to Figure 10 9 on page 10 4 n page 10 8 6 Loosen the blue captive thumbscrews J in Figure 10 6 on the drive sled 7 Pull straight back on the drive sled handle QJ to remove it from the library see Figure 10 7 on page 10 6 8 If you are replacing the tape drive sled proceed to Installing a Tape Drive Sled for instructions If you are not replacing the tape drive sled immediately you will need to perform the following procedures a Install a drive cover plate to protect your library from dust and debris b To remove the Missing drive indicators on the Operator Control Panel Attention LED and the Web User Interface System Status screen modify or resubmit logical library setting Operator Control Panel Configure gt Logical Libraries or Web User Interface Configure Library gt Logical Libraries Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 5 a 7ug027 Figure 10 7 Pulling the drive sled out of the library drive sled without ESD springs shown Installing a Tape Drive Sled Note Power OFF the library before installing a SCSI drive sled Fibre Channel and SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and may be removed and instal
49. Time 13 28 52 D Auto Clean Status Chk Media Rsvd Slot z Figure 2 5 4U library System Status screen showing media attention status e The Power Supply Status will only appear if redundant power is being utilized with a 4U library and the library was manufactured after March 14 2008 If a redundant power supply fails the System Status screen will appear as shown in Figure 2 6 System Status View Legend 01 23 2008 10 44 42 Library Name ATLANTA162 Si Power Supply Attention Drive 1 Status Ready Drive 3 Status Ready Empty Total I O Station Closed Library Time 10 44 42 Power Supply 1 Online 1 Status ee Failed Figure 2 6 4U library System Status screen showing a power supply failure Note If your library has 04 level redundant power supplies see label on top of power supply it is normal for the one in Standby mode to turn its Green LED off You can test this power supply by pulling the power connector from the other Active power supply The power supply that was in Standby mode will now become Active and its Green LED should light If it doesn t replace it refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 10 n page 10 10 Chapter 2 User Interfaces 2 7 If your library has 05 level redundant power supplies the Green LED will be ON on both power supplies If both Green LEDs are not ON replace the failed power supply refer to Replacing a Power Supply on
50. Ultra2 SCSI Uses an 8 or 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 40 or 80 MBps e Ultra3 SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160 MBps e Ultral60 SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160 MBps e Ultra320 SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 320 MBps SME System Managed Encryption SMI S See Storage Management Initiative Specification SMI S SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is a standard for email transmissions across the internet SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is used by network management systems to monitor network attached devices for conditions that warrant administrative attention SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol Used to synchronize the clocks of network attached devices SMW Servo Manufacturer s Word SNS Sense I 16 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide special feature A feature that can be ordered to enhance the capability storage capacity or performance of a product but is not essential for its basic work SPI Security Parameters Index SR Service representative see also CE SRAM Static random access memory SS Status store SSL Secure Sockets Layer A set of cryptographic protocols for secure communications on the Internet for such things as web browsing email Internet faxing instant messaging and other data transfer SSL allows applications to communicate across a network in a way tha
51. Unit has not Self Configured The drive has just powered on and has not completed its self test sequence and can not process commands 3F 01 Code Download The firmware in the drive has just been changed by a Write Buffer command 3F 03 Inquiry data has changed 3F OE Reported LUNs data has changed 3F OF Echo buffer overwritten 40 xx Diagnostic failure A diagnostic test has failed The xx ASCQ is a vendor specific code indicating the failing component C 10 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table C 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name 3 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Continued Byte 12 Byte 13 ASC ASCO 41 00 Data path failure 43 00 Message Error A message could not be sent or received due to excessive transmission errors 44 00 Internal target failure A hardware failure has been detected in the drive that has caused the command to fail 45 00 Select Reset Failure An attempt to reselect an initiator in order to complete the command has failed 48 00 Initiator detected error message received 49 00 Invalid message error 4A 00 Command phase error 4B 00 Data Phase Error A command could not be completed because too many parity errors occurred during the Data phase 4E 00 Overlapped Commands An initiator selected the drive even though it already had a command outstanding in the drive 50 00
52. WWNN Worldwide Node Name WWPN Worldwide port name X XR External register XRA External register address register Glossary I 19 I 20 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Index A Access PIN Operator Control Panel 5 25 accessibility keyboard H 1 repeat rate of up and down buttons H 1 shortcut keys H 1 accessor 1 5 accessory package 4 2 active slots 5 20 5 43 Active Slots 4 24 air quality 4 1 air vents front panel 1 1 AME 5 46 Application Managed Encryption AME 4 27 ASC C 1 ASCQ C l auto clean 5 20 5 43 Auto Clean 4 24 B Bar Code Labels 6 4 guidelines for using 6 6 bar code reader 1 5 bootcode firmware current level 5 33 BOP 5 37 Border Gateway Protocol BGP 1 7 C cable host interface 4 16 Cartridge 1 11 6 1 capacity scaling 6 1 cleaning 6 4 compatibility 6 3 data 6 1 proper handling 6 7 specifications 6 10 Write Protect Switch 6 6 cartridge magazines 1 1 4 38 Cartridge environment 6 8 cartridge suspect 2 2 cartridges inserting in library 4 42 populating library 4 42 Cartridges insert and remove 5 65 channel calibration 1 10 choosing a location 4 1 clean drive 5 58 cleaning slot 5 67 clearance 4 1 Configure menu network settings 4 20 configuring library using Web User Interface 4 20 configuring the library 4 19 control keys 5 7 control path drive 5 34 5 48 control path failover 3 2 5 45 control paths 5 23 multiple 3 2 using multi
53. accessible or error during Read Write operation Save restore configuration settings not enough internal memory available for creating the file and restoring the file respectively y pd Save restore configuration settings restore buffer corrupted checksum calculation failed Save restore configuration settings data base field corrupted Save restore configuration settings invalid personality we Ul Save restore configuration settings invalid file LIBRARY QO pd Drive wake up failed QO QO Error accessing slot status Accessor load not reached Cartridge Present sensor pd No activity after Load command Timeout while loading tape Q3 No activity after load command Timeout drive Unload g N Drive terminated unsuccessfully Tape not ejected at robot unload Qo any J T rg O lt S er om No oO 5 D go wg O pt ov ky LS o gt Q oN D 5 D ge a on p e LS WN O pt WN O E Q Table 8 2 Sub error codes continued Slot not free at robot unload os Cartridge not seated in load phase Warning events Warning events that are described are reported by way of email notification The Attention LED flashes when warning events for the following occur e Media e Fan e Redundant power supply An appropriate message is posted on the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface Table 8 3 Warning events
54. an I O Station and you wish to import media follow these steps 1 From the OCP Main Menu select Control gt Open I O Station The I O Station will unlock itself The I O station slot opens and the Unlocking I O station message displays Wait for the Insert remove cartridge and close I O station message to insert or remove the cartridge then close the I O station by gently pushing the slot back into the left magazine Note It is recommended to wait for the messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure that the library is ready to handle the cartridges Chapter 5 Operations 5 65 2 Pull out the I O Station and insert a data cartridge s On a 2U library only 1 cartridge can be inserted at a time On the 4U library 3 cartridges can be inserted at one time 3 Close the I O Station The library will automatically start an inventory The cartridges in the I O Station will be counted but unassigned until they are moved into storage slots 4 From the OCP Main Menu select Control gt Move Cartridges and move the data cartridges into the desired data slots See Control Move Cartridges on page 5 17 or Manage Library Move Media on page 5 41 for more information If the library does not have an I O Station all slots are assigned to storage and you wish to import media you will need to release a magazine and insert the cartridges manually following these steps 1 From the OCP Main Menu selec
55. an Ultrium universal cleaning cartridge see Cleaning Cartridge on page 6 4 e Ensure that the cleaning cartridge has not expired A drive will automatically eject an expired cleaning cartridge A cleaning cartridge is good for 50 cleans If your cleaning cartridge has expired order a new cleaning cartridge Clean Drive LED e If the problem still exists contact technical support Error LED If the Error LED remains ON after completing any user action listed for the error code in Chapter 8 Error codes on page 8 1 Jrun Library verify Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify e If the test passes the Error LED will turn OFF e If the test fails cycle library power to turn the Error LED OFF To check the library error log log on to the Web User Interface and click Service Library then View Logs If the Operator Control Panel displays WARNING Unit Busy click OK to turn the error LED OFF FIRMWARE Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 3 Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table continued Many problems can be resolved by a firmware upgrade Ensure that both the library and drive firmware are at the latest levels available Determining current firmware levels e Library firmware Monitor gt Library gt Identity gt Version e Drive firmware Monitor gt Drives gt Identity select a drive gt Firmware Rev Update library firmware i i Upgrade Firmware on Update drive firmware Service Service Dri
56. apply the changes made to the screen Configure Library Logs amp Traces This page allows service personnel to set the error log mode to Continuous or to Stop trace at first error 5 54 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Logs amp Traces ro E oui Continuous Stop Trace At First Error Stopped Trace Level Cmd Response Event Trace Data Low Level Recovered Trace Error Hard Error Trace Filter _ main Drive CDB Interpreter Robotic Trace OCP Input OCP SCSI Module SDCI Module Output a 7ug071 Figure 5 47 Configure Library Logs amp Traces page It is recommended that you select Continuous for the Error Log Mode so that all information for logs and traces will be captured Click one of the following e Refresh to cancel the changes made to the screen e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Note The trace level and trace filter selection options are only changeable by Service personnel Configure Library Event Notification This page allows the user to enter information for event notification When set up correctly Event Notification allows the library to send an email to a designated individual when the library is experiencing a problem Event Notification otify Errors C On otify Wamings C On o Email Address MTP Server Address IPv4 0 0 0 0 IPv4 address or Host name and domain omain Name a 7ug065 Figure 5 48
57. digital character code bezel Decorative and safety cover bicolored Having two colors bit Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary numbering system BOM or bill of materials A list of specific types and amounts of direct materials that are expected to be used to produce a specific job or quantity of output Border Gateway Protocol BGP BGP is the core routing protocol of the Internet It works by maintaining a table of IP networks or prefixes that designate network reachability among autonomous systems AS BRMS Backup Recovery and Media Services browser A client program that initiates requests to a web server and displays the information that the server returns I 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide buffer A routine or storage that is used to compensate for a difference in rate of flow of data or time of occurrence of events when data is transferred from one device to another bus A facility for transferring data between several devices that are located between two end points only one device able to transmit at a specified moment byte A string that consists of some bits usually 8 that are treated as a unit and represent a character A fundamental data unit C CA certification In cryptography a certificate from a certificate authority CA capacity The amount of data that can be contained on storage media and expressed in bytes of data cartridge manu
58. driver to use 1 14 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Chapter 2 User Interfaces This library has two user interfaces e Operator Control Panel located on the front panel of the library Web User Interface on page 2 4 accessed via a web browser Operator Control Panel The Operator Control Panel operates in two basic modes User Interaction mode This mode is employed when a user is pushing buttons on the Operator Control Panel System Driven mode This is the normal mode of operation In this mode the Operator Control Panel displays status associated with the actions that were caused from commands issued via the drive s internal drive to library serial interface When an Operator Control Panel button is pressed and released the Operator Control Panel automatically transitions to User Interaction mode User Interaction mode will continue until 3 minutes after a user stops pushing buttons or the requested accessor action stops whichever is longer At which time the Operator Control Panel will return to System Driven mode If necessary the Operator Control Panel automatically transitions to the System Driven mode When this occurs the library must remember the previous function before the display mode changed Therefore the next button pressed only transitions the Operator Control Panel to the User Interaction mode from the System Driven mode In case of the activated user s
59. elevator pic value failed m h h 1h 1 Setting of rotation pic value failed Ean 88h 9h 8Ah 8Bh 8Ch 8Dh 8Eh 8Fh 90h 91h 92h 93h 1h 94h 1h 95h Setting of sled pic value failed Gripper blocked Slider blocked Elevator blocked DSD S Rotation blocked Sled blocked Cannot find gripper block h 1h 1h h Cannot find slider block Cannot find elevator block 5 Cannot find rotation block Cannot find sled block D S Gripper outside range Slider outside range QO Elevator outside range 96h Rotation outside range Sled outside range No cartridge present sensor found No slider home sensor found No rotation home sensor found No sled position sensor found The range of gripper is wrong The range of slider is wrong The range of elevator is wrong The range of rotation is wrong The range of sled is wrong Open import export element failed 81h A3h SE2 Block 81h A4h SE2 No Block 81h A5h No Sled2 Home Sensor 81h A6h No Elev Home Sensor Appendix C Sense Data C 3 Table C 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued continue Power supply health check failed due to a power supply failure Please contact service C 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table C 1 Library Sense a ASC and ASCQ continued asc Jasco Demp SSS an fran en Fah an lran n iem n ah n ro an An an fan cn en ron Hardware Error
60. existent logical unit number 26 00 Invalid Field in Parameter List An invalid field has been detected in the data sent during the data phase Appendix C Sense Data C 9 Table C 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name 12 13 Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Continued Byte 12 Byte 13 ASC ASCO 27 00 Write Protect A Write type operation has been requested on a cartridge which has been write protected 28 00 Not Ready to Ready Transition A cartridge has been loaded successfully into the drive and is now ready to be accessed 28 01 Import or export element accessed 29 00 Reset The drive has powered on received a reset signal or a bus device reset signal since the initiator last accessed it 29 04 Device internal reset 2A 01 Mode Parameters Changed The Mode parameters for the drive have been changed by an initiator other than the one issuing the command 2E 00 Command sequence error 2C OB Not reserved The OIR bit of the sequential access device page is set and the I T nexus attempting to communicate with the drive does not hold a reservation 2F 00 Commands cleared by another initiator 30 00 Incompatible Media Installed A write type operation could not be executed because it is not supported on the cartridge type that is loaded 30 01 Unknown Format An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge in the drive is of a forma
61. for libraries that contain activeX controls or drv for legacy system drivers DNS Directory Name System This allows the library to recognize text based addresses instead of numeric IP addresses download To transfer programs or data from a computer to a connected device typically a personal computer To transfer data from a computer to a connected device such as a workstation or personal computer DPF Data Path Failover DRAM Dynamic random access memory Glossary I 5 drive magnetic tape A mechanism for moving magnetic tape and controlling its movement Drive Not Configured This message occurs during the first boot after a factory settings restore is run This message is not a real issue since it takes time for the library to configure DRV Drive DSA key Encryption key type DSE Data security erase DSP Digital signal processor E EBCDIC Extended binary coded decimal interchange code EC Edge connector Engineering change ECC Error correction code EEB Ethernet Expansion Blade EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read only memory EIA Electronics Industries Association EIA unit A unit of measure which is established by the Electronic Industries Association equal to 44 45 millimeters 1 75 inches eject To remove or force out from within EKM Encryption Key Manager electronic mail Correspondence in the form of messages that are transmitted between user terminals over a computer net
62. host connection verifying 4 38 host interface cable 4 16 host interface connectors 1 3 host interfaces 3 7 host preparation 4 37 humidity 4 1 I O station 4 38 I O Station 1 1 5 65 I O Station configuring 5 67 I O Station open and close 5 67 identifying a suspect cartridge 1 1 2 2 Import Media 4 42 5 17 5 41 5 65 installation 4 1 rack safety xv Interface 7 12 interfaces 3 7 interfaces supported 1 9 Internet Protocol version 4 1 7 Internet Protocol version 6 1 7 Inventory 5 14 5 42 IP address 4 20 5 33 IP Address 4 30 5 24 5 50 IP Stack 5 24 IPv4 1 7 IPv6 1 7 X 1 ITDT Tool 9 5 K Key Path 5 37 Key Path Diagnostics 5 62 keyboard H 1 L Labels bar code 6 4 guidelines for using 6 6 laser compliance xiv safety xiv LED amber 7 12 LEDs 2 2 7 7 LEDs front panel 1 1 library configuration form G 1 library firmware current level 5 33 library logs 5 59 library mode 4 24 5 20 5 33 5 43 library name 5 43 library network configuration 4 30 5 50 library recovery 7 7 library SNMP configuration 4 35 5 56 library status 5 36 Library Verify 5 29 library weight 1 12 license activation key 4 26 4 27 5 29 Link local IPv6 address 5 10 Linux D 1 D 2 LME 5 46 locating the library 4 1 logical libraries 4 25 5 19 5 44 determining number 3 1 basic guidelines 3 1 using multiple for sharing 3 2 logical libraries assigning 4 25 logs 5 59 low voltage differential LVD SCSI interface 1 9 low power m
63. independent software vendors ISVs Check with your ISV Configuring a single logical library to communicate with multiple servers through multiple control paths This configuration requires that control paths be added see Using Multiple Control Paths on page 3 2 Library configuration is not limited to the examples given above Many configurations are possible and can be designed according to your business needs For additional information refer to your host application documentation 3 1 Using Multiple Logical Libraries for Library Sharing Multiple logical libraries are an effective way for the library to simultaneously back up and restore data from heterogeneous applications For example the library can be partitioned so that it processes e Commands from Application A about Department X in Logical Library 1 e Commands from Application B about Department Y in Logical Library 2 In this configuration the storage slots and drives in each logical library are dedicated to that library and are not shared among other libraries Commands issued by the applications travel to the library through two unique control paths Thus the data processing for e Department X is confined to the storage slots and drives in Logical Library 1 e Department Y is confined to the storage slots and drives in Logical Library 2 Using Multiple Control Paths In addition to creating multiple logical libraries any logical library can be
64. levels higher than 8 xx support Path Failover on LTO 5 drives as well as LTO 4 Full Height drives Library firmware levels higher than B 50 support Path Failover on LTO 6 Tape Drives and also LTO 5 and LTO 4 Full Height Drives The Path Failover feature can be installed by the customer For more information about using the path failover feature see the Dell PowerVault TL4000 Failover Configuration Guide included with the library documentation if purchased at point of sale and with the customer kit if purchased later 3 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Library Partitioning and Element Addressing Library 4U systems with firmware versions of 80 and higher and containing at least 2 drives have the ability to configure two logical libraries create two partitions This partitioning has been expanded with the new library firmware and half high drive integration Now it is possible to configure 1 2 3 or 4 partitions in the 4U library Additionally the 2U library can now be configured into one or two partitions Each library must contain at least one drive per logical library partition In a partitioned library the Operator Control Panel OCP only reports the status of logical library 1 in the main menu due to space limitations The user must navigate to the logical libraries status in the OCP to get the information on the additional library partitions Partitioning of 2U Libraries When two ha
65. library and drive firmware proceed to the next step If you are not running the latest levels of library and drive firmware download the firmware that needs to be updated to your library host 3 Update library and drive firmware on your library if necessary a Enter the IP Address of your library in your internet browser address field and press Enter on your keyboard b Log in to your library s Web User Interface c Expand Service Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface d Click Upgrade Firmware e Browse to the new firmware level on your host then click Update Do this for both library and drive firmware if necessary Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 23 4 Install the MIB file on your SNMP server Refer to your server application documentation for instructions Choosing General Library Settings If your library contains only one drive or log settings will be combined into one table see ical library both general and specific Figure 4 24 on page 4 25 1 Expand Configure Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface 2 Click General and enter the following e Library Name Enter a name for your library e Library Mode select one of the following per logical library Random In random mode the library allows the server s host s application software to select any data cartridge in any order Sequential In sequential mode the library s firmwa
66. messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure that the library is ready to handle the cartridges i TTT anoo i ey Batt ti hoe J te saad 99008 y oer a a 7ug246 Figure 4 44 4U library I O station in the lower left magazine There are finger holes on the back side of the I O station see in Figure 4 45 on page 4 42 that allow the user to push the cartridges out of the I O station Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 41 ti i 1 ie LTV l i r PrE T EF iii d i et y Pa fees anadan a 7ug247 Figure 4 45 Finger Holes on back side of 4U library I O station Populating the Library with Data Cartridges Important Cartridges placed in the library must be labeled with the correct bar code labels For additional information see Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media on page 6 1 For information on working with the cartridge magazines see magazines on page 4 38 1 Properly label the data cartridges Refer to Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 2 Unlock the cartridge magazines e Using the Operator Control Panel Control gt Magazines select Left or Right e Using the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Release Magazine select Left or Right Note The magazines will relock after 15 seconds if they have not been removed 3 Remove the selected magazines from the library 4 Insert cartridges in the magazine s Do not store cartridges in the I O Stat
67. on the Ultrium 5 tape drives are compatible with SAS 1 or SAS 2 cables The Ultrium 4 Full Height Tape Drives support SAS or Fibre Channel interfaces It features two SFF 8088 SAS connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector The Ultrium 4 Half Height Tape Drive supports one SAS SFF 8088 connector The Ultrium 4 Half High V2 Tape Drives support two SFF 8088 SAS connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector The SFF 8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 4 tape drives are compatible with SAS 1 cables The Ultrium 3 Full Height Tape Drive supports LVD Ultra160 or Fibre Channel interfaces It features two HD68 connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector The Ultrium 3 Half Height Drive supports one SAS SFF 8088 connector The Ultrium 3 Half High V2 Tape Drive supports two SFF 8088 SAS connectors The SFF 8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 3 tape drives are compatible with SAS 1 cables Chapter 1 Product Description 1 9 a 7ug008 Figure 1 6 Library drive sled without ESD springs SCSI sled shown a 7ug202 Figure 1 7 Library drive sled with ESD springs 1 SAS sled shown Speed Matching To improve system performance the Ultrium 3 Ultrium 4 Ultrium 5 and Ultrium 6 Tape Drives use a technique called speed matching to dynamically adjust its native uncompressed data rate to the slower data rate of the attached server Channel Calibration The channel calibration feature of the Ultrium 3 Ultrium 4 Ultrium 5 and Ultrium 6 T
68. ongoing library and drive activities e The accessor is moved to its home position e The library controller switches OFF the power supply s secondary side Note The shutdown process may be aborted by releasing the button before 4 seconds has passed Web User Interface Many of the same operations performed from the Operator Control Panel can also be performed remotely using the Web User Interface The Web User Interface lets you monitor and control your library from any terminal connected to your network or through the World Wide Web WWW The Web User Interface hosts a dedicated protected Internet site that displays a graphical representation of your library For static IP Addresses only After establishing a connection to the library open any HTML browser and enter the IP address of the library To configure the Web 2 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Login User Interface you must first set the IP address using the Operator Control Panel Refer to Configure Network on page 5 23 or Configure Library Network on page 5 45 Important Some options of the Web User Interface take the library OFFLINE This inactive mode can interfere with host based application software causing data loss Make sure the library is idle before attempting to perform any remote operations that will take the library OFFLINE To login select the Role type and enter the correct password The TL4000 TL
69. or temporary errors or if the amber Clean LED is lit on the front panel of the library select Clean Drive from the Operator Control Panel Service Menu Service gt Service gt Clean Drive and clean the drive Use only an approved cleaning cartridge see Cartridge on page 6 4 7 Run the Library Verify Diagnostic which includes a drive performance Read Write test Be sure to use a known good scratch or blank data cartridge e If the drive test fails replace the drive sled CRU refer to e 10 3 8 If the drive passes all the tests inspect the media to ensure the media is compatible with the drive and not causing drive errors Refer to Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media on page 6 1 Isolating a Library Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem 1 If possible ensure that the library firmware is at the latest level check the current library firmware level using the Operator Control Panel Monitor gt Library gt Identity gt Version or the Web User Interface Monitor Library gt Library Identity then 2 Observe the LED on the Library Controller Card e LED On solid LCC failed or in a hang condition e LED Off LCC not fully inserted or LCC failed or library not connected to power source or Power Supply defect e LED flashing 1 flash per second normal operation e LED flashing slower than once per second normal operation e LED flashing faster than once per second LCC failed 3 With library
70. page 8 11 Warning Event See Table 83 on page 8 T1 dd Incompatible magazine that is detected 1 Remove magazine from library 2 Insert magazine in library If error recurs contact technical support B New hardware found Library firmware upgrades required Upgrade library firmware to the latest version failure Problem on page 7 7 FO Drive Over temperature Condition Check the ambient temperature The subcode indicates which drive is affected aC A Nea a 2 Refer to Isolating Drive Sled Power supply health check failed because of a power supply Refer to Isolating a Power Suppl Example Problems on page 7 9 Subcode 02 drive 2 Chapter 8 Error codes 8 5 Table 8 1 Main Error Codes continued Drive Communication Error Library controller lost communication to drive The subcode indicates which drive is affected Example Subcode 02 drive 2 Drive Sled not present The subcode indicates which drive sled is affected Example Subcode 02 drive sled 2 F3 Drive Hardware Error The subcode indicates which drive is affected Example F3 xy Where x refers to the hardware drive error code single Refer fo Isolate Drive Sled character display and Y refers to the drive position in the Probleme of page 7 9 library x values e 4 firmware or hardware error 5 hardware error 6 hardware or media error A recoverable hardware error Drive Load Timeout Drive run in a timeout while a tape is lo
71. page 9 1 n page 9 1 However this manual process should only be used if the magazine cannot be released using the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface a77ug078 5 42 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Configure Library Menu The Configure Library menu contains the following submenu items e Configure Library General e Configure Library Logical Libraries on page 5 44 Configure Library Path Failover on page 5 45 Configure Library Encryption on page 544 Configure Library Drives on page 5 48 Configure Library Network on page 5 5 e Configure Library User Access on page 5 52 e Configure Library Date amp Time on page 5 54 e Configure Library Logs amp Traces on page 5 54 e Configure Library Event Notification on page 5 55 e Configure Library SNMP on page 5 56 e Configure Library Save Restore Config Configure Library General This page allows you to make changes to general library configuration elements As changes are made they will only be applied after the Apply Selections or the Submit button is selected After making the selection a warning page will inform you of the impact of the proposed change In some cases a pop up screen will ask for confirmation Many changes will also require a library reboot Table 5 10 Configure Library General page elements Library
72. partition system a77ug162 Configuration of a 3 Partition System A three partition system must have at least three drives installed A drive must be installed in drive position 1 another drive must be installed in drive position 2 and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4 Partition 1 will contain the first drive and the first magazine Partition 2 will contain the second drive and the second magazine Partition 3 will contain any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4 Partition 3 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4 STE assignments e Logical Library 1 Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 x1000 through 4104 0x1008 e Logical Library 2 Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 x1000 through 4107 0x100B e Logical Library 3 Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 x1000 through 4119 0x1017 Drive 4 Element Address Drive 3 PATA Element Address Magazine Magazine 2 4 Drive 3 Element Address 256 Drive 2 Drive 2 Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine 1 Drive 1 Drive 1 Element Address Element Address 256 256 a 77ug163 Front side Figure A 3 Configuration of a three partition system Configuration of a 4 Partition System A four partition system must have four drives Each partition will contain one drive and one magazine When configured with four logical partitions the Element_Address assignments will be as follows DTE assignments will be as shown in Figur
73. s Guide Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace Tools Required To service a library you may need one or more of the following tools e 2 Phillips screwdriver e Ground strap recommended if available Electrostatic Discharge Important A discharge of static electricity can damage static sensitive devices or microcircuitry Proper packaging and grounding techniques are necessary precautions to prevent damage LE Figure 10 1 ESD label To prevent electrostatic damage observe the following precautions e Transport products in static safe containers such as conductive tubes bags or boxes e Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static free stations e Cover the unit with approved static dissipating material If available provide a eround strap connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment If a ground strap is not available touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity in your body e Keep the work area free of no conducting materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and foam packing e Make sure you are always properly grounded when touching a static sensitive component or assembly e Avoid touching pins leads or circuitry e Use conductive field service tools Relocating Your Library When moving or shipping your library it is important that the shipping lock be in place to prevent the accessor from moving and to prote
74. should never be installed in drive slot 2 drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3 Mixing of Drives The library will support a mix of full height and half height drives in the same physical library and the same logical library They will support a mix of drives in the same physical library and the same logical library They will also support a mix of SCSI SAS and Fibre Channel in the same physical library and the same logical library however mixing drive interface types in the same logical library is not recommended Important Drives that do not share a common media type cannot be mixed in the same logical library For instance Gen 3 and Gen 6 drives cannot use the same media and so they cannot be mixed LTO 3 media cannot be read on LTO 6 drives Configuration of a 1 Partition System A one partition system configured for a 4U library contains any and all drives present in any drive positions and it will contain all four magazines When configured with one logical partition the Element Address assignments will be as follows DTE assignments will be as shown in STE assignments e Logical Library 1 Slot1 through 23 4096 0x1000 through 4118 0x1016 as shown in Figure A 4 on page A 6 Drive 4 Drive 4 Drive 2 Element Address oes Element Address rive Element Address Element Address Z gt ie al i tal 257 rive 3 258 Drive 3 Element Address Element Address 258 258 Drive 2 Drive 2 Element Address Element Address Magazi
75. spaces provided 3 Click Activate to save the feature key The following screen will display if you have correctly entered the feature key 4 26 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Path Failower Feature Activation Key Path Failover is currently activated on this Tape Library Refresh License enables the library failover capability a 7ug118 User must ensure that the Library Host and Backup Application are fully configured Figure 4 28 Feature Key verification screen Note Follow the instructions in the Dell PowerVault TL4000 Failover Configuration Guide to configure your environment for failover Setting Up Encryption Note Application Managed Encryption AME does not require a key Library Managed Encryption requires a license key The customer should contact their TSR technical sales representative to purchase this feature Minimum Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption AME LTO 6 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 6 Tape Drive e Ultrium 6 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level B 50 or higher e Drive firmware level C800 or higher for reference go to http support dell com e Tape backup software application that supports LTO 6 encryption Minimum Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption AME LTO 5 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Drive e Ultrium 5 Tape Cartridge Library firmware level 9 00 or higher e Drive firmware level
76. sure they match the IBM SKLM properties file Note If SSL is enabled the encryption host configuration will request a SSL port instead_of a TCP port Review the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center http www 01 ibm com support knowledgecenter SSWPVP welcome lang en for instructions to locate the appropriate port settings 11 Click Submit to apply the changes 12 Install the IBM SKLM application on your host Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for information on locating the appropriate IP address and port Configure Library Drives This page allows you to modify the current ID assigned to a SCSI or Fibre Channel drive This page allows any drive in the library to be powered off by de selecting the check mark in the Power On box The displayed information will vary depending on the library model and drive type SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel Table 5 12 on page 5 49 lists all available elements on this page An X indicates that the element displays for the specified drive type 5 48 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 5 12 Drive Identity page elements Menu Item Description ce le tae ce le tae 4U ee SCSI ID For each SCSI drive click on the drop down list cs and select the number of the slot in which the drive is located Power On For each drive click in the box to power ON the X X X X X X selected drive Control Path The control path drive communicates messages fr
77. tape drives in generating protecting storing and maintaining encryption keys that encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information that is read from tape media ID Identifier identifier ID 1 In programming languages a lexical unit that names a language object for example the names of variables arrays records labels or procedures An identifier usually consists of a letter optionally followed by letters digits or other characters 2 One or more characters that are used to identify or name data element and possibly to indicate certain properties of that data element 3 A sequence of bits or characters that identifies a program device or system to another program device or system IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IML Initial microprogram load incompatible magazine This message might display on the Operator Panel during library initialization It occurs during factory restore or VPD This message is not a real issue since it takes time for the library to configure initial microprogram load IML The action of loading a microprogram from an external storage to writable control storage initiator The component that runs a command The initiator can be the host system or the tape control unit INST Installation interface A shared boundary An interface might be a hardware component to link two devices or it might be a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more computer pr
78. that the tape drive can write data to the tape see Write Protect Switch on page 6 6 Refer to the documentation for your server s operating system Cleaning media Set when you load a cleaning No action required cartridge into the drive Use a supported tape cartridge Replace the tape cartridge No action required No action required Appendix B TapeAlert Flags B 3 Table B 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive continued Flag Tape directory corrupted Set when the drive detects that the Re read all data from the tape to in the cartridge memory tape directory in the cartridge rebuild the tape directory memory has been corrupted 19 Nearing media life Set when the tape cartridge is nearing 4 Copy the data to another tape its specified end of life The flag is cleared when the cartridge is removed from the drive Clean now Set when the tape drive detects that it Clean the tape drive needs cleaning Clean periodic Set when the drive detects that it Clean the tape drive as soon as needs routine cleaning possible The drive can continue to operate but you should clean the drive soon Expired clean Set when the tape drive detects a Replace the cleaning cartridge cleaning cartridge that has expired Invalid cleaning tape Set when the drive expects a cleaning Use a valid cleaning cartridge cartridge and the loaded cartridge is not a cleaning cartridge 30 Hardware A Se
79. that neutralize the magnetism of the tape I 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide degausser A device that makes magnetic tape nonmagnetic degradation A decrease in quality of output or throughput or an increase in machine error rate degraded Decreased in quality of output or throughput or increased machine error rate deserialize To change from serial by bit to parallel by byte detented A part that is held in position with a catch or lever device Any hardware component or peripheral device such as a tape drive or tape library that can receive and send data device driver A file that contains the code that is needed to use an attached device DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 Although IPv6 s stateless address autoconfiguration removes the primary motivation for DHCP in IPv4 DHCPv6 can still be used to statefully assign addresses if the network administrator wants more control over addressing DH group Diffie Hellman group DIAG Diagnostic section of maintenance information manual differential See High Voltage Differential HVD direct access storage A storage device in which the access time is independent of the location of the data display contrast The brightness of the display on the Operator Panel DLL Dynamic Link Library The Microsoft implementation of the shared library concept These libraries usually have the file extension dll ocs
80. the DCS is deleted you cannot get it back You will have to create a reserved slot if you want to clean the drive s Table A 4 4U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot one logical partition with drives in slot 1 and slot 2 Upper Left Magazine Library Upper Right Magazine lt Front of 4U library Rear Panel Front of 4U library A 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table A 4 4U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot one logical partition with drives in slot 1 and slot 2 continued Slot 18 4113 0x1011 Slot 14 4109 Ox100D Slot 10 4105 0x1009 Slot 19 4114 0x1012 Slot 15 4110 Ox100E Slot 11 4106 Ox100A Lower Left Magazine I O Slot 3 18 0x12 I O Slot 2 17 0x11 I O Slot 1 16 0x10 Slot 7 4102 0x1006 Slot 4 4099 0x1003 Slot 1 4096 0x1000 Slot 20 4115 0x1013 Slot 16 4111 0x100F Slot 12 4107 0x100B Slot 8 4103 0x1007 Slot 5 4100 0x1004 Slot 2 4097 0x1001 Slot 21 4116 0x1014 Slot 17 4112 0x1010 Slot 13 4108 0x100C Slot 9 4104 0x1008 Slot 6 4101 0x1005 Slot 3 4098 0x1002 Slot 45 4140 0x102C Slot 41 4136 0x1028 Slot 37 4132 0x1024 Slot 33 4128 0x1020 Slot 29 4124 0x101C Slot 25 4120 0x1018 Slot 44 4139 0x102B Slot 40 4135 0x1027 Slot 36 41
81. the capability to have two logical libraries In a fully populated 4U library with four half height drives and four logical libraries resource assignments will be as follows e Logical Library 1 will contain Drive 1 and the lower left cartridge magazine e Logical Library 2 will contain Drive 2 and the upper left cartridge magazine e Logical Library 3 will contain Drive 3 and the lower right cartridge magazine e Logical Library 4 will contain Drive 4 and the upper right cartridge magazine The I O Station and slots reserved for cleaning cartridges if any are shared among all logical libraries 1 Click Configure Library gt Logical Libraries in the left navigation pane Logical Libraries Number of Logical Pag cies Currently configured 3 a 7ug098 Figure 4 26 The 4U library Configure Library Logical Libraries page 2 Select the number of logical libraries you would like to create in your library 3 Click Submit to create the logical libraries Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key For more information refer to the Dell PowerVault TL4000 Failover Configuration Guide included with the library documentation 1 Click Configure Library gt Path Failover in the left navigation pane Path Failover Feature Activation Key ll B oOo a Refresh Activate a 7ug117 Figure 4 27 The Configure Library Path Failover Feature Activation screen 2 Enter the Control Path Failover 12 digit feature key in the
82. the following Attached devices Host scsi0 Channel 00 Id 01 Lun 00 Vendor IBM Model ULT3580 HH3 Rev 88M3 Type Sequential Access ANSI SCSI revision 03 Identify the host adapter channel number target ID number and LUN number for the first LUN of the device to be configured In this example the IBM Model ULT3580 a drive in the TL2000 TL4000 is shown at the address or nexus 0 0 0 0 which means host adapter 0 channel number 0 ID 1 and LUN 0 The TL2000 TL4000 always has the tape drive at LUN 0 and the robot at LUN 1 For each LUN that needs to be discovered by Linux issue the following command echo scsi add single device H C I L gt proc scsi scsi HC IL refers to the nexus described in step 2 So with the TL2000 TL4000 robot configured at LUN 1 type echo scsi add single device 0 0 1 0 gt proc scsi scsi The echo command will force a scan of each device at the given nexus Type cat proc scsi scsi again to verify that all devices are now listed The output will look similar to the following Attached devices Host scsi Channel 00 Id 01 Lun 00 Vendor IBM Model ULT3580 HH3 Rev 88M3 Type Sequential Access ANSI SCSI revision 03 Attached devices Host scsi0 Channel 00 Id 02 Lun 01 Vendor IBM Model 3573 TL Rev 7 10 Type Medium Changer ANSI SCSI revision 05 Administrators should add the echo command to the Linux boot scripts because the device information is not persistent and must be cr
83. the number of cleanings remaining e I O Station s enabled The I O Station s can be enabled the default or disabled so the stations can be utilized as storage slots e Remove DCS If the DCS has been removed it cannot be reinstated This option will no longer appear in the Operator Control Panel e Host Label Length The Host Label Length is related to the Bar Code Labels appearing on the media being used The default value is 8 but 6 can also be chosen 5 22 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Configure Drive Drive Interface Control Path SAS drives SCSI ID do not require user configuration A Loop ID Fibre Channel Drive a 7ug299 Figure 5 15 Configure Drive menu The following items are in this menu e Drive Interface use this to assign a SCSI ID to a SCSI drive or to assign a Port Speed Port Type and Loop ID to a Fibre Channel drive SAS drives do not require user configuration For more information on drive interfaces refer to Host Interfaces on page 3 7 e Control Paths use this to enable the drive as a control path drive Each logical library must have a control path drive however all drives in a logical library can be designated as control path drives Chapter 5 Operations 5 23 Configure Network IP Stack DHCP OFF DHCP OFF pene IPv4 amp IPv4 IPv6 IPv6 IP Address Stateless autoconfig Netmask Prefix Length St
84. the operation of a functional unit without the continual control of a computer Contrast with online online Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit that is under the continual control of a computer Contrast with offline OPER Operation OV Over voltage overrun Loss of data because a receiving device is unable to accept data at the rate it is transmitted overtightening To tighten too much P parameter A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application and that might denote the application p bit Parity bit PC Parity check PCC Power control compartment PDF Portable Document Format PE Parity error Product engineer PFS Perfect forward secrecy pick Pertaining to the library to remove by using a robotic device a tape cartridge from a storage slot or drive picker A robotic mechanism that is located inside the library that moves cartridges between the cartridge storage slots and the drive PM Preventive maintenance POR Power on reset port A physical connection for communication between the 3590 and the host processor The 3590 has 2 SCSI ports Glossary I 13 Portable Document Format PDF A standard that is specified by Adobe Systems Incorporated for the electronic distribution of documents PDF files are compact can be distributed globally by way of email the web intranets or CD ROM and can be viewed with the Acrobat Reader which is software from Adobe Systems that can
85. them are the same After verifying which Rack Kit you received see Figure 4 6 on page 4 7 for the installation steps 4 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Figure 4 6 Rack Kit A mounting hardware a 7ug275 a Rack Kit A The following parts make up Rack Kit A e Packaged in cardboard material 2 rails not shown See Figure 4 9 on page 4 9 for a graphic of the rails 2 mounting brackets iJ in Figure 4 6 e Packaged in the small bag with no label 1 Torx wrench H in Figure 4 6 2 anchors 9 2 countersunk screws for securing the anchors A 2 small countersunk screws for securing the tops of the mounting brackets W 2 large screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack Ef Packaged in the small bag with Round Hole on the label 9 screws to be used on racks with round holes H e Packaged in the small bag with Square Hole on the label 9 screws to be used on racks with square holes f Note Eight 8 screws are needed for the installation One additional screw is provided for security Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 7 a77ug292 Figure 4 7 Rack Kit B mounting hardware b Rack Kit B The following parts make up Rack Kit B e Packaged in plastic material 2 rails not shown See Figure 4 10 on page 4 10 for a graphic of the rails 2 mounting brackets with captive thumb screws J in Figure 4 7 e
86. today The first partition will contain the first magazine and the first drive The second partition will contain the second magazine and the second drive The I O station if configured as I O will be shared as is done with the partitioned 4U library One full height drive is Drive 1 When using half height drives the first half height drive position will be called Drive 1 The second half height drive position will be called Drive 2 Partitioning of 4U Libraries When one or more half height drives are added to a 4U library the drive naming will change Currently the first full height drive is Drive 1 and the second full height drive is Drive 2 When you consider that each full height drive slot may contain one or two half height drives there are four potential drives in the space Appendix A SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations A 3 that used to occupy two As a result the first half height drive position or the first full high drive position will be called Drive 1 The second half height drive position will be called Drive 2 The third half height drive position or the second full height drive position will be called Drive 3 The fourth half height drive position will be called Drive 4 Important In a 4U library a full height drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1 drive will occupy slot 1 and slot 2 or drive slot 3 drive will occupy slot 3 and slot 4 A full height drive sled
87. without Fiecrostane Discharge ESD springs SCSI sled shown Library drive sled with ESD springs 1 SAS sled shown Drive sled components full height fibre drive in top position half height SCSI drive in middle position half height SAS drive in bottom position on back panel of a 4U library Pulling the drive sled gut of the library drive sled without ESD springs shown Pushing the drive sled into the library drive sled without ESD springs shown Diagrams for applying conductive tape for ESD protection to the back of a drive sled installed in a 2U or 4U library A power supply being removed from a 2U library A Library Controller Card being removed from the library Removing the two monning bracket screws anchoring the library to the rack one screw on each side of the library Foot pads installed on the bottom of the library enclosure Removing the shipping label el lock from the top of the library and storing on the rear panel Library shipping lock and label storage location on the real panel of the library Removing a drive sled from the library drive sled without ESD springs ey Drive sled taping diagrams A power supply being removed from a library Removing a Library Controller Card froni the library Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 9 63 5 65 9 65 6 1 6 3 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 7 8 7 8 9 2 9 3 9 4 10 1 10 2 10 2 10 3 10 4
88. 0 No Sense EE EF 13 Encryption Key Translate 13 Encryption Key Translate EKM Sense Key 3 Medium Error 02 Encryption Encryption feature is not enabled so format processing is not supported 60 Encryption Proxy Command Error DO Encryption Data Read Decryption Failure D1 Encryption Data Read after Write Decryption Failure EO Encryption Key Translation Failure E1 Encryption Key Translation Ambiguous FO Encryption Decryption Fenced Read F1 Encryption Encryption Fenced Write 30 EE EE EE EE EE EE EE Sense Key 4 Hardware Error OE Encryption Key Service Timeout OF Encryption Key Service Failure 00 Encryption Failure Hardware POST or Module Failure EE EE 40 Sense Key 5 Illegal Request EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EBE EE EF 26 26 ID 00 01 02 10 20 2l 26 27 28 29 Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Key Service Not Enabled Key Service Not Configured Key Service Not Available Key Required Key Count Exceeded Key Alias Exceeded Key Reserved Key Conflict Key Method Change Key Format Not Supported Unauthorized Request dAK Unauthorized Request dSK Unauthorized Request eAK Authe
89. 04 continued Appendix C Sense Data C 5 Table C 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued R Ilegal Request 05h Parameter length error Invalid command operation code 21h 01h Invalid element address associated with Error Code 33 e Invalid drive specified associated with Error Code 35 24h 00h e Invalid field in the CDB associated with Error Code 34 e SEND DIAG Invalid test number associated with Error Code 36 C 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table C 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued A O J D SS a ee e F gt Fry DD Command Aborted OBh lt Sli gt Drive Sense Data LTO Ultrium 4 drives contain hardware which performs user data write encryption and read decryption protecting all user data written to the medium from unauthorized use provided it is integrated into a secure system design Table C 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data Bit Address or Name Bye 7 6 5 4 3 2 tito Address valid When set to 1 the info byte field Error Code contains a valid logical block address e Segment Number 0 Appendix C Sense Data C 7 Table C 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Bye 7 6 5 a 2 1 o 2 Filemark EOM end ILI Reserved Sense Key Description of medium Incorrect No sense length Recovered error indicator Not ready Media error Hardw
90. 10 16 and install them in the same positions in the replacement library enclosure cake 7 i we ap a F Te ea a Y lt Sri a k F 4 n i a 2 J a wy ka F Si i T s S a x 4 a77ug027 Figure 10 16 Removing a drive sled from the library drive sled without ESD springs shown a f g h Ensure that the power cord is unplugged from the power source for each power supply in the defective library enclosure On the rear of the defective library loosen the blue captive thumbscrews on the drive sled If necessary remove the conductive tape from the drive sled Pull back on the tape drive handle to remove it from the library On the rear of the replacement library enclosure extend the black pull out tab that is located underneath the lower right corner of the lowest drive sled position Ensure that the black pull out tab remains extended when a drive sled is inserted in the lowest drive position in the library Important If this procedure is not followed damage to the connector pins can occur Place each tape drive into the replacement library enclosure in the same drive slot as it was positioned in the defective library e While the drive assembly is supported align the drive sled with the groove in the drive slot rails e Slowly push the drive sled forward until it is properly seated Tighten the captive thumbscrews until the drive is secure If a drive sled without ES
91. 10 5 until the drive sled is secure 6 If you are installing a drive sled without ESD springs see Figure 10 4 on page 10 3 3 apply conductive tape to the sled as shown in Fi ze 10 8 Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 7 2U Library 4U Library a7 7ug203 Figure 10 9 Diagrams for applying conductive tape for ESD protection to the back of a drive sled installed in a 2U or 4U library Note The small gray markers show where conductive tape should be placed to provide ESD protection 7 Push the black tab J in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 back underneath the library When inserted properly only the handle of the tab will be visible 8 Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version Refer to Configure Library Drives on page 5 48 to configure the drive if it is a SCSI or FC drive Connect the drive host interface cable to the host or FC switch Note Go to http support dell com to download the latest firmware for your library and tape drive s 9 Run the Library Verify test Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify This test requires the use of a scratch blank cartridge e If the test passes When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I O Station opens remove the cartridge used in the test Close th
92. 2000 RMU screen shows Welcome User superuser admin or service after a successful login The user can log out at any time by clicking on the logout text located in to top right corner of the RMU page e The User only has access to Monitor Library menus The User account has only viewing privileges to the unit not able to make any configuration changes e Superuser The Superuser has access to the Monitor Library and Manage Library sections e The Admin user has access to all menus except those restricted to Service only The Admin account has access to monitor configure and run unit diagnostics only exception is the advanced diagnostics reserved for service personnel only e Service personnel have access to all menus The Service account has all the same privileges as the Admin account with the addition of advanced unit diagnostics Note User and Superuser accounts must be enabled by the library administrator These accounts are disabled by default Note Passwords are case sensitive Use the following password for logging in as an Admin user secure Each level affects which areas you have access to and what actions you can initiate from those areas For DHCP use the Operator Control Panel to determine the IP Address assigned to your library Navigate to Monitor gt Library gt Identity Scroll down to IP Address and make note of the address Enter the IP Address in your internet browser address field to access your librar
93. 3 4104 4105 4106 4118 4117 4116 4115 0x1007 0x1008 0x1009 0x100A 0x1016 0x1015 0x1014 0x1013 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 j Slot 19 Slot 18 Slot 17 Slot 16 4099 4100 4101 4102 4114 4113 4112 4111 0x1003 0x1004 0x1005 0x1006 0x1012 0x1011 0x1010 0x100F I O slot Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 4096 4097 4098 4110 4109 4108 4107 0x1000 0x1001 0x1002 0x100E 0x100D 0x100C 0x100B 4U Library I O Slots Storage Slots and Drive Slots Element Addresses and Physical Locations For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing see Librar The following table contains the physical location Slot x and SCSI element address in decimal 4xxx and in hexadecimal 0x10xx of the I O slots storage slots and drive slots in the 4U library containing only two drive sleds In older 4U libraries where the Dedicated Cleaning Slot DCS is in a fixed location slot 9 and elected to be retained as a DCS option to delete DCS is available in library firmware greater than 1 95 the above slot numbering and element address changes starting with slot 10 In 4U libraries with a DCS the information shown in slot 9 below moves to slot 10 and so forth through the remaining magazine slots The final slot is slot 44 instead _of slot 45 for libraries without a DCS See ing I O Stations and Reserving Slots on page 5 67 for information on how to delete the dedicated cleaning slot Once
94. 31 0x1023 Slot 32 4127 0x101F Slot 28 4123 0x101B Slot 24 4119 0x1017 Slot 43 4138 0x102A Slot 39 4134 0x1026 Slot 35 4130 0x1022 Slot 42 4137 0x1029 Slot 38 4133 0x1025 Slot 34 4129 0x1021 Lower Right Magazine Slot 31 4126 0x101E Slot 27 41272 0x101A Slot 23 4118 0x1016 Slot 30 4125 0x101D Slot 26 4121 0x1019 Slot 22 4117 0x1015 Library Partitioning and Element Addressing Library 4U systems with firmware versions of 80 and higher and containing at least 2 drives have the ability to configure two logical libraries create two partitions This partitioning has been expanded with the new library firmware and half high drive integration Now it is possible to configure 1 2 3 or 4 partitions in the 4U library Additionally the 2U library can now be configured into one or two partitions Each library must contain at least one drive per logical library partition In a partitioned library the Operator Control Panel OCP only reports the status of logical library 1 in the main menu due to space limitations You must navigate to the logical libraries status in the OCP to get the information on the additional library partitions Partitioning of 2U Libraries When two half height drives are installed in a 2U library the library firmware will support partitioning in the same way that the 4U supports partitioning with two full height drives
95. 72 TB Compressed 72 TB 2 1 compression Compressed 144 TB 2 1 compression Maximum storage capacity 24 data cartridges 48 data cartridges Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges Native 19 2 TB Native 38 4 TB Compressed 38 4 TB 2 1 Compressed 75 2 TB 2 1 compression compression Maximum storage capacity 24 data cartridges 48 data cartridges Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges Native 9 6 TB Native 19 2 TB Compressed 19 2 TB 2 1 Compressed 38 4 TB 2 1 compression compression 1 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 1 4 Library storage capacity and data transfer rate continued 2U Library Specification 4U Library Specification Sustained native data transfer LTO 3 HH 60 MBs rate LTO 3 HH V2 80 MBs LTO 3 FH 80 MBs LTO 4 HH and FH 120 MBs LTO 5 140 MBs LTO 6 160 MBs Ultrium Tape Drives This library supports the Ultrium 3 4 5 and 6 Tape Drives Each tape drive in the library is packaged in a container called a drive sled The drive sled is a customer replaceable unit CRU and is designed for quick removal and replacement in the library The Ultrium 6 Tape Drive supports two SAS SFF 8088 connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector The SFF 8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 6 tape drives are compatible with SAS 1 or SAS 2 cables The Ultrium 5 Tape Drive supports two SAS SFF 8088 connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector The SFF 8088 SAS connectors
96. 9 Feature Activation Key screen 5 On the Encryption screen enter the Feature Activation Key to enable the library managed encryption options 6 Click Activate to save the key and expand the screen for additional encryption settings Encryption Feature Activation Key Encryption is currently licensed on this library Enable SSL for EKM Encryption Setting for Logical Library 1 Encryption method Library Managed Encryption bal Encryption policy Enc rypt All id EKM Server Setting a DER Primary TCP port 3901 Secondary IP add Gee T Secondary TCP port 3801 Encryption method Library Managed Encryption a Encryption policy Encrypt All Z IEKM Server Setting Primary IP address pe IPw4 or IPw6 311 221 2542 Primary TCP port Secondary IP address D IPv4 or IPw6 0 0 0 0 D Secondary TCP port 0 Refresh Submit Figure 5 40 Configure Library Encryption Feature configuration screen Chapter 5 Operations 5 47 7 Select Enable SSL for EKM to enable Secure Sockets Layer for the IBM SKLM application 8 Select an Encryption method from the pull down menu for each logical library e Without an encryption license key select None or Application Managed Encryption e With an encryption license key select Library Managed Encryption 9 Select an Encryption policy from the pull down menu for each logical library e Encrypt All This is the default policy It encrypts all cartridges using the
97. A and 2 pona This provides iformationabout Pon k J k Port Name _ This is the name assigned to a Fibre channel port that is X X enabled Topology Topology This i is This is the type of connection to the host This is the type of connection to the host of connection to the host x k Koo C AL Loop This is the Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop ID of the drive Options are LN L or N Speed This is the current speed setting of the drive Choices are Auto where the drive will automatically negotiate the speed of the drive to match that of the server 1Gb s 2Gb s 4Gb s or 8 Gb s for Fibre Channel 3 Gb s or 6 Gb s for SAS Port B This provides information about Port B For Fibre X X Channel drives Port B is Disabled X X X Chapter 5 Operations 5 35 ULT3580 HH3 Serial Number 1068000539 Firmware Revision ACA World Wide ID Port A 5000E11800245002 World Wide ID Port B 5000E11800245003 Element Address 2566 0 Control Path Drive Yes Z o Z o lt Data Compressio Yes SAS 1K10000896 a77ug288 Figure 5 27 The 4U library Monitor Library Drive Identity page showing one Ultrium 3 SAS half height V2 drive 1 and one Ultrium 4 SAS half height drive 2 Monitor Library Library Status This page displays the dynamic information about the library such as the current status of the components No changes can be made from this page Table 5 8 lists all availa
98. A connection between a channel path and a drive that is caused when a unit check occurs during an I O operation controller A device that provides the interface between a system and one or more tape drives control path drive controllerA device that provides the interface between a system and one or more tape drives control path drive A drive that communicates messages from the host computer to the library in which the drive is installed cookie A packet of data that is exchanged between the library and a web browser to track configuration CP Circuit protector CPF Control Path Failover CRU Customer Replaceable Unit CSA Canadian Standards Association ctrl Control CU Control unit D danger notice A word to call attention to possible lethal harm to people Contrast with attention and caution data Any representations such as characters or analog quantities to which meaning is or might be assigned data buffer The storage buffer in the control unit This buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate between the control unit and the channel data cartridge A tape cartridge that is dedicated to storing data Contrast with cleaning cartridge data check A synchronous or asynchronous indication of a condition that is caused by invalid data or incorrect positioning of data dc Direct current DCS Designated Cleaning Slot degauss To make a magnetic tape nonmagnetic by using electrical coils that carry currents
99. BBNE BBNF or higher for reference go to http support dell com e Tape backup software application that supports LTO 5 encryption Minimum Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption AME LTO 4 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive e Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level 5 80 or higher e Drive firmware level 77BE or higher e Tape backup software application that supports LTO 4 encryption Minimum Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption LME LTO 6 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 6 Tape Drive e Ultrium 6 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level B 50 or higher e Drive firmware level C800 or higher for reference go to http support dell com e Encryption Key Manager application IBM SKLM Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 27 Minimum Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption LME LTO 5 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Drive e Ultrium 5 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level 9 00 or higher e Drive firmware level BBNE BBNEF or higher for reference go to http support dell com e Encryption Key Manager application IBM SKLM Minimum Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption LME LTO 4 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive e Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level 5 80 or higher e Drive firmware level 77BE or higher e Encryption Key Manager application IBM SKLM Setting a Drive s Method of Encryption 1 Click Confi
100. Control Panel Control gt Re Inventory and view the inventory via the Web User Interface Monitor Library gt Inventory to determine if the labels are now being read 4 If the labels are still not being read properly please contact Dell technical support Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems After successfully exercising Isolating Drive Sled Problems and more specifically the Library Verify diagnostic on the Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify which includes a drive or drives read write diagnostic the following procedures are suggested to help isolate the failure to properly establish connectivity to the Host Bus Adapter HBA 1 Use the utility ITDT to evaluate connectivity from the HBA through the cabling to the drive or drives ITDT does not require separate device drivers thus the Operating System has the ability to scan and find all the LTO devices that are attached If ITDT cannot successfully locate the LTO drive suspect cabling or HBA problems and_skip step 2 If ITDT successfully located the LTO drive proceed to step 2 See Using the ITDT Firmware Update Dump Retrieval and Drive Test Tool on page 9 5 for a brief description of ITDT and instructions on how to download the tool from the web 2 If ITDT successfully locates the LTO device s verify that the correct application device drivers and backup application software is properly installed 3 Ensure that all the
101. D springs is installed see Figure 10 16 conductive tape as shown in Figure 10 17 on page 10 18 apply Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 17 2U Library 4U Library a7 7ug203 Figure 10 17 Drive sled taping diagrams Note The gray markers show where conductive tape is placed i Push the black tab back underneath the drive sled When inserted properly only the handle of the tab is visible 2 Power ON the replacement library enclosure a If power ON is successful 1 Aite power up the Ready Activity LED H in Figure 10 20 on page turns ON s If this message is displayed after the library powers ON follow the instructions New library detected Please remove power and insert LCC from old library ok 2 Power OFF the replacement library enclosure 3 You must power down and remove the CRU LCC Then replace it with the original LCC to have VPD transferred from the original LCC to the new chassis 4 Proceed to Swapping Power Supplies b If power ON is not successful 1 The Error LED Ef in Figure 10 20 on page 10 22 turns ON 2 Power OFF the replacement library enclosure 3 Contact technical support for instructions swapping Power Supplies Unplug the power cord from the power source then from the replacement library enclo
102. Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice c 2014 Dell Inc All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text Dell the DELL logo and PowerVault are trademarks of Dell Inc Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products Dell Inc disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its Own Printed November 2014 Read this first Minimum firmware levels for common library features Table 1 Minimum firmware levels for common library features Feature Minimum Firmware Level s Required LTO HH V2 Tape Drives Library firmware level must be at A 00 or greater to support HH V2 Tape Drives LTO 6 Tape Drive Library firmware must be at B 50 or greater to support the Ultrium 6 drives Ensure the minimum version required to support Ultrium 6 tape drives are installed on the host Ensure that any host applications and software using their own device drivers are at the minimum level required to support Ultrium 6 tape drives LTO 5 Tape Drive Library firmware must be at 9 00 or greater to support the Ultrium 5 drives Ensur
103. ECT button to highlight the Prefix Length option field Press the UP or DOWN buttons to scroll through the Prefix Length digits Press the SELECT button to apply the Prefix Length digits 5 If you do not want to select DHCP as your library network setting skip this step and proceed to the next step If you want to select DHCP as your library network setting complete the following steps Press the DOWN button to highlight DHCP Press the SELECT button to highlight the DHCP field Press the DOWN button to select ON Press the SELECT button to apply your selection e Skip to Step 7 6 Press the DOWN button to select IP Address For IPv4 only enter only an IPv4 address For IPv6 only enter only an IPv6 address For IPv4 amp IPv6 enter an IPv4 address and an IPv6 address a Press the SELECT button to highlight the IP Address field b Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit s in the first octet of your library s IP Address c Press the SELECT button to highlight the digit s in the next octet of your IP Address d After entering the digits for the last octet press the SELECT button to apply your entries 7 Press the DOWN button to select Netmask For IPv4 enter only an IPv4 Netmask address For Pv6 enter only an IPv6 Netmask address For IPv4 amp IPv6 enter both IPv4 and IPv6 Netmask addresses a Press the SELECT button to highlight the Netmask field b Press the UP or DOWN button to select the dig
104. Features The major accessibility features for the HTML version of this document are e You can use screen reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what is displayed on the screen The following screen readers are tested WebKing and Window Eyes e You can operate all features with the keyboard instead of the mouse Navigating by keyboard You can use keys or key combinations to complete operations and initiate many menu actions that are also done through mouse actions You can navigate the HTML version of the Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide help system from the keyboard with the following key combinations e To traverse to the next link button or topic press Tab inside a frame page e To move to the previous topic press or Shift Tab e To scroll all the way up or down press Home or End e To print the current page or active frame press Ctrl P e To select press Enter Accessing the publications You can view the publications for this library in Adobe Portable Document Format PDF with the Adobe Acrobat Reader The PDFs are provided at the following website http support dell com H 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Glossary This glossary defines the special terms abbreviations and acronyms that are used in this publication If you do not find the term that you are looking for refer to the index or to the Diction
105. Information see Configure Library User Access on page 5 52 Logs and Traces see Configure Library Logs amp Traces on page 5 54 Event Notification Information see Key Path Diagnostic if Encryption was purchased see Service Library Ke Path Diagnostics on page 5 62 Updating Firmware see Service Library Upgrade Firmware on page 5 63 Preparing the Host Follow these general guidelines 1 Ensure that your backup application supports the SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel host bus adapter HBA Ensure that all the required or latest available Operating System files and or updates dll s PTF s etc have been installed and applied If the host server is connected to a network check with the system administrator before turning host power OFF Install a suitably rated HBA Remember that if there are any single ended SE devices on the same SCSI bus the entire SCSI bus will negotiate down to SE speed and severely degrade performance and limit cable length Ensure that LUN scanning is enabled on the SCSI host adapter Ensure that Fibre Channel Tape Support is enabled on the Fibre Channel HBA if installing a library with a Fibre Channel drive Ensure that SAS support is enabled on the SAS HBA if installing a library with a SAS drive For library managed encryption install the IBM SKLM application on your host Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online at 01 ibm com support knowledgecenter SSWP
106. LSER that is human readable e A bar code that the library can read Note The LTO Ultrium 5 and 6 Tape Drives do not require bar code labels but you may choose to use labels for tape cartridge identification purposes Table 6 5 Bar code label requirements for Ultrium tape drives and libraries Ultrium Tape Drive Library Bar Code Label Requirements 3001 Required with optional Bar Code Reader 6 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 6 5 Bar code label requirements for Ultrium tape drives and libraries continued Ultrium Tape Drive Library Bar Code Label Requirements When read by a library s bar code reader the bar code identifies the cartridge s VOLSER to the library The bar code also tells the library whether the cartridge is a data cartridge or cleaning cartridge In addition the bar code includes the two character media type identifier Lx where x equals 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 L identifies the cartridge as an LTO cartridge and the number represents the generation of cartridge for that cartridge type Figure 6 3 on page 6 6 shows a sample bar code label for the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge Tape cartridges can be ordered with the labels included or with custom labels Table 6 6 Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium Tape Drives Ultrium 6 Data Cartridge Ultrium 6 WORM Cartridge Ultrium 5 Data Cartridge Ultrium 5 WORM Cartridge Ultrium 4 Data Cartridge Ultrium 4 WORM
107. LTO 4 encryption Minimum Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption LME LTO 6 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 6 Tape Drive e Ultrium 6 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level B 50 or higher e Drive firmware level C800 or higher for reference go to http support dell com e Encryption Key Manager application IBM SKLM Minimum Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption LME LTO 5 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Drive e Ultrium 5 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level 9 00 or higher e Drive firmware level BBNE BBNEF or higher for reference go to http support dell com e Encryption Key Manager application IBM SKLM Minimum Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption LME LTO 4 5 46 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive e Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level 5 80 or higher e Drive firmware level 77BE or higher e Encryption Key Manager application IBM SKLM Setting or Changing a Drive s Method of Encryption 1 Enter your library s IP Address in an internet browser address field and press ENTER 2 Log in to the Web User Interface Refer to Login on page 2 5 Expand Configure Library in the left navigation panel oo 4 Click Encryption Encryption is not supported for this Logical Library e Activation Key a77ug199 Figure 5 3
108. Library Save Restore Configuration on page 5 57 3 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Logical Unit Number LUN Scanning The library uses a single SCSI or Loop ID per drive and dual LUNs to control the tape drive LUN 0 and library accessor LUN 1 The library requires a Host Bus Adapter HBA that supports LUN scanning If it is not enabled your host system will not scan beyond LUN 0 and will fail to discover the library It will only see the tape drive Important Some HBAs such as RAID controllers do not support LUN scanning Host Interfaces The 2U library and the 4U library can be attached to servers using the following interfaces e SCSI LVD Ultrium 160 e Serial Attached SCSI SAS e Fibre Channel Table 3 1 Host Drive Interface Support bms fx oS S o e S S e S e co O SOS SSSSC diSC a OOOO O o o o o o y e e e Note Dial ronsas OOO Note Dual Port SAS SCSI Interface Note Although the LVD hardware in the library is capable of operating in single ended SE mode SE operation is not recommended The library supports SCSI LVD attachments by using SCSI cables with 68 pin HD connectors SCSI adapters must be properly terminated Before installing the SCSI cables inspect all cables for damage Do not install a cable if it is damaged Report the damage immediately by contacting Dell customer care The maximum allowable length of your bus ca
109. Library gt Move Media Cycle drive power using the Operator Control Panel Service gt Service gt Drive Power or the Web User Interface Configure Library gt Drives Try unloading the cartridge from the drive again using the Operator Control Panel Control gt Move Cartridge or the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Move Media If the cartridge will not unload from the drive contact technical support WORM Medium Set when the drive determines that Copy the data to another integrity check failed the data on tape is suspect from a WORM tape cartridge R int of view vee nacre Discard the old WORM tape WORM Medium Set when the drive rejects a write Append the information on a Overwrite attempted operation because the rules for WORM tape cartridge or write the allowing WORM writes have not been data to a non WORM cartridge met Data can only be appended to WORM media Overwrites to WORM media are not allowed Appendix B TapeAlert Flags B 5 B 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Appendix C Sense Data When a drive encounters an error it makes sense data available You can use device drivers to examine the sense data and determine errors The device drivers may conflict with some commercial software applications unless properly configured To avoid conflicts on Windows operating systems refer to your device driver s procedures for setting the dri
110. Magazine Magazine Drive 3 ai ale Drive 3 2 4 Element Address Element Address 258 258 Drive 2 Drive 2 l Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine Drive 1 257 257 Element Address Drive 1 Drive 1 Element Address Element Address 256 256 Front side a 7ug161 Figure 3 1 Configuration of a one partition system Drive 2 Element Address 256 Drive 1 Element Address Configuration of a 2 Partition System A two partition system must have at least two drives installed One drive must be installed in either drive position 1 or drive position 2 and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4 Partition 1 contains any drives in drive position 1 and drive position 2 Partition 1 will also contain magazine 1 and magazine 2 Partition 2 contains any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4 Partition 2 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4 When configured with two logical partitions the Element_Address assignments will be as follows DTE assignments will be as shown in STE assignments e Logical Library 1 Slot 1 through slot 21 4096 x1000 through 4116 0x1014 e Logical Library 2 Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 x1000 through 4019 0x1017 Drive 4 Drive 4 Element Address Element Address Drive 3 Element Address Drive 3 256 Drive 3 Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine 2 Drive 2 Drive 2 Element Address Drive 1 Element Address Drive 1
111. Name Enter the name of the library I O Station The I O Station defaults to I O Station Enabled Choosing Disabled no X X Enabled checkmark adds one more storage slot to the 2U library and 3 more storage slots to the 4U library When the I O Station is disabled removing or adding media to the library must be performed by releasing the left and or right magazine s Auto Clean Auto Clean defaults to Disabled For Auto Clean to function a cleaning X X Enabled cartridge CLNxxxLx must be resident in a reserved library slot and Auto Clean must be enabled turned on Note If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not resident in a reserved slot the Auto Clean Status field in the web System Status screen will post a Chk Media Rsvd Slot message Bar Code Label The default bar code label length is 8 but can be set to 6 The bar code X X Length Reported label length is a reported length This setting will cause the host To Host computer to only see the first 6 characters of the label or all 8 characters This setting does not affect the bar code label that is shown on any of the library user interfaces always shows all 8 characters Table 5 11 Configure Library Specific page elements Library Mode Choices are Random and Sequential If you choose Sequential you may X X also activate Autoload and or Loop If there is more than one logical library there is a Library Mode entry for each logical library Importan
112. O Station Figure 5 30 The 2U library Monitor Library a77ug067 Inventory page 5 40 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Lu bli 1z 13 eae EN Cartridge details for 2 Left Magazine 1 Right Magazine Slot inventory 1 Right Magazine Cartridge details for 1 Right Magazine 2 Right Magazine Slot inventory 2 Right Magazine I O Station 1 Closed Empty I O Station 2 Closed Empty I O Station 3 Closed Empty Loe 1 Empty assess 2 Empty k Empty 4 Empty 5 Full Gen 4 IBIR11i5L4 6773 Encrypted ls Full Gen 4 SFROi6L4 2 7 Full Gen 4 IBIR101L4 3505 Encrypted 2 8 Empty s a Empty See S Figure 5 31 The 4U library Monitor Library Inventory page Right Magazines Note The 4U graphic shows the Slot Inventory for the right magazines of this library as an example The left magazines are similar Manage Library Menu The Manage Library menu contains the following sub menu items e Manage Library Move Media e Manage Library Perform Inventory on page 5 42 l e 5 42 Manage Library Move Media This page allows the user to move tape cartridges within the library The source and destination are selected and then the MOVE button in the center of the screen is clicked to activat
113. Packaged in small bags and labeled with part numbers 1 Torx wrench H in Figure 4 7 2 anchors 9 2 countersunk screws for securing the anchors A 2 small countersunk screws for securing the tops of the mounting brackets KA e Packaged in the small bag 4 rail mounting screws to be used on racks with round or square holes J e 12 black plastic square plugs for covering rack holes for the 4U library application 8 e 12 black plastic round plugs for covering rack holes for the 4U library application E 2 Determine the location in your rack for your library to be installed and using a pencil mark the location on each vertical rail in your rack Note A 2U library requires 2U 3 5 in of rack space A 4U library requires 4U 7 in of rack space 4 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide a77ug133 Figure 4 8 Examples of EIA units for round hole and square hole installations Two EIA units for round hole and i Wide Gaps within the EIA unit Ba square hole installation B Narrow Gaps between EIA units 3 Using the screws for your rack type round holes or square holes and a 2 Phillips screwdriver and ensuring that the flange on each rail points toward the other to form a shelf secure one rail to each side of the rack in your chosen rack location Secure both the front and back of each rail to the rack The narrow end of each rail goes to the rear of the rack The rails ex
114. SMW on the tape must match information from the cartridge memory CM module in the cartridge If it does not match a media Error Code 7 will post on the drive s single character display SCD e Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not compatible with WORM causes the cartridge to be treated as an unsupported medium The drive will report a media Error Code 7 Upgrading the drive firmware to the correct code level will resolve the problem Cleaning Cartridge With each library a specially labeled LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge is supplied to clean the drive head The drive itself determines when a head needs to be cleaned It alerts you by lighting the Clean Drive amber LED above the library Operator Control Panel To clean the head manually insert a cleaning cartridge into the tape load compartment see 4 43 The drive performs the cleaning automatically When the cleaning is finished the drive ejects the cartridge and the library turns the Clean Drive LED off Some libraries have an Auto Clean function which when enabled will prompt the library to retrieve the cleaning cartridge that resides in the library insert it in the drive that needs cleaning clean the drive then return the cleaning cartridge to its home slot Note The drive will automatically eject an expired cleaning cartridge The Cleaning Cartridges are valid for 50 uses Bar Code Label A bar code label contains e A volume serial number VO
115. Tape Library User s Guide Important Wait for the messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure that the library is ready to handle the cartridges After the I O station is closed you must wait for the library to complete its inventory before normal library operations commence Control Move Cartridges Use this menu item to move cartridges in the library Source Source Volume Be enon Destination Type Serial Type Move Cartridges a 7ug053 Figure 5 10 Control Move Cartridges menu To move a cartridge from point A to point B you must make the following choices Source Type Drive I O station magazine Only the source type s that contain cartridges will be listed Source the choices start with the choice made in the preceding item and then advances through all available choices Note If the Attention LED is ON due to a suspect cartridge that cartridge will be identified by an exclamation point when scrolling through the source cartridges Volume Serial the serial number of the cartridge Dest Type the destination Drive I O station magazine Dest the choices start with the choice made in the preceding item and then advances through all available choices Control Magazine Use this menu item to unlock the cartridge magazines Chapter 5 Operations 5 17 EJ Magazine eft Right Left magazine Right magazine unlocking unlocking Choose Left or Right to unlock the corresponding car
116. Tape Library User s Guide e User if enabled e Superuser if enabled e Admin e Service Note Only one password can be set for each Role 4 Enter the New Password The password has a maximum of 10 characters A Z a z 0 9 lt hyphen gt lt space gt lt period gt 5 In Repeat Password enter the new password again 6 In Support Name enter the name of the person that will be able to offer the user help with the library Note Only one support person can be configured for the entire tape library The support person may or may not be one of the user superuser or admin account holders 7 In Support Phone enter the phone number of the person that will be able to offer the user help with the library 8 In Support Email enter the email address of the person that will be able to offer the user help with the library 9 Click one of the following e Refresh to update the current screen e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Entering Date and Time using the Web User Interface 1 Click Configure Library gt Date amp Time in the left navigation pane Date Time Time 24H fiz lar iv Date Month oa Day 1 Year 2008 a 7ug061 Retresh Submit Figure 4 35 The Configure Library Date and Time screen 2 Enter the current Time using the HH MM SS 24 hour format 3 Enter the current Date using the MMDDYYYY format 4 Click one of the following e Refresh to cancel all of your ent
117. Tape drives channel calibration 1 10 Tape drives continued power management 1 11 quantity in library 1 9 speed matching 1 10 TapeAlert Flags for drives B 3 TapeAlert Flags library B 1 technical support iii Telnet Service Port 5 32 Traps F 1 troubleshooting 7 1 U Ultral60 1 8 Ultra320 1 8 Ultrium Tape Drives 1 9 unpacking the library 4 2 Updating firmware using ITDT Tool 9 5 upgrade firmware 5 63 USB port 1 3 V verifying the shipment 4 2 View Drive Logs 5 60 W Web User Interface Configure Library Event Notification 5 55 Configure Library Save Restore 5 57 configuring library 4 20 drive information 4 29 event notification 4 34 general library information 4 24 logging on 4 22 logs and traces 4 33 user access information 4 32 Web User Interface menus Configure Library User Access 5 52 Web User InterfaceConfigure Library date and time 4 33 worldwide node name 5 33 WORM 6 3 WORM Write Once Read Many 6 3 Write Once Read Many see WORM 6 3 write protect switch Write Protect Switch Setting B 3 Write Protect Switch setting 6 6 WWNN 5 33 Index X 3 X 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Printed in USA
118. The Admin login has access to all library functions except Service Library gt Advance Diagnostics The Service login has access to all library functions including Service Library gt Advance Diagnostics 1 Click Configure Library gt User Access in the left navigation pane Roles E Disable Superuser C Disable User Passwords Role User New Password Enter Up To Twenty Characters ETTE Repeat Password eecccee Support Contact Support Name Support Phone Support Email Password Rules Minimum Number Of Characters Minimum Number Of Upper Case Alphabetic Characters A Z Minimum Number Of Lower Case Alphabetic Characters a z Minimum Number Of Numeric Characters 0 9 Minimum Number Of Special Characters amp _ lt gt Maximum Number Of Identical Consecutive Characters Maximum Number Of Failed Logins Before Password Is Locked Maximum Number Of Days Before Password Must Be Changed a77ug082 Refresh Submit Figure 4 34 The Configure Library User Access screen 2 Check the Disable Superuser checkbox to disable the Superuser role for this library Check the Disable User checkbox to disable the User role for this library Uncheck these boxes to allow these roles access to your library 3 Choose a Role Note Admin can select User Superuser and Admin roles Service can select User Superuser Admin and Service roles 4 32 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000
119. U library Configure Library Logical Libraries page Configure Library Path Failover This page allows the user to enter the Path Failover feature activation key Supported on 4U library only for library firmware levels at or below 8 xx Supported on both the 2U and 4U libraries with library firmware levels above 8 xx For library firmware levels below 8 xx the Path Failover feature is available for select LTO 4 tape drives and Path Failover is not supported for Half Height drives Library firmware levels higher than B 50 support Path Failover on LTO 6 drives Library firmware levels higher than 8 xx support Path Failover on LTO 5 drives as well as LTO 4 Full Height drives For more information refer to the Dell Power Vault TL4000 Failover Configuration Guide included with the library documentation Path Failover Feature Activation Key pooo p ooo Refresh Activate a77ug117 Figure 5 37 The 4U library Configure Library Path Failover page Enter the Feature Activation key and click Activate This page will display if you have entered the feature key correctly Path Failower Feature Activation Key Path Failover is currently activated on this Tape Library Refresh License enables the library failover capability a 7ug118 User must ensure that the Library Host and Backup Application are fully configured Figure 5 38 Path Failover license verification page Chapter 5 Operations 5 45 Note Follow the in
120. Ultrium Tape aaa Troubleshooting table E Power Supply LED Meanings Main Error Codes 24 Sub error codes Warning events Shipping Lock Shipping Label 2U library SCSI Element Types and Element Addresses 4U library SCSI Element ipe snd Element Addresses 2U library SCSI element addresses Jor storage slots and drive slot one logical partition with one drive 4U library SCSI element ade rakes for storage slots and drive slot one logical partition with drives in slot 1 and slot 2 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive noa Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCO LTO Tape Drive Sense Data SNMP Status Events 6 2 6 2 6 3 6 5 6 7 6 10 7 1 7 8 8 7 8 11 10 2 A 1 A 1 C 1 C 7 F 1 xi xii Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Safety and environmental notices When this product is used observe the danger caution and attention notices that are contained in this guide The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent the severity of the safety condition The sections that follow define each type of safety notice and give examples Danger and caution notices Danger Notice A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people A lightning bolt symbol always accompanies a danger notice to represent a dangerous electrical condition Caution Notice A
121. VP welcome lang en for information Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 37 Verifying the Connection 1 Depending on the server configuration you may need to change the SCSI ID or Fibre Channel Loop ID of the library if the current ID is the same as another device on the bus 2 When the host server is powered ON install the software and or driver s that are compatible with the library Backup software packages may require additional software or licensing to communicate with the library accessor 3 If this is a SCSI attachment ensure the library is properly terminated If the library is the only SCSI device other than the SCSI host adapter on the selected SCSI bus it must be terminated Likewise if the library is physically the last SCSI device on the SCSI bus it must be terminated Only the devices physically located at the beginning and end of the SCSI bus should be terminated 4 Confirm that the host server operating system recognized the library In Microsoft Windows Server 2003 you can verify this by going to Settings gt Control Panel gt System gt Hardware gt Device Manager gt Tape Drive and or Medium Changer For more information on verifying the connection of SCSI devices see the operating system documentation Cartridge magazines The library has removable magazines Magazine access is password protected For safety reasons the accessor motion is stopped when a magazine is removed The
122. X Firmware Bootcode is the firmware that allows the library to begin initialization Revision when it is powered ON Barcode Reader This is the version of barcode reader in the library xX xX IPv4 Address This is the Internet Protocol v4 Address assigned to your library a Link local IPv6 This is the local IPv6 address assigned to your library address Note It can verified with library firmware of A 40 or higher Chapter 5 Operations 5 33 Table 5 6 Library Identity page elements continued Menu em Desin OOOO i y IPv6 static This is your library s IPv6 static assigned address assigned address Router discovery This is the IPv6 router discovery address assigned to your library X X IPv6 address Note There may be more than one IPv6 discovery address if there is more than one IPv6 router available in your network environment MAC Address This is the machine s access code assigned to your library WWide Node This is the Worldwide Node Name assigned to your library Nam Logical Library x The Extended Logical Libraries Information table displays information X X X X X Library Mode about the logical libraries currently assigned in your library For each logical library in your library either Random or Sequential Loop Autoload will be displayed Serial Number 7ePeez4 Product ID 3573 TL Currently Installed Library Firmware AGO 3 100 Bootcode Firmware Revision 0 80 Barcode Reader SE625 TP
123. a cartridge s 4 Push the I O Station back into the library The library will automatically start an inventory of the I O Station If you do not have an I O Station all slots are assigned to storage and wish to export media you will need to release a magazine and take out the cartridges manually following these steps 1 From the OCP Main Menu select Control gt Magazine Choose the magazine you wish to unlock remove 2 Pull out the magazine and remove the desired data cartridge s 5 66 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 3 Push the magazine back into the library The library will automatically start an inventory Note If you run a library configuration backup program on your host computer use the program to run an audit of the library after cartridges have been removed to update the backup program Configuring I O Stations and Reserving Slots 2U libraries usually have 1 slot for an I O Station while 4U libraries have 3 slots assigned as an I O Station These slots can be configured as storage if needed To configure the I O Station using the Web User Interface follow these steps e Go to Configure Library gt General e To enable the I O Station place a check mark in the I O Station Enabled box If it is checked as enabled the first 3 physical slots in the lower left magazine in a AU or the first physical slot in the left magazine in a 2U is configured as an I O station If the
124. ading The subcode indicates which drive is affected Example Subcode 02 drive 2 Drive Unload Timeout Drive run in a timeout while a tape is unloading The subcode indicates which drive is affected Example subcode 02 drive 2 8 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 8 1 Main Error Codes continued Sub Error Codes FO Invalid drive parameter Refer to Isolating Drive Sled F6 wa F8 F9 FA FB FC D Table 8 2 Sub error codes woo arcing giprn OOOO ps amretvnor home movement os Pror during rotation initialization get geld o ioraa oe Fror fist sea init move to sensor ale a n dining ion odie pois OOOO O Chapter 8 Error codes 8 7 Table 8 2 Sub error codes continued Error during slider home movement Error during rotation to FAR position Error sled init move to sensor failed Error during sled movement check shipping lock Error move to a certain position failed Error positioning of the rotation motor failed Error during move sled to scan position Error during move elevator to scan position Error during sled preposition movement 8 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 8 2 Sub error codes continued Error during sled positioning to mail slot in FLMoveSled function Error during sled positioning without sensor Error during elevator movement without sensor Error slot position sensor not found
125. ady Activity LED iJ in Figure 10 20 on page 10 22 ON 2 Power OFF the replacement library enclosure 3 Proceed to Swapping Power Supplies on page 10 18 If inventory is not successful 1 The Error LED J in Figure 10 20 on page 10 22 will turn ON 2 Power OFF the enclosure 3 Contact Technical Support for further instructions Installing the Replacement Library Enclosure Refer to the appropriate procedure in this section rack or desktop for installing the replacement library enclosure Note If you are shipping the replacement library enclosure to a remote location install the shipping lock and label before shipment Rack Installation 1 Remove the mounting brackets iJ in Figure 10 24 on page 10 26 and anchors 8 from each side of the defective library and install them on the replacement library enclosure Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 25 a 7ug252 Figure 10 24 Mounting brackets and anchors for securing the library in a rack one bracket and anchor on each side of the library 2 With assistance slide the replacement library enclosure onto the metal rails that are already in position in the rack see Figure 10 25 O O 0O O O O O O O O O O O o O O O O O O O O O O CL m N i lt oO Figure 10 25 Front view of rack showing screw placement 3 Tighten the mounting bracket screws iJ in Figure 10 12 on page 10 14
126. agnostic procedure is run Library firmware level must be greater than 6 xx See ifyi i e 4 23 For information about running the diagnostic procedure refer to Key Path Diagnostics on page 5 62 Restoring Factory Default Settings using the Web User Interface If you would like to erase your current configuration and restore factory default settings do so by selecting Restore Factory Defaults in the Configure Library gt Save Restore menu See Configure Library Save Restore Configuration on page 5 57 The factory default settings are listed in Table 5 4 on page 5 27 Logging out of the Web User Interface To log out of the Web User Interface click Logout in the upper right corner of the current screen 4 36 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Important If you click the X in the upper right corner of your internet browser window you will not log out of the Web User Interface Configuring Your Library using the Operator Control Panel If you choose to use the Operator Control Panel for configuring your library go to Configure Menu on page 5 18 for information on configuring the following items Logical Libraries Library Settings Drive s Network Set Access PIN Set Date and Time Path Failover To complete the configuration of your library the following items will have to be accessed from the Web User Interface Encryption if purchased see User Access
127. akes approximately 5 minutes The system status panel in the right of the browser window changes from update to ready If incompatible firmware is transferred to the library or drive the Update function terminates with a message that indicates incompatible firmware If the library has a BCR barcode reader that requires 9 00 or greater firmware the Update function terminates with a message that indicates the library requires firmware 9 00 or higher To ensure that the drive is updated with the correct firmware refer to the drive identification information provided in the Upgrade Library Firmware banner Ensure that the drive firmware is for the correct drive type Full Height Half Height correct protocol SCSI SAS Fibre Channel and correct version V2 Drive code for V2 drives is not compatible with drives that are not V2 V2 drive firmware compatibility e ULT3580 HH3 drives Firmware for the LTO3 HH drive is not compatible with the LTO3 HH V2 drive Firmware for the LTO3 HH V2 drive is not compatible with the LTO3 HH drive e ULT3580 HH4 drives Firmware for the LTO4 HH drive is not compatible with the LTO4 HH V2 drive Firmware for the LTO4 HH V2 drive is not compatible with the LTO4 HH drive e ULT3580 HH5 drives The latest firmware for the LTO5 HH drive is compatible with all LTO5 HH drives Upgrade the drive with the latest firmware if the drive Update function terminates with a message that in
128. al rewind tool A device that can be fitted into the reel of a cartridge and used to rewind tape into or out of the cartridge cartridge memory CM Within each data cartridge an embedded electronics and interface module that can store and retrieve a cartridge s historical usage and other information cartridge storage slot Individual slot that is located within a magazine that is used to house tape cartridges caution notice A word to call attention to possible personal harm to people Contrast with attention and danger centimeter cm One one hundredth of a meter 0 01 m Approximately 0 39 inch channel command An instruction that directs a data channel control unit or device to perform an operation or set of operations char Character CHK Check cleaning cartridge A tape cartridge that is used to clean the heads of a tape drive Contrast with data cartridge COD Capacity On Demand command A control signal that initiates an action or the start of a sequence of actions compact disc CD A disc usually 4 75 inches in diameter from which data is read optically by using a laser Glossary I 3 compression The process of eliminating gaps empty fields redundancies and unnecessary data to shorten the length of records or blocks concurrent Refers to diagnostic procedures that can be run on one control unit while the rest of the subsystem remains available for customer applications contingent connection
129. amage your library or cause it not to function properly Six foot pads must be installed on the bottom of the library before the library can be used as a desktop unit To install the library foot pads 1 Being very careful lay the library on its side 2 Peel the adhesive from the back of each foot pad 3 Install the foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure by pressing each foot into one of the six areas as shown in the figure below Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 3 a77ug085 Figure 4 2 Installing foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure 4 Carefully return the library to an upright position Important Do not place any objects on top of the library Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock Important The shipping lock which prevents the library accessor from moving during shipment must be removed before the library is powered ON The shipping lock is held in place with a label and is located in the top center of the library After the shipping lock is removed it should be stored on the right side of the back panel of the library for future use To remove and store the shipping lock 1 Remove the blue label A that is securing the lock Ell to the top of the library then remove the lock see Figure 4 3 on page 4 5 4 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide a 7ug018 Figure 4 3 Shipping lock and label a 7ug195 Figure 4 4 Rem
130. ample Invalid Media Configuration Change Trace Logs any configuration changes made such as changing adding partitions changing SCSI addresses removing a DCS etc Standard Trace Logs all library operations Note Ensure that all the pop up facilities on the web browser are set to enable pop up boxes to appear For example on Microsoft Internet Explorer under Tools ensure that the Pop up Blocker is turned OFF and Internet Chapter 5 Operations 95 59 Options gt Security gt Custom Level gt Downloads gt Automatic Promptingfor file Downloads and File Downloads are both Enabled e Total Number of Entries e Start Entry e Number of Entries per Page e View e Clear Log Clears the log you are viewing e Dump Log Dumps the log you are viewing e Save Service Dump Creates a DPA Dump All log output that can be viewed or saved to a file lt Prev Next gt buttons appear if the number of logs entries exceeds the number of entries per page Click lt Prev Next gt to index through the log entries The Next button will not be displayed if the log has more fewer entries than the of entries per page setting After clicking the Next button the Prev button will be displayed If the log entries fit on a single page the lt Prev Next gt buttons do not appear View Logs 7 Log Type Informational Trace Total Number Of Entries 23 Start Entry 6 Number Of Entries Per Page 5 Clear Log Dump Log Save Servi
131. and byte 39 is set to the port s SCSI address i e byte 39 byte 34 Tape Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Relative Tgt Port Reporting Sense Directory Valid 0 Reserved 1 Relative Tgt Port 1 Port 0 2 Relative Tgt Port 2 Port 1 3 Relative Tet Port 3 Library Port Host Command SCSI Opcode Density Type 0 No media present 1 Gen1 384 track Media Type Vendor Reserved 2 Gen2 512 track 3 Gen3 704 track Volume Label Cartridge Type Logical Block Number H GO ON O1 Ol O17 O11 O11 AI O1 HH e H NX A NJ e O Current LBA that would be reported in Read Position command Data set Number OO Ist Error FSC Ol 1st Error Flag Data ON 2nd Error FSC QO 2nd Error Flag Data m Next to Last Error FSC AJID w N Next to Last Error Flag Data ON P j a J T rg O z O lt D S er N D go E O 4 v p4 lt 5 oO m ps Oo D ge E O e v k lt C WN O e WN A z O o Table C 2 86 89 90 95 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Last Error FSC Last Error Flag Data LPOS Region ERP Summary Information Product Revision Level YMDV as defined in Standard Inquiry this is also known as the Code Level Reserved 0 The descriptions below serve only as an overview of sense reporting in the tape drive This tape drive conforms t
132. ant If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than one drive only the first drive in the Logical Library will be utilized 5 20 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Autoload Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first available cartridge slot with the lowest numerical value that contains a cartridge automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive Loop Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the lowest numerical slot after the cartridge in the highest numerical slot has been filled and sent back to its home slot This allows endless backup operations without user interaction Starting Sequential Mode e Autoload Option If the Autoload option is set to ON Configure gt Library Settings gt Autoload the accessor will load the first cartridge cartridge located in the slot with the lowest numeric value found in the storage inventory area into the drive upon power ON of the library If the library powers on with a cartridge already in the drive sequential mode will start with that cartridge unless the host issues a rewind and unload command to the drive In that case the next cartridge in sequence will be loaded into the drive If the Autoload Option if OFF sequential mode must be started by selecting the Move Cartridges option Control gt Move Cartridges to load the first cartridge or any cartridge into the drive Whatever car
133. ant Restoring factory defaults will wipe out all the previous configuration data Factory defaults must be restored when the library drive is changed from a LTO half height to full height configuration in order for the library to correct the element addressing and drive numbering If a new drive is added to the library configuration a restore factory default is not required Table 5 4 Factory Default Settings Active Slots Maximum number of slots in library minus I O Station I O Station Enabled 2U library has 1 slot I O Station 4U library has 3 slot I O Station Encryption None License Key is protected if previously entered Chapter 5 Operations 5 27 Table 5 4 Factory Default Settings continued DHCP Enabled Note DNS server addresses if available will be automatically assigned If the DHCP server does not find any DNS server the DNS fields will be set to 0 0 0 0 Bar Code Label Length Reported to Host a e Emen nosion O oe ooo O or Web User Interface itary Mode eooo Deyne e Path Failover Key No change License Key is protected if previously entered OCP Access PIN Disabled Note The initial Factory Default setting is disabled If the OCP Access PIN setting is changed executing Restore Defaults will not change the setting sowe a SSCS iSCSSSSSSS a S Dawes eooo i oS weas eooo i oo S comwora Deve omer Sd e e S Revas poros o Pv6 Stateless Avioconig fea In some cases
134. ape Drive Sled on page 10 3 Modify or resubmit Logical Library setting Operator Control Panel Configure gt Logical Libraries or Web User Interface Configure Library gt Logical Libraries Restore defaults Operator Control Panel Configure gt Restore Defaults or Web User Interface Configure Library gt Restore Defaults Redundant power supply failed Complete the following steps 1 Replace the failed power supply see Power Supply on page 10 10 2 Cycle library power Power supply fan failure Replace the power supply The Error LED is illuminated when there is an unrecoverable i e hard drive or library failure This will happen at the same time the hard error message is displayed on the screen and the LED will remain lit until the error state is resolved Note From the Operator Control Panel run Service gt Library Verify If Library Verify runs without error the Error LED turns off If the error persists recycle power Input Modes There are several ways to enter values in the different menu items These values are selectable predefined values toggle values for example ON OFF and numerical values like network addresses Selecting Predefined Values 1 To set the predefined values press the SELECT button to select the menu item Chapter 2 User Interfaces 2 3 2 Using the UP and DOWN buttons select one of the various predefined values for that item 3 As soon as the Operator Con
135. ape Drives customizes each read write data channel for optimum performance The customization enables compensation for variations in the recording channel transfer function media characteristics and read write head characteristics 1 10 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Media Power Management The Ultrium 3 Ultrium 4 Ultrium 5 and Ultrium 6 Tape Drive s power management function controls the drive s electronics so that part of the electronics completely turn OFF when circuit functions are not needed for the drive s operation The library uses Ultrium Tape Cartridges that provide up to 2500 GB native capacity up to 6250 GB with 2 5 1 hardware data compression for LTO 6 Tape Drives up to 1500 GB native capacity up to 3000 GB with 2 1 hardware data compression for LTO 5 tape drives up to 800 GB native capacity up to 1600 GB with 2 1 hardware data compression for LTO 4 tape drives and up to 400 GB native capacity up to 800 GB with 2 1 hardware data compression for LTO 3 tape drives Ultrium 6 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 6 Data Cartridges Ultrium 6 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 5 capacities and can also read LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges with improved data rates Ultrium 5 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges Ultrium 5 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 4 ca
136. appears usable copy any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery Discard the mishandled cartridge e Review handling and shipping procedures Handle the Cartridge Carefully e Do not drop the cartridge If the cartridge drops slide the cartridge door back and ensure that the leader pin is properly seated in the pin retaining spring clips e Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge Handling the tape can damage the tape s surface or edges which may interfere with read or write reliability Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge can damage the tape and the brake mechanism in the cartridge e Do not stack more than six cartridges e Do not degauss a cartridge that you intend to reuse Degaussing makes the tape unusable Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 9 Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges Before you use a tape cartridge acclimate it to the operating environment for 24 hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive the time will vary depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was exposed The best storage container for the cartridges until they are opened is the original shipping container The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the cartridges and partially protects them from humidity changes When you ship a cartridge place it in its jewel case or in a sealed moisture proof bag to protect it from moist
137. ar code on the bar code label of the Ultrium tape cartridge a 2 character code L1 that represents information about the cartridge L identifies the cartridge as one that can be read by devices that incorporate LTO technology 1 indicates that it is the first generation of its type mega One million of Glossary I 11 meter In the Metric System the basic unit of length equal to approximately 39 37 inches MIB Management Information Base Information repository that is used by SNMP micro One millionth of microcode 1 One or more micro instructions 2 A code representing the instructions of an instruction set which is implemented in a part of storage that is not program addressable 3 To design write and test one or more micro instructions 4 See also microprogram microdiagnostic routine A program that runs under the control of a supervisor usually to identify field replaceable units microdiagnostic utility A program that is run by the customer engineer to test the machine microinstruction A basic or elementary machine instruction microprogram A group of microinstructions that when run performs a planned function The term microprogram represents a dynamic arrangement or selection of one or more groups of microinstructions for execution to perform a particular function The term microcode represents microinstructions that are used in a product as an alternative to hard wired circuitry to implement certai
138. ard disk drive The progress status for the drive memory dump is shown on the System Status screen to the right of the main Web User Interface screen Note It is recommended that both a regular and forced drive memory dumps be created and saved Note Ensure that all the pop up facilities on the web browser are set to allow pop up boxes to display With Microsoft Internet Explorer under Tools ensure that the pop up blocker is turned OFF and Internet Options gt Security gt Custom Level gt Downloads gt Automatic Prompting for file Downloads and File Downloads are both Enabled When the memory dumps are saved on the hard disk they can be e mailed to Tech Support for analysis if needed Note The memory dump might take up to 20 minutes to complete The System Status portion of the screen shows Drive Dump in Progress with the number of KBs transferred Save Drive Dump System Status Select Drive 1 e View Legend 01 13 2000 21 18 12 Library Name RE4uUi39 Status Drive 1 Status j Ready Slots Empty Total 40 44 1 0 Station Closed Ready Library Time 21 18 12 Drive Dump in Progress47 KE transferred a 7ug121 Figure 5 56 Service Save Drive Dump Chapter 5 Operations 5 61 Service Library Perform Diagnostics Note When running the System Test the library must contain at least the same number of data cartridges as there are drives in that library For example if your library has 4 drives installed you m
139. are error Illegal request Unit attention Data protect Blank Check Reserved Reserved B Aborted command C Reserved D Volume overflow E Reserved F Reserved POANDTIFEWNR OO 6 intonation byte Gest significant byt SSCS C 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table C 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name Additional Sense Code ASC Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ Byte 12 Byte 13 12 13 ASC ASCO 00 00 No additional sense The flags in the sense data indicate the reason for the command failure 00 01 Filemark detected A Read or Space command terminated early due to an FM The FM flag is set 00 02 EOM A Write or Write File Marks command failed because the physical end of tape was encountered or a Read or Space command encountered EOM The EOM flag is set 00 04 BOM A space command ended at Beginning of Tape The EOM bit is also set 00 05 EOD Read or Space command terminated early because End of Data was encountered 00 16 Operation in Progress 04 00 Cause not reportable A cartridge is present in the drive but it is in the process of being unloaded 04 01 Becoming Ready A media access command was received during a front panel initiated load or an immediate reported load command 04 02 Initializing Command Required A cartridge is present in the drive but is not logically loaded A Load command is required 04 03 Manual
140. ary General screen General Library Name I O Station Enabled Auto Clean Enabled Haornie tate 1s il Reported To Host o Extended Configuration for Logical Libraries Logical Library 1 Library Mode Gy honda O Sequential Autoload Loop Active Slots 371 F Logical Library 2 Library Mode eee one O Sequential Autoload Loop Active Slots 33 a77ug094 Apply Selections Figure 4 25 Example The 4U library Configure Library General screen 3 If your library has more than one drive proceed to Choosing the Number of Logical Libraries for Your Library If your library has one drive proceed to Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key e 4 26 Choosing the Number of Logical Libraries for Your Library Note Review the information in Determining the Number of Logical Libraries before completing the procedure in this section If you have a 2U or 4U library with only_one drive or do not wish to partition our library proceed to the next section Entering Path Failover Feature Activation Key on page 4 26 Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 25 One cartridge magazine cannot be assigned to two logical libraries If you partition a multi drive library each of the magazines must be assigned to a logical library on a magazine boundary The entire magazine must be part of one logical library only Note If you have a 2U library with two drives you have
141. ary of Computing 1994 Numbers 2 1 compression The relationship between the quantity of data that can be stored with compression as compared to the quantity of data that can be stored without compression In 2 1 compression twice as much data can be stored with compression as can be stored without compression A A Ampere ac Alternating current access method A technique for moving data between main storage and input or output devices accessor This component contains the library robot and bar code reader The accessor moves cartridges to and from the I O Station storage slots and tape drives adapter card A circuit board that adds function to a computer adj Adjustment AH Authentication Header An Internet Protocol intended to guarantee connectionless integrity and data origin authentication of IP datagrams Further it can optionally protect against replay attacks by using the sliding window technique and discarding old packets alphanumeric Pertaining to a character set that contains letters numerals and other characters such as punctuation marks alter To change ambient temperature The temperature of air or other media in a designated area particularly the area that is surrounding equipment AME Application Managed Encryption ampere A A unit of measure for electric current that is equivalent to a flow of 1 coulomb per second or to the current produced by 1 volt applied across a resistance of 1 ohm
142. atic IPv6 Address Ethernet Use these menu items to change the current network settings which allow you to access the library remotely via a web browser e IP Stack Choose IPv4 only IPv6 only or IPv4 amp IPv6 e IPv6 Only and Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 Choose Enable Stateless Auto Config Address Web User Interface or Stateless Autoconfig Operator Control Panel if assigned IPv6 IP addresses are desired To view the assigned IPv6 addresses after enabling Stateless Auto Config Address do the following Gateway Ethernet a 7ug043 Figure 5 16 Configure Network menu Operator Control Panel IPv6 Only Monitor gt Library gt Network If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 you must be prepared to enter both IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol If this is enabled your library host will negotiate the connection with the library If DHCP is disabled the following information is necessary to establish the remote access IP Address the IP address of the library 5 24 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide e Netmask the Network Mask address of the library e IP Stack the IP Stack manages static IP addresses e Stateless autoconfig allows IPv6 hosts to be configured automatically when connected to a routed IPv6 network e Prefix length the length of the IP address prefix e Static IPv6 address a static IPv6 address that has
143. ation Save your library configuration to your host computer or to a USB device Update your Library Configuration Form with the new drive and configuration information Resume normal library operations Replacing a Power Supply 1 Power OFF the library by pressing and holding down the power button for 4 seconds Disconnect the power cord from the electrical source then from the library Loosen the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply located on the back panel of the library Pull on two of the thumbscrews to pull the unit away from the rear panel of the library then grasp the top and bottom edge of the power supply and pull it out of the library 10 10 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide t 80rVicable tra Far Wie j i S8tVicing fon th hakda a a a66mi096 Figure 10 10 A power supply being removed from a 2U library 5 Remove the packaging from the replacement power supply 6 Grasp the top and bottom edge of the power supply and push it into the library 7 Tighten the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply located on the back panel of the library 8 Connect the power cord to the library then to the electrical source 9 Power ON the library using the power button on the front panel 10 Run the Library Verify test refer to Service Library Verify on page 5 29 11 Package the failed power supply in the same packaging in which the new
144. ay failed Environmental Specifications on library configuration is restored from the OCP or Web UI verify that your No SCSI IC detected file extension is dbb If the extension is correct your file was corrupted during the save Reconfigure then save your library configuration Note Configuration files that are saved with one version of library firmware might not be compatible with other versions of firmware It is recommended to save a configuration file each time the library firmware is upgraded Restore the library using a configuration file that was saved with the same version of firmware that is currently installed in the library is UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter Error Frame overrun or Parity Error on serial Interface Display Error gt O Ol While the Library Verify Test is running the bar code reader i Cheek the barcode abelon the reads different bar code data for the same customer supplied i scratch cartridge and run the scratch cartridge label Library Verify test again If the error recurs contact technical support Warning Event See Table 8 3 on page 8 11 I C Bus Failure 1 Retry the operation 2 After several occurrences contact technical support Warning Event See Table 8 3 on page 8 11 aa 8 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 8 1 Main Error Codes continued Warning Event See Table 8 3 on
145. be assigned to a logical library on a magazine boundary The entire magazine must be part of one logical library only In a fully populated 4U library with four logical libraries resource assignments will be as follows e Logical Library 1 will contain Drive 1 and the lower left cartridge magazines e Logical Library 2 will contain Drive 2 and the upper left cartridge magazines e Logical Library 3 will contain Drive 3 and the lower right cartridge magazine e Logical Library 4 will contain Drive 4 and the upper right cartridge magazine The I O Station and the reserved slot or dedicated cleaning slot DCS if one is assigned are shared among all logical libraries 5 44 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Note When reducing the number of drives in your library update the Logical Library configuration This will remove the Attention LED on the front panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen indicating that a drive is missing Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element addressing and drive numbering Replacing LTO half height drives with full height drives may require you to execute Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the drive element addressing and drive numbering See Configure Library Save Restore Configuration on page 5 57 Logical Libraries Number of Logical PENE E Cu rently contig ured 3 a 7ug098 Figure 5 36 The 4
146. be downloaded at no cost from the Adobe Systems home page Private key A cryptographic key that is used to decrypt a message PROM Programmable read only memory PS Power supply PTF Program temporary fix A single bugfix or group of bugfixes that are distributed in a form ready to install for customers PWR Power R rack A unit that houses the components of a storage subsystem such as the library rackmount kit A packaged collection of articles that are used to install the rack mounted version of the library RAM Random access memory Random access memory A storage device into which data is entered and from which data is retrieved in a nonsequential manner RAS Reliability availability and serviceability record A collection of related data or words which are treated as a unit recording density The number of bits in a single linear track measured per unit of length of the recording medium recoverable error An error condition that allows continued execution of a program ref Reference reg Register reinventory To inventory again retension The process or function of tightening the tape onto the cartridge if it is sensed that the tape has a loose wrap on the cartridge RFC Request for Comments Request for Comments RFC documents are a series of memoranda which encompasses new research innovations and methodologies applicable to Internet technologies RH Relative humidity I 14 Dell PowerVa
147. be sent The MIB file should not be taken to mean that all traps that are defined in the MIB refer to Appendix F SNMP Status MIB will be sent by the library or that they will be sent in the future This appendix lists TapeAlert flags that are supported by the Ultrium 3 4 5 and 6 Tape Drives TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library Parameter Action Required Code d decimal Library The media changer mechanism is having difficulty communicating with Hardware A the drive Power cycle the library and try the operation again e If the problem is corrected run Library Verify before resuming normal library operations Refer to Service Library Verify on page 5 29 e If the problem persists contact technical support Library There is a problem with the media changer mechanism Power cycle the Hardware B library and try the operation again e If the problem is corrected run Library Verify before resuming normal library operations Refer to Service Library Verify on page 5 29 e If the problem persists contact technical support Library The media changer has a hardware fault Hardware C e Ensure that the media changer and drives are not being used by any host then reset the library from the front panel e If the problem persists contact technical support B 1 Library e Ensure that the media changer and drives are not being used by any Hardware D host then reset the library from the fron
148. been assigned to the library e Gateway the Gateway address of the library Ethernet the current speed setting of the ethernet interface e DNS Server 1 the first DNS server address e DNS Server 2 the second DNS server address Note If a host and domain name are entered instead of an address the IPv4 or IPv6 address will be resolved from the DNS using that name That address will be stored in the library rather than the name Therefore if the address changes the name or a new address will have to be entered Configure Set Access PIN Use this menu item to enable disable set or change the Access PIN personal identification number which is used to restrict access to the Control Configure and Service menus Note Record the Access PIN and store this in a secure location for future reference Library configuration files saved with the Save Library Config menu do not include the Access PIN The Operator Control Panel OCP pin is turned off by default but it is strongly recommended to be enabled if your environment requires unit security Enabling the OCP pin feature prevents the unit settings from being tampered with Users will be allowed to review the library status and manipulate media without entering the OCP pin If a unit administrator needs to make a configuration change in the unit the OCP will ask for the 4 digit code in order to allow access to make changes Once all the changes are completed the pin access will e
149. been exported from the library The amber LED may also be lit because a power supply or a power supply fan is failing or a drive sled is defective missing or has been replaced by a different drive type Error Amber LED It is illuminated when there is an unrecoverable library or drive failure A message is displayed at the same time on the Operator Control Panel display Cartridge The 2U library contains two cartridge magazines magazines The left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges or 11 data cartridges and the elective 1 slot I O Station The right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges The 4U library contains four cartridge magazines The upper left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges The lower left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges or 9 data cartridges and the elective 3 slot I O Station The upper right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges The lower right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges Air vents These vents draw cooler air into the library enclosure and allow warm air to escape which helps keep the library at a normal operating temperature 1 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 1 1 2U library and 4U library front panel descriptions continued Number Kem Description Control keys UP a The upper left button is used to scroll upward through menu items DOWN v The lower left button is used to scroll downward through menu ite
150. ble elements on the Library Identity page An X indicates that the element displays for the specified library type Table 5 8 Library Status page elements Menu Tem Status Library status is displayed using icons with text A checkmark with the X X word Ready indicates the library is functioning properly An exclamation point with the word Caution indicates the library can function but is experiencing a problems An X with the word Error indicates the library is not functioning because of a serious problem Cartridge in This identifies a cartridge that is currently being moved by the accessor Transport None is displayed if no cartridge is being moved Number of Moves This is the number of times the accessor has moved a cartridge from X X Point A to Point B for example from a storage slot to a drive Total Power On This is the total amount of time that the library has been powered ON Time Accessor Status This is the current status of the accessor Left Magazine This displays whether the left magazine is Present or Not Present x fo Right Magazine This displays whether the right magazine is Present or Not Present x fo 1 Left Magazine This displays whether the lower left magazine is Present or Not a a Present 5 36 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 5 8 Library Status page elements continued 1 Right Magazine This displays whether the lower rig
151. bling depends on the type of SCSI bus that you use LVD e For a server with an LVD SCSI bus Use a maximum system to device cable length of 10 m 33 ft when attaching to the host interface board SCSI and one or two daisy chained drives Use a maximum system to device cable length of 5 m 17 ft when attaching to the host interface board SCSI and three to six daisy chained drives Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 7 Note For maximum performance it is recommended to have a maximum of one drive per SCSI bus Only use the maximum system to device cable length of 25 m 82 ft when attaching directly to one device a point to point interconnection Note Daisy chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus performance SCSI cables connectors and host bus adapters Physical Characteristics of the SCSI Interface The library operates as a set of SCSI 3 devices The Ultrium Tape Drives attach to servers using an LVD Ultra160 SCSI interface Each SCSI drive sled uses shielded HD68 pin connectors and can attach directly to a 2 byte wide SCSI cable Any combination of up to two initiators servers and up to four targets devices is allowed on a single SCSI bus if the following conditions are met e The SCSI bus is terminated properly at each end e Cable restrictions are followed according to the SCSI 3 specification Under the SCSI 3 protocol this type of attachment allows cable lengths of up to 25
152. bmit button has been clicked no other changes can be made until after the library has applied the current changes 5 50 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide a oe 10 11 After the Submit button has been clicked depending on the changes made you will either be disconnected and need to login again or reboot the library Clicking the Refresh button will refresh the page and any changes made will not be retained Select a Protocol Stack Choose IPv4 only IPv6 only or Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 you must be prepared to enter both IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses The sections below will gray out depending on the choices made here Enter the Host Name Note The underscore _ is not allowed as part of a host name Enter the Domain Name DNS Primary Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server DNS Secondary Enter the IP address of your secondary DNS server Enable SSL for Web If you desire to have SSL Secure Sockets Layer enabled place a check in this box Note If you get a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User Interface you can install the certificate or allow an exception depending on the internet browser you are using SSL is enabled when the URL begins with https and some browsers will show a lock Ethernet Settings Ethernet Settings choices are Auto the default 10 Mbit Half 10 Mbit Full 100 Mbit
153. brary CUSTOMER REPLACEABLE UNITS CRU AND SERVICE SPARES Drive Sled See Isolating Drive Sled Problems on page 7 9 Power Supply See System Status on page 2 6 and Isolating a Power Supply Problem on page Library Controller Card See Isolating a Library Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem on page Library Enclosure Service See Isolating a Library Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem on page Spare ITDT Performance Test duration Items affecting the duration of the test are varies e The level of adapter device driver e Your adapter model and type See Isolating Host Atfachment Interface Problems on page 71 problems Need help with a library password Contact technical support Key path diagnostic not This diagnostic is available with library firmware level greater than 6 xx Refer to working Verifying Updating Firmware on page 4 23 to determine the level of firmware on your library If necessary visit http support dell com to download the latest levels of firmware for your library Auto Clean status displayed as If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present or if a cleaning Chk Media Rsvd Slot on the cartridge is present but not in the reserved slot Auto Clean status will show Chk Web User Interface System Media Rsvd Slot and Status will show a green check mark and the words Status screen Media Attention Chapter 7 Troub
154. brary configuration change is needed Reconfiguring the library by reassigning the amount of logical libraries will clear this issue Navigate to the Web User Interface Configure Library gt Logical Libraries or to the Operator Control Panel s Configure gt Logical Libraries section and reassign the logical libraries If you do not want to change your logical library configuration resubmit your current settings Restore factory defaults Operator Control Panel Configure gt Save Restore and select Restore All or Web User Interface Configure Library gt Save Restore and select Restore Media Issues e Avoid contamination by ensuring that the library is installed in a clean contamination free environment Continue cleaning the tape drive as needed Refer to Choosing a Location on page 4 1 A cartridge should be acclimated for at least 24 hours before being used particularly if it has been stored at a substantially different temperature or level Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions on page 6 8 Any cartridge that is suspected of being defective or contaminated should NOT be reused in any drive Power Supply or Fan Issues Check the power supply or redundant power supply for failure and_also check any power supply fans Replace any defective units Refer to for a redundant power supply failure on a 4U library and Isolating a Power Supply Problem on page 7 7 e Ensure that you are using
155. brary and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Note Daisy chaining is NOT recommended due to potential issues with SCSI bus performance SCSI cables connectors and host bus adapters Removal of any jumpers will create a SCSI bus for each drive installed in your library for attachment to multiple servers or to multiple SCSI adapter cards on one server Remember that each SCSI bus must be terminated Multiple SCSI buses may be required for maximum performance depending on the application and data compression ratio Note however that library Medium Changer control is required on at least one SCSI bus The Medium Changer device is required to be addressed via LUN 1 of the lowest numbered drive position of each logical library The Medium Changer device may additionally be addressed via LUN 1 of other drives in any logical library Any bus containing a Medium Changer device via LUN 1 of a drive is referred to as a control and data path Any other bus is referred to as a data path For information about control paths see Using Multiple Control Paths on page 3 2 Terminating the Bus The SCSI bus and all of the wires in the SCSI cable must be properly terminated according to the SCSI standard You can plug an external terminator into one of the SCSI connectors A terminator must be installed on the last device on each end of a string of multiple devices A terminator is included with each SCSI Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Differential LVD
156. brary drive even if the reserved slot is not in that logical library Typically if the library contains multiple logical libraries the last logical library is Chapter 5 Operations 5 67 chosen for the reserved slot containing the cleaning cartridge As with a library with a single logical library this slot is the last physical slot in the library top right magazine uppermost rear slot Note Configure the required number of reserved slots prior to enabling Auto Clean To reserve a cleaning slot follow these steps To reserve slots in your library go to the Web User Interface at Choosing General Library Settings on page 4 24 or the Operator Control Panel at Configure Library on page 5 20 to get directions on reducing the Active slot count 5 68 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media Figure 6 1 shows the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge and its components LTO cartridge memory 4 Write protect Switch 2 Cartridge door 5 Label area Leader Pin 6 Insertion guide a67b0022 Figure 6 1 The LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge Note The same components are on all the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges Data Cartridges The different generations of Ultrium data cartridges can be identified by color Table 6 1 Cartridge Types and Colors Black and Silvery gray Burgundy Burgundy and Silvery gray Green Slate Blue Slate Blue and Silvery gra
157. cal Locations For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing see Librar yy The following table contains the physical location and SCSI element address decimal and hexadecimal of the I O slot storage slots and drive slot in the 2U librarylibrary configured with one drive and one logical partition If a second drive were installed it would be located at address 257 0x101 With two drives installed the library can be configured as one partition with two drives or as two partitions with one drive per partition When configured with two drives and one logical partition the Element Address assignments will be as follows DTE assignments e Drive 1 256 0x100 e Drive 2 257 0x101 The STE assignments will be as shown in Table A 3 on page A 2 When configured with two drives and one logical partition the Element Address assignments will be as follows DTE assignments e Logical Library 1 Drive 1 256 0x100 e Logical Library 2 Drive 2 256 0x100 STE assignments e Logical Library 1 Slot 1 through slot 11 4096 x1000 through 4106 0x100A e Logical Library 2 Slot 12 through slot 23 4096 x1000 through 4107 0x100B Table A 3 2U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot one logical partition with one drive Left Magazine Library Right Magazine Front of 2U library Rear Panel Front of 2U library Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 23 Slot 22 Slot 21 Slot 20 410
158. capacity and maximum data transfer rates are as follows Table 1 3 Tape drive model and host interface type Tape Drive Model Drive Tape Drive Model Host Interface Ultrium 6 Full Height and Half e 8 Gb s Fibre Channel single port Height drives i e 6 Gb s Serial Attached SCSI SAS dual port Ultrium 5 Full Height and Half e 8 Gb s Fibre Channel single port Height drives e 6 Gb s Serial Attached SCSI SAS dual port Ultrium 4 Full Height drives e 4 Gb s Fibre Channel single port e 3 Gb s Serial Attached SCSI SAS dual port Ultrium 4 Half Height V2 drives 8Gb s Fibre Channel single port 6GB s Serial Attached SCSI SAS dual port Ultrium 4 Half Ultrium 4 Half Height drives drives e 3 Gb s SAS single port ee 3 Full Height drives e Ultral60 SCSI LVD depending on drive single ended SE is not recommended as it will severely degrade performance e 4 Gb s Fibre Channel single port Ultrium 3 Half Height V2 drives 6GB s Serial Attached SCSI SAS dual port Ultrium 3 Half Height drives e 3 Gb s SAS single port Table 1 4 Library storage capacity and data transfer rate 2U Library Specification 4U Library Specification erence copay 24 data cartridges 48 data cartridges trum ata Cartridges Native 60 TB Native 120 TR Compressed 150 TB 2 5 1 Compressed 300 TB 2 5 1 compression compression T R a 7 24 data cartridges 48 data cartridges Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges Native 36 TB Native
159. caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people because of some existing condition A caution notice can be accompanied by one of several symbols A hazardous electrical condition with less severity than electrical danger safety symbols A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the product Laser symbols are always accompanied by the classification of the laser as defined by the U S Department of Health and Human Services for example Class I Class I Class II A A hazardous condition that is not represented by other A hazardous condition due to mechanical movement in or around the product A hazardous condition due to the weight of the unit Weight symbols are accompanied by an approximation of the product s weight 32 55 kg 70 5 121 2 Ibs svc00168 xiii A hazardous condition due to the unit s susceptibility to electrostatic discharge Laser Safety and Compliance Before the library is used review the following laser safety information Class Laser Product The product might contain a laser assembly that complies with the performance standards set by the US Food and Drug Administration for a Class I laser product Class I laser products do not emit hazardous laser radiation The library has the necessary protective housing and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class I limits External safety age
160. ce Dump 09 08 28 20 38 21 12 TRC CST lt 0B OF gt 09 08 28 20 37 44 81 TRC CST lt 0A OF 03 gt 09 08 28 15 07 42 06 TRC CST lt 08 gt 09 08 28 10 47 14 45 TRC CST lt 0B OF gt 09 08 28 10 31 59 65 TRC CST lt 0A OF 02 gt a77ug120 Figure 5 54 Service Library View Logs page Service Library View Drive Logs This page allows the drive logs to be viewed after selecting the following e Log Type Error Logs drive error code information SCSI Logs ASC ASCQ and FSC information e Additional Sense Code ASC e Additional Sense Code Qualifier ASCQ e Fault Symptom Code FSC 5 60 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide View Drive Logs Select Drive AEA Log Type SCSI Total Number Of Entries 10 Start Entry 4 Number Of Entries Per Page 3 View 000 01 51 23 00x04 OxEE OxOE 0x43 0x00 000 01 56 03 00x04 OxEE OxOE 0x43 0x00 000 20 47 30 00x04 OxEE Ox0E 0x43 0x00 a 7ug096 lt Prev Next gt Figure 5 55 Service Library View Drive Logs screen Service Library Save Drive Dump This menu item allows a drive memory dump to be saved to the host computer 1 Select the drive 2 Choose the regular drive memory dump option data that is stored in flash or the forced drive memory dump option data that is stored in memory and moved to flash 3 Click Save Drive Dump When Save Drive Dump is clicked the user has the option of saving the drive memory dump to their h
161. cessful 1 2 3 4 The replacement library enclosure will power up with the Ready Activity LED J in Figure 10 20 on page 10 22 ON Power OFF the replacement library enclosure Unplug the power cord from the power source then from the library Proceed to pa b If power ON is not successful contact Technical Support for further instructions Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 19 Swapping Library Controller Cards IMPORTANT READ ME BEFORE CONTINUING The Library Enclosure contains a copy of the vital product data VPD for your library The VPD contains your current library configuration A primary copy of this VPD is contained within the Library Controller Card A backup copy of this VPD is maintained on the accessor in the enclosure or chassis When the Library Enclosure is replaced the new enclosure electronics should contain zeros 0 s in key VPD locations Upon detection of these zeros the library will automatically write VPD data to the replacement library enclosure from the primary copy of the VPD contained in the Library Controller Card In rare occurrences the replacement library enclosure may contain valid non zero VPD data left over from having been installed previously in another library If this occurs the library firmware which is expecting to see zeros in the VPD area will instead detect valid VPD data and will not know which copy of the VPD is the correct one It will detect this VPD mi
162. commendations to provide maximum performance and reliability 1 The latest version of microcode must be installed on your Dell tape libraries and devices Chapter 5 Operations 5 63 2 The library code must be updated first unless noted otherwise This action supports any changes that are introduced in the library code for that drive or any changes that are made to the drive for that release 3 These firmware updates are intended to increase overall reliability improve tape handling reduce the possibility of data errors and enhance diagnostic capabilities Note Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together When you are updating to the latest firmware verify that all installed components such as tape drive and library are at the latest levels noted on the Support website Mixing different levels of library and tape drive firmware is not supported and might cause unpredictable results This page displays the current library and drive firmware versions Firmware is downloaded to the host then uploaded to the drive or library Click Browse to choose the firmware file you downloaded from the website for the library or drive you want to update You can update only one device at a time Be sure that you choose the correct firmware for the library or drive type Click Update to initiate the file transfer and firmware update Note During the update no host drive action is possible The drive update t
163. compatible with incompatible with drive the drive and model of your library The library automatically unloads incompatible cartridges and the Media Attention LED flashes Export the media in order to clear the state Refer to Cartridge Compatibility on page 6 3 Cannot write to or read from Ensure that the cartridge write protect switch is in the write enabled position tape see Write Protect Switch on page 6 6 Ensure that you have the appropriate data cartridge for your library model see Cartridge Compatibility on page 6 3 Ensure that you are using an Ultrium cartridge that has not been degaussed Do not degauss Ultrium cartridges Ensure that the cartridge has not been exposed to harsh environmental or electrical conditions and is not physically damaged in any way Refer to Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions on page 6 8 and Perform a Thorough Inspection on page 6 9 Many backup applications do not read or write to cartridges that were created using a different backup application In this case you may have to perform an erase reformat or label replacement operation on the cartridge Ensure that you understand any data protection or overwrite protection schemes that your backup application may be using which could prevent you from writing to a given cartridge Retry the operation with a different known good cartridge Clean the drive See Service Library Clean Drive
164. configured to have more than one control path When configuring additional control paths additional library sharing configurations and availability options are made possible Access to the logical library is on a first come first served basis and each control path for a logical library can accept commands while the library is in use by another control path By default only the first drive in a logical library will be LUN 1 enabled For a particular logical library you can enable as many control paths as there are drives in that logical library Using Multiple Control Paths for Path Failover Command failures and timeouts are costly You want your library to run smoothly and efficiently To ensure continued processing the library offers an optional path failover feature that enables the host device driver to resend the command to an alternate control path for the same logical library With control path failover installed the alternate control path can include another HBA SAN or library control path drive The device driver initiates error recovery and continues the operation on the alternate control path without interrupting the application Path Failover is a combination of two previous features Control Path Failover key entered at the library user interface and Data Path Failover key entered at the device driver interface For library firmware of 8 xx or lower the Path Failover feature is available for LTO 4 tape drives Library firmware
165. contains current data and is eligible 6 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide to become a scratch blank data cartridge Do not write protect scratch blank cartridges the tape drive will not be able to write new data to them If you must manually set the write protect switch slide it left or right to the desired position oO N O O LL N xt Figure 6 4 Setting the write protect switch Table 6 7 Location of the write protect switch Write Protect Switch Handling the Cartridges Attention Do not insert a damaged tape cartridge into the drive A damaged cartridge can interfere with the reliability of a drive and may void the warranties of the drive and the cartridge Before inserting a tape cartridge inspect the cartridge case cartridge door and write protect switch for breaks Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage cartridges or their magnetic tape To avoid damage to your tape cartridges and to ensure the continued high reliability of your LTO Ultrium Tape Drives use the following guidelines Provide Training e Post procedures that describe proper media handling in places where people gather e Ensure that anyone who handles tape has been properly trained in handling and shipping procedures This includes operators users programmers archival services and shipping personnel e Ensure that any service or contract personnel who perform archiving are
166. could not write cartridge then discard the old its system area successfully cartridge B 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table B 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive continued Flag Tape system area read __ Set when the tape system area could Copy the data to another tape failure not be read successfully at load time cartridge then discard the old cartridge Loading Failure When loading a tape into a drive a Take this action if the tape cartridge hardware malfunction can prevent the will not load in the drive tape from being loaded into the drive 4 Remove the tape cartridge from or the tape may actually get stuck in the library and inspect it for the drive damage If damaged discard it Try another cartridge in that tape drive If it still fails replace the drive sled See Take this action if the tape is stuck in the drive 1 Attempt to unload the tape from the drive using the host backup application that is currently using the drive or using the remote or local UI If the cartridge will not unload contact technical support 56 Unload Failure When attempting to unload a tape Unload the cartridge from the cartridge a drive hardware drive using the Operator Control malfunction can prevent the tape from Panel Control gt Move being ejected The tape may actually Cartridge or the Web User be stuck in the drive Interface Manage
167. cs page The first field can be modified to set the number of cycles The second field displays the cycles completed Service Library Key Path Diagnostics Please refer to http support dell com to determine the availability of this feature Important Ensure that library firmware and drive firmware are up to date before running the Key Path Diagnostic Library firmware level must be ereater than 6 xx See e 4 23 The key path diagnostics test provides the ability to perform diagnostics on the encryption key path Only drives that are set up for library managed encryption will be tested Only encryption capable drives in logical libraries that are configured for Library Managed Encryption will be tested To configure the library for encryption refer to Configure Library Encryption on page 5 46 The test consists of four parts 5 62 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide e Drive Test The library performs a drive communication test to confirm communication with the drive Ethernet Test For each key management IP address the library performs a ping test and records the results e EKM Path Test For each key management IP address that passed the ping test the library performs a communication test e EKM Config Test This test confirms that a drive is correctly configured in the key manager to service key requests To run the Key Path Diagnostic complete the following procedure
168. ct the library from possible damage Before relocating your library complete the following procedure 1 Remove all cartridges from inside the library Power OFF the library This will align the robot with the shipping lock slot Remove any cables and terminators connected to the library Remove the library from the rack if necessary Remove the shipping label H and lock J from the rear panel of the library SS E 10 1 Remove before Ne operation ATTENTION _ a Place in storage jocalon MUMONLTIN on rear panel a 7ug019 Figure 10 2 Shipping Lock and Label Storage Location 6 Insert the shipping lock J into the slot located on the center of the top of the library and secure with the shipping label H a 7ug018 Figure 10 3 Shipping Lock and Label 7 Pack the library in its original packaging materials or equivalent packaging for moving or shipping Table 10 1 Shipping Lock Shipping Label Shipping Label 10 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Removing Installing Adding a Tape Drive Sled There are two types of drive sleds in a TL2000 library 2U library and a TL4000 library 4U library The contents of the ship groups are specific to the type of drive sled e Drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge ESD springs see Figure 10 4 ship eroup Drive sled without ESD springs Packet of conductive tape to b
169. d 0x08 V321 A3 Adaptec SCSI Card 39160 3960D Ultral60 SCSI slot 201 0x15 V321 A3 D5 0 IBM ULT3580 TD3 5BG2 0x09 V321 A4 Adaptec SCSI Card 39160 3960D Ultral60 SCSI slot 202 2 From the System Console type nwconfig w Select NCF files Options from the Configuration Options screen 4 Select Edit STARTUP NCF from the Available NCF Files Options screen D 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Add the LUNS switch to the load line of the appropriate SCSI driver If a dual channel card is installed and you are unsure which channel the LUN device is attached to simply edit both lines LOAD ADPT160M HAM SLOT 201 LUNS LOAD ADPT160M HAM SLOT 202 LUNS After the STARTUP NCE file has been edited save the file and reboot the server to activate the new STARTUP NCF Upon reboot navigate to the System Console and type scan all This will start a scan of all the LUNS on each adapter When the scan is complete verify the LUN device has been detected using the list storage adapters command Typical output with both the tape drive and loader being recognized 0x08 V321 A3 Adaptec SCSI Card 39160 3960D Ultral60 SCSI slot 201 0x16 V321 A3 D5 1 DELL PV 124T 0031 0x15 V321 A3 D5 0 IBM ULT3580 TD3 5BG2 0x09 V321 A4 Adaptec SCSI Card 39160 3960D Ultral60 SCSI slot 202 Netware may display unbound device meaning a driver is not bound to the loader unless a driver from a backup sof
170. ddress for either IPv4 or IPv6 4 22 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 3 When the login screen appears a Select admin for a User ID b Enter secure for a Password Login User ID Admin Password Em Figure 4 23 Log in screen on the Web User Interface a77ug070 Verifying Updating Firmware It is important to run the latest level of firmware To ensure that you are running the latest levels of library firmware drive firmware and SNMP MIB Management Information Base file complete this procedure 1 Verify the SNMP MIB file currently installed on your SNMP server Verify the levels of library and drive firmware currently installed on your library by completing the following steps a Expand Monitor Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface b Click Library Identity and make note of the Firmware revision c Click Drive Identity and make note of the Firmware revision d Log out of the Web User Interface Note The SNMP MIB file is an optional feature 2 Download the latest library firmware drive firmware and SNMP MIB Management Information Base file from http support dell com Note The SNMP MIB file is an optional feature a Enter in your internet browser address field and press Enter on your keyboard b Compare the firmware level available on the web to those that you made note of in step 1 If you are running the latest levels of
171. dicates incompatible firmware 5 64 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide urrently Installed Library Firmware 104 Browse_ Upgrade Drive 1 LTO3 HH SAS V2 Firmware we Firmware Revision CF1 Firmware File Browse Upgrade Drive 2 LTO4 HH SAS Firmware we Firmware Revision 23E ive Firmware File Browse a 7ug289 Figure 5 59 The Service Library Upgrade Firmware page showing one Ultrium 3 SAS Half Height V2 drive and one Ultrium 4 SAS Half Height drive Service Library Reboot Important Some options of the Web User Interface take the library OFFLINE This inactive mode can interfere with host based application software causing data loss Ensure that the library is idle before attempting to perform any remote operations that will take the library OFFLINE This page is used to perform a library reboot There is a default time delay when the Web User Interface page refreshes itself This time should be sufficient to reload the page However during a reboot the connection to the library may be lost If the connection is lost the user will have to reload the page manually Click the Reboot button to initiate the reboot Reboot a 7ug077 Figure 5 60 Service Library Reboot page Import and Export Media during Normal Library Operation Import Media Data cartridges can be inserted and taken out of a magazine while the library is in operation If the library contains
172. e A 4 on page A 6 Appendix A SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations A 5 STE assignments e Logical Library 1 Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 x1000 through 4104 0x1008 e Logical Library 2 Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 x1000 through 4107 Ox100B e Logical Library 3 Slot 22 through slot 33 4096 x1000 through 4107 Ox100B e Logical Library 4 Slot 34 through slot 45 4096 x1000 through 4107 Ox100B Drive 4 Element Address Drive 3 Element Address ti 2 Drive 2 Element Address La 1 3 Front side Drive 1 Element Address a77ug164 Figure A 4 Configuration of a four partition system SCSI Element Addressing Every logical library starts at the first drive slot with the current assigned element start address default value 256 It will be incremented from the bottom to the top slots for every drive slot There is one exception to this addressing scheme to accommodate libraries currently in the field A 4U library which contains only full height drives will continue to have the addresses assignments 256 and 257 thus causing no interruptions to their operation Drive slots will still be incremented by 1 for each drive slot position Note Exchanging drives with different form factors will result in the library needing to be reconfigured 4U Unit with only FH drives 1 logical library 257 256 4U Unit with FH and HH drives 1 logical library a77ug165 Figure A 5 Exa
173. e I O Station by pushing it back into the library Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen Resume normal library operations If the test fails an error code will be displayed Make note of the error then refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in this document for additional instructions 10 Package the failed drive sled in the same packaging in which the new sled was shipped to you and return to Dell 10 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Important If the failed drive was configured for encryption to ensure the replacement drive receives the proper encryption parameters resubmit the encryption choices listed on Configure Library gt Encryption for that particular drive or logical library even if the encryption settings did not change Adding a Tape Drive Sled Use these instructions to add_a new tape drive to your 2U or 4U Tape Library Refer to Appendix A SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations on page A 1 for more information Note Power OFF the library before installing a SCSI drive sled Fibre Channel and SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and may be removed and installed while the library is powered ON Important In a 4U library a full height drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1 drive will occupy slot 1 and slot 2 or drive slot 3 drive will occupy slot 3 and slot 4 A full height drive sled should never be insta
174. e Label Fields Valid VolValid bit Byte 21 bit 0 is set if the Volume Label being reported is valid 10 The Volume Label field Bytes 22 28 reports the volume label if a cartridge is loaded in the drive and Volume Label Fields Valid is set 11 The Current Wrap field Byte 29 reports the physical wrap of the tape The least significant bit reflects the current physical direction A 0 Appendix C Sense Data C 15 means that the current direction is away from the physical beginning of the tape A 1 means that the current direction is towards the physical beginning of the tape 12 Relative LPOS fields Bytes 30 33 reports the current physical position on the tape 13 SCSI Address field Byte 34 reports the SCSI Bus Address for the drive Values returned range from 00h to OFh 14 This field Byte 35 contains the frame and drive number passed across the RS 422 serial interface C 16 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Appendix D Enabling LUN Support in Linux To verify the detection of a tape drive administrators should check for its entry in proc scsi scsi Current versions of Linux may not scan the logical storage unit LUN ID of every device This can result in some TL2000 TL4000 devices not being identified or listed in the proc scsi scsi output Administrators can follow these steps to enable support for such devices 1 Type cat proc scsi scsi The output will look similar to
175. e applied to the drive sled for ESD protection e Drive sled with ESD springs see Figure 10 5 on page 10 4 ship group Drive sled with ESD springs a77ug008 Figure 10 4 Library drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge ESD springs SCSI sled shown Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 3 a 7ug202 Figure 10 5 Library drive sled with ESD springs 1 SAS sled shown Removing a Tape Drive Sled i Remove the host interface cable H B or amp in IT IS IMPORTANT TO PRESERVE A DRIVE DUMP FOR ANALYSIS IF ALL OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS EXIST e Library Error LED is ON e Operator Control Panel is displaying a drive error message e Web User Interface System Status screen is indicating that a drive has failed IF NONE OF THE CONDITIONS LISTED ABOVE EXIST PROCEED TO THE NEXT STEP Power OFF the library before removing and or installing a SCSI drive sled Fibre Channel and SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and may be removed and installed while the library is powered ON If necessary unload the tape cartridge from the drive to be removed e Using the Operator Control Panel Control gt Move Cartridges e Using the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Move Media and terminator J for SCSI drive sled only 10 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide a77ug204 Figure 10 6 Drive sled components full height fibre drive in top position half height
176. e is attached to a leader pin K in in Figure 6 1 on page 6 1 behind the door When the cartridge is inserted into the drive a threading mechanism pulls the pin and tape out of the cartridge across the drive head and onto a non removable take up reel The head can then read or write data from or to the tape The write protect switch Ef in Figure 6 1 on page 6 1 prevents data from being written to the tape cartridge For more information see Write Protect Switch on page 6 6 The label area J in Figure 6 1 on page 6 1 provides a location to place a label The insertion guide J in Figure 6 1 on page 6 1 is a large notched area that prevents the cartridge from being inserted incorrectly Table 6 3 Nominal Cartridge Life Load Unload Cycles Ultrium 3 20 000 20k Ultrium 2 10 000 10k Ultrium 1 5000 5k 6 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Cartridge Compatibility Table 6 4 Ultrium data cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges tape EO Ultrium Data Cartridges a 2500 GB 1500 GB 800 GB 400 GB 200 GB 100 GB Ultrium 6 Ultrium 5 Ultrium 4 Ultrium 3 Ultrium 2 Ultrium 1 Ultrium Read Write Read Write Read only 6 5 4 Ultrium Read Write Read Write Read only 3 Ultrium Read Write Read Write 2 1 WORM Write Once Read Many Cartridges Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write Once Read
177. e is placed in a reserved slot or the DCS if one exists 4U only c If the cleaning cartridge is not in a reserved slot use the Operator Control Panel Control gt Move Cartridge or the Web User Interface Manage Library gt Move Media to move the cleaning cartridge into the reserved slot or the DCS if one exists 4U only Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 43 Note A user has the option to perform manual cleaning by navigating in the RMU to Service gt Clean Drive In units with more than one drive to be cleaned the user must manually refresh the screen after the clean has completed in order to be able to select an additional drive to be cleaned 4 Replace the cleaning cartridge if needed e A cleaning cartridge must be replaced after 50 uses To determine the number of cleaning uses remaining click on the Web User Interface Monitor Library gt Inventory e Click on the located under that magazine presentation to expand the detail of resident cartridges e Cleaning cartridges are labeled as CLNxxxLx Observe the information displayed for the slots containing a cleaning cartridge The number of Media Loads represent how many times the cleaning cartridge has been used The number 50 minus that Media Load number represents the number of uses remaining 4 44 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Chapter 5 Operations The following table lists menu navigation
178. e of the error then refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting on page 7 1 Note Library Verify requires a piece of scratch media to perform the test Once the test has been initiated the user must complete the test 5 When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I O Station opens remove the cartridge used in the test 6 Close the I O Station by pushing it back into the library 7 Use the Up Down keys to highlight lt Cancel gt Press the Select key to exit the Library Verify screen Service Run Tests The following library diagnostics are available in this menu a 7ug048 Figure 5 23 Service Run Tests menu e System Test this test exercises library components by moving customer data cartridges from slots to drives and back to slots No data is written or read from the customer tapes To run this test successfully the library must contain at least one data cartridge for every drive present in the library e Slot to Slot Test The Slot To Slot test will move each resident data cartridge from one slot to another for each test cycle requested When completing the Slot To Slot test you will need to Inventory your library before placing it back online since this test scrambles the cartridge slot locations 5 30 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Note After running the System Test or the Slot to Slot Test the library will need to be re inventoried It might be
179. e operation Check the applications users manual or the hardware users manual for specific instructions on redoing the library inventory Media W It is set when it receives unsupported SCSI opcodes Changer Cooling FAN W One or more fans inside the library have failed This flag is cleared when Failure all fans are working again Unreadable I The library was unable to read the barcode on a cartridge Bar Code Labels e D Decimal e I Informational suggestion to user e W Warning Remedial action is advised Performance of data may be at risk e C Critical immediate remedial action is required B 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive Table B 1 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive Flag Number Write failure Set for any unrecoverable write or positioning error where isolation is uncertain and failure could be due to a faulty tape cartridge or to faulty drive hardware Not data grade Set when the cartridge is not data grade Any data that you write to the tape is at risk Write protect Set when the tape drive detects that the tape cartridge is write protected No removal Set when the tape drive receives an UNLOAD command after the server prevented the tape cartridge from being removed Unsupported format Set when you load an unsupported the cartridge format has been corrupted Ol Cartridge mem
180. e the minimum version required to support Ultrium 5 tape drives are installed on the host Ensure that any host applications and software using their own device drivers are at the minimum level required to support Ultrium 5 tape drives Library BCR Bar Code Reader Libraries manufactured after May 2010 may have a BCR that requires a minimum level of library firmware The minimum level of firmware for these libraries is 9 00 Attempts to downlevel these libraries below 9 00 will be blocked by the library Dedicated Cleaning Slot removal Library firmware level must be greater than 3 90 Encryption Library firmware level must be 5 80 or greater LTO4 Drive firmware level must be 77BE or greater Key Path Diagnostics Library firmware level must be greater than 6 3 if feature is available Path Failover LTO 4 Tape Drives No minimum level of firmware is required IPv6 Support Library firmware level 4 50 Contacting Dell For customers in the United States call 800 WWW DELL 800 999 3355 Note If you do not have an active Internet connection you can find contact information about your purchase invoice packing slip bill or Dell product catalog iii Dell provides online and telephone based support and service options Service availability varies by country and product and some services might not be available in your area To contact Dell for sales technical support or customer service issues follow the steps that are l
181. e the move Chapter 5 Operations 5 41 Source Destination Volume Serial Volume Serial c Slot 15 1 Drive 1 1 A Slot 19 1 STX370L3 Prive 2 2 fe Station 1 Io Station 2 Io Station 3 Slot 1 fi Slot 2 1 Mave gt Slot te Slot 4 1 Slot 5 1 Slot 6 1 Slot 7 1 Slot 8 1 C e 2 amp C 3 B 2 amp Cc amp a7 7ug072 padatan cleaning slot Figure 5 32 Manage Library Move Media page The following elements appear in the Source and Destination screens Element In the Source screen this identifies the library element that contains a cartridge In the Destination screen this identifies the library element that is empty and can receive a cartridge Volume Serial In the Source screen this element displays the serial number of the cartridge In the Destination screen this element contains no information Manage Library Perform Inventory This page allows the library to be re scanned to determine the current media inventory see TTTTTTTnTnTnTnTnTnTnTnTnTnTnnnTnTTTTTTTTTE Rescan Figure 5 33 Manage Library Perform Inventory page a77ug076 Manage Library Release Magazine This page allows the user to release the right or left magazine from the library eS Magazine Right z Release Figure 5 34 Manage Library Release Magazine page Note To manually release a magazine see Releasing the Magazines Manually on
182. eated each time the system boots up One example file that can be used for storing the commands is etc re local Note that configuring additional devices on a server or a storage area network SAN can cause the devices to be reordered which requires administrators to modify the commands If the Fibre Channel adapter supports Persistent Bindings or an equivalent function it can be enabled to reduce the chance of devices being reordered upon discovery Note This procedure must be run each time the server is booted Also if backup application services are running for example they automatically start when the OS loads they must be disabled and re enabled after the above procedure The other way to enable LUN support is to recompile the kernel and enable LUN scanning in the Adaptec driver but it requires advanced knowledge of Linux and will not be covered here However it will allow the server to always boot and see the device without any manual procedures Red Hat Enterprise Linux RHEL doesn t automatically probe all LUNs on SCSI devices The symptom shows LUN 0 which would be the drive but not the loader 1 Type cat proc scsi scsi Attached devices Host scsi0 Channel 00 Id 06 Lun 00 Vendor IBM Model ULT3580 HH3 Rev 88M3 Type Sequential Access ANSI SCSI revision 03 2 You will need to add the following to etc modules conf options scsi_mod max_scsi_luns 255 Note In RHEL 4 it is max_luns 255 3 Once that
183. ecurity feature the User Interaction mode is restricted to Login and Monitor menu items until a user logs in with a correct password Operator Control Panel Philosophy Operator Control Panel operation must obey some basic rules These rules of operation constitute a philosophy e Any operational conflict between commands received over the host interface or the Web User Interface and those entered via the Operator Control Panel will be avoided with a reservation mechanism on a first come first served basis Any reservation by the Operator Control Panel is canceled by an Operator Control Panel logout or a timeout which cancels the User Interaction Mode Library firmware will not allow a user to select an impossible request Those situations will include but are not limited to Moving a cartridge from any source to a full slot Moving a cartridge from an empty slot Loading a cartridge from any source to a full drive Unloading a cartridge from an empty drive Any error detected by the library or drive controller and not recoverable through predetermined firmware algorithms will be considered as fatal An error code will be displayed on the Operator Control Panel display and the error LED will 2 1 become illuminated The error code remains on the Operator Control Panel until a push button is pressed which causes the Operator Control Panel to return to the Home Screen e Numeric error codes are only used for unrecoverab
184. ems on page 7 9 Remove the cartridge from the I O Station if needed then close the I O Station Press Cancel to exit the screen e Drive Power use this item to turn drive power ON and OFF Note When configuration changes of a disabled drive are made from the Operator Control Panel OCP the drive powers ON after committing Chapter 5 Operations 5 31 changes When configuration changes of a disabled drive are made from the Web Interface RMU the drive does not power ON after committing changes Service Display Contrast Service Display Contrast The following display contrast settings are available in this menu e The numbers 1 through 10 will display with 10 being the lightest shade and 1 being the brightest a77ugi70 Figure 5 25 Service Display Contrast menu Service Telnet Service Port The Telnet Service Port menu item is to be used under the direction of Dell Technical Support Web User Interface Menus Note Depending on the version of library firmware there may be differences between the Menu description in this document and the web user interface menus on your library The following menus are available on the Web User Interface Table 5 5 Web User Interface Menus B Monitor Library Library Identity Drive Identity Library Status Drive Status Inventory B Manage Library Move Media Perform Inventory Release Magazine B Configure Library General Logical Libraries Path Fai
185. en continue with the procedure Removal and Replacement 1 Power OFF the library by pressing and holding the power button at the front of the library for 4 seconds 2 Disconnect the power cord from the electrical source then from the power supply or supplies at the back of the library 3 Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card 4 Grasp the two thumbscrews and pull the defective Library Controller Card out of the library i LAN Dim i Bans VAC ON i before s a e laca in 5 ont am On a oe a66mi097 Figure 10 11 A Library Controller Card being removed from the library 5 Remove the packaging from the replacement Library Controller Card 6 Grasp the two thumbscrews and push the replacement Library Controller Card into the library 7 Tighten the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card 8 Connect the power cord to the power supply or supplies at the back of the library then to the electrical source 9 Power ON the library using the power button on the front panel 10 After power is restored to the Library Controller Card the library will automatically restore the VPD on the new Library Controller Card from the Library Enclosure If a VPD Selection message is displayed in the Operator Control Panel see the Read Me before Continuing section earlier in this procedure to determine how to respond to the message 11 Upe grade librar firmware and dr
186. es Cables Terminator Important Before replacing any CRU and after finding the problem and performing any listed_actions listed in the Troubleshooting Table below be sure to review the Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems on to help confirm the failing CRU The following table is the starting point for all service issues Find the reason which closest resembles the problem you are experiencing and perform the listed action If you are unable to correct the problem create a prioritized list of replacement parts required Select only one CRU at a time starting with the most likely based on the Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems on page 7 7 and or the error code listing After correcting the problem run Library Verify Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify to ensure that all library components are functioning properly before resuming normal library operations Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table W OOO INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION Unable to configure 3 logical The 2 half height drives must be in drive positions 1 and 2 the lowest drive libraries with 3 drives 2 half positions in the library and the full height drive must be in the remaining drive height drives and 1 full height position For additional information refer to drive installed Installation and Configuration 4 Refer to Installation Problems on pa ge 7 6 POWER Library does not power ON 1 Perform Isolating a Power Su
187. es store Configuration from File Browse roWwSe Restore 500 Tie allt r a 7ug079 Figure 5 50 Configure Library Save Restore page Service Library Menu Some Service Library functions will post a warning message stating that the library should be taken offline from the host before performing any Service functions It is up to the operator to ensure that it is taken offline at the host Before performing any service functions ensure the host is not performing any data writing or retrieval Service Library Clean Drive If the library is not configured for Auto Clean this page allows the user to manually clean the tape drive A drive cleaning is initiated only after the library or drive posted a status message that indicates Cleaning Required To manually complete a drive cleaning complete the following steps 1 Select a cleaning cartridge that is listed in the Slot field 2 Select a drive that is listed in the Drive field 3 Click Clean See Figure 5 53 on page 5 59 Note Enabling the Auto Clean function is recommended on the library With the Auto Clean function enabled drive cleaning occurs automatically The only time Auto Cleaning is disabled is when your Backup Application requires that it has control Drives that do not require a cleaning are labeled with No Cleaning Required See Figure 5 51 on page 5 59 5 58 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Clean Drive Slot
188. esses that are discovered by the network router The addresses display only when DHCP is OFF and Stateless auto configuration is ON Gateway The Gateway address of the library Ethernet The speed of the ethernet interface Monitor Drive This menu item displays drive information and settings 5 12 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Identity Firmware Rev Vendor ID Product ID Topology A SCSI ID SCSI Drive Speed A A Address A SAS Drive Fibre Channel Drive Version Fibre Channel Drive Hached Ultrium 3 and 4 half high SAS drive sleds and Ultrium 4 Address B Fibre Channel drive sled may be listed as Version 2 SAS Drive a77ug035 Figure 5 5 Monitor Drive menu Important Encryption is not supported on Gen3 drives or SCSI drives With Gen3 or SCSI drives Encryption will not appear in the OCP menu Chapter 5 Operations 5 13 Under Status and Drive n are the following items e Status the current status of the drive e Activity the current action being performed by the drive e Source the serial number of the cartridge currently in the drive e Encryption indicates the type of data encryption currently set for the selected drive will not appear on Gen3 or SCSI drives e Topology the topology chosen for a fibre library see Fibre Channel Interface on page 3 10 e Speed indicates the speed of the fibre channel fibre library e L
189. ests menu Service Service menu Service Display Contrast menu The 4U library Monitor Library Library Identity page The 4U library Monitor libra Drive Identity page showing one Ultrium 3 SAS half height V2 drive 1 and one Ultrium 4 SAS half height drive 2 The 4U library Monitor Library Library Status page The 4U library Monitor Library Drive Status page The 2U library Monitor tome Inventory page The 4U library Monitor Library Inventory page Right Magazines Manage Library Move Media nape Manage Library Perform Inventory page Manage Library Release Magazine page The 4U library Configure Library General and Extended page The 4U library Configure Library Logical Libraries page The 4U library Configure Library Path Failover page Path Failover license ceiaio n Feature Activation Key screen Configure Library Encryption Feature configuration screen The Configure Library Drives pape a a 2U library The Configure bea Drives page fore a 4U library Configure Library Network Page Warning Screen Configure Library User Access page The Configure Library Date amp Time page Configure Library Logs amp Traces page Configure Library Event Notification page Configure Library SNMP page Configure Library Save Restore page No Cleaning Required No cleaning cartridge in library Service Library Clean Drive page Service Library View Logs page Service Library View Drive
190. etwork O ao Og O k g e Network Configure gt Network igure Configure Library gt Configure configuration Network on Network Library Network change 5 ge Og O T g Network Monitor gt Library gt Network itor Configure Library gt Configure configuration Library on Network Library Network view 5 ge IQ J O a g Path Failover Configure gt Control Path i i Configure Library gt Path enter activation Failover Failover key Restart library Not available with this Service Library gt Reboot Service Library interface Reboot on page SCSI Inquiry Monitor gt Drive gt Identity itor Monitor Library gt Drive string drive i Identity Serial Number Monitor gt Drive gt Identity itor Monitor Library gt Drive drive i Identity Serial Number Monitor gt Library gt Identity itor Monitor Library gt Library library Library onl Identity Slots number Monitor gt Library gt Identity itor System Status screen active 5 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Information Activity Slots number empty Slots reassign number of active reserving SNMP modify settings Telnet Service Port activate Time elapsed since power ON Operator Control Panel access PIN enable disable Web User Interface
191. f Failed Logins Before Password Is Locked Maximum Number Of Days Before Password Must Be Changed t Refresh Submit a77ug08 amp 2 Figure 5 45 Configure Library User Access page The following elements are displayed on the User Access page Roles e Check the Disable Superuser check box if you do not want Superuser to be listed on the Role listbox that is prohibits Superuser login 5 52 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Check the Disable User check box if you do not want User to be listed on the Role listbox that is prohibits User login Clear the check box to allow Superuser or User login Passwords Role The name that is associated with the chosen Access Level Choose from User Superuser Admin or Service Note Admin can select User Superuser and Admin roles Service can select User Superuser Admin and Service roles New Password Enter Up To Twenty Characters Enter a new password to be associated with the Access Level Name Repeat Password Reenter the new password for verification purposes Support Contact Support Name The name of the individual within your company to contact for Web User Interface or library support Note Only one support person is configured for the entire tape library The support person might or might not be one of the user superuser or admin account holders Support Phone The phone number of the individual within your company
192. f time in recovery to complete initialization perform an inventory or executing a cartridge movement within the library and after finding the magazine cell fiducials to be present with no visible damage and correctly installed suspect the sensor emitter on the accessor mechanism to be inoperable Execute a Library System Test See Service Library Perform Diagnostics on page 5 62 for the web or Service Run Tests on page 5 30 for the OCP If the problem is persistent contact Dell technical support Isolating Web User Interface Problems If the Web User Interface is not functioning at all or if it is intermittently functioning review the following steps to ensure that it is properly configured or to help determine which CRU or part needs to be replaced The complete Web User Interface electronics reside on the library controller card CRU 1 Ensure that the ethernet cable is securely plugged in the rear of the library at the ethernet port See on the Rear Panel on page 1 3 Ensure that the correct IP Netmask and Gateway addresses are keyed into the network parameters From the Operator Control Panel navigate to Configure gt Network Ensure that the correct IP address is being used on the web browser If you get a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User Interface you can install the certificate or allow an exception depending on the internet browser you are using Even though with some br
193. figuration If changes were made to the Network settings a pop up menu will display the option to reboot the library or cancel the reboot If you select CANCEL in the pop up menu you will need to power cycle the library for the network changes to be applied If CANCEL is highlighted press the SELECT button to cancel all of your entries and return to the Configure menu Logging on to the Web User Interface To complete the configuration of your library using the Web User Interface follow the steps below 1 On your host computer open an Internet browser 2 In the browser address field enter your library s IP Address a For DHCP and or Stateless Autoconfig use the Operator Control Panel to determine the IP Address assigned to your library Navigate to Monitor gt Library gt Network Scroll down to the library address information and make note of the address Enter the IP Address in your internet browser address field to access your library with the Web User Interface The library address information may include one or more of the following address types IP Address IPv4 static or DHCP e Static IPv6 Address e Link Local IPv6 Address e Assigned IPv6 address DHCP or Stateless Autoconfig For IPv4 enter your library s IP Address using the 0 0 0 0 format four octets For IPv6 enter your library s IP Address using the following format http 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 For Dual Stack IPv4 IPv6 enter your library s IP A
194. figure Chapter 5 Operations on page 5 1 Save Restore on page 5 26 Choosing Your Configuration Method If you choose to use the factory defaults for your library configuration go to Using Factory Defaults as Your Configuration Write down all library configuration settings on the Appendix G Librar Configuration Form on page G 1 for future reference Using Factory Defaults as Your Configuration The table below shows the main default library settings If you wish to use the defaults no other changes need to be made before using your library I O Slots Enabled DHCP Enabled Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 19 For a full list of factory defaults see Configure Save Restore on page 5 26 Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface To configure your library using the Web User Interface complete the following procedures 1 Establishing Remote Access to Your Library 2 3 ing 4 si 2 2 e 4 25 6 7 8 ing 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 i o e 16 17 Logging out of the Web User Interface on page 2 8 18 Setting the Operator Control Panel Access PIN using the Operator Contro Panel on page 5 25 Establishing Remote Access to Your Library Static library network settings must be entered using the Operator Control Panel before the library can be accessed remotely using the Web User Interface If your system i
195. firmware there may be differences between the Menu Tree description in this document and the OCP Menu Tree on your library Monitor Menu The Monitor menu contains information about the following sub menu items e Library e Drive e Inventory Monitor Library This menu item displays current library information and settings 5 10 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide IP Stack IP Stack ia ae DHCP DHCP l ON OFF ON OFF On Time Vendor ID IP Address Stateless autoconfig Slots Empty Product ID Netmask Prefix Length Active Slots Static IPv6 I O Station WWNN Address Gateway Date Time Lib x Mode Link Local IPv6 Address Note x number of logical libraries Ethernet Assigned IPv6 1 4 partitions An example with a Address library with 4 partitions Note This will display Lib 1 Mode when Stateless Auto Lib 2 Mode Config is enabled Lib 3 Mode Lib 4 Mode IPv6 Gateway Ethernet a77ug051 Figure 5 4 Monitor Library menu Under Monitor gt Library are the following items e Status Chapter 5 Operations 5 11 Identity Error Log Network Under Monitor gt Library gt Status are the following items Status Status of the library Act Cart The serial number of the cartridge currently active in the library On Time The amount of time the library is powered ON Slots Empty The number of empty slots in the library total number of active slots in the lib
196. g the library to the rack one screw on each side of the library 5 Place the defective library on a clean and sturdy work surface 6 Proceed to Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement Library Enclosure Unpacking and Preparing the Replacement Library Enclosure Before installing the replacement library enclosure it is important to verify that the enclosure is functioning properly 1 Unpack the replacement library enclosure and place it on a sturdy and clean work surface near the defective library Save all packaging materials for returning the failing part s to Dell 2 Choose one of the options below for installing the foot pads Important Operating your library on a flat surface without foot pads may damage your library or cause it not to function properly e Rack Mount temporary placement of the foot pads e Desktop permanent placement of the foot pads a For a rack mounted library 1 Lift the replacement library enclosure slightly above the work surface have another person place a foot pad under each corner of the library and on each side of the library halfway between the front and back 2 Gently set the replacement library enclosure on top of the feet Adjust foot pad placement as necessary to stabilize the library Do not permanently attach the foot pads to the library 10 14 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide b For a desktop library 1 Carefully lay the library o
197. ge None is displayed Drive Error If the drive generated an error code it is Code displayed here If the drive did not generate an error No Error is displayed Cooling Fan Displays whether the drive s cooling fan is ON X X X X X X Active checked or OFF Drive Indicates whether the drive is operating X X X X X X Activity Status Chapter 5 Operations 5 37 Table 5 9 Drive Status page elements continued Menu Item Description 2U 4U Port B Indicates whether Port B is logged on or out Status The name that is assigned to the Port on the drive Speed The speed setting of the drive Choices are Auto where the drive automatically negotiates the speed of the drive to match that of the server 1 Gb s 2 Gb s 4 Gb s or 8 Gb s for Fibre Channel 3 Gb s or 6 Gb s for SAS Topology The type of connection to the host The choices are LN port N port and L port The Hashed SAS address is a value that is calculated from the WWID for use on the SAS interface FC AL Loop The loop position number it shows the numeric X ID ID Encryption The following entries show the current encryption Status status for this drive method key path BOP density report Encryption The type of encryption that is enabled on the method drive Key path The path that is used for transferring an encryption key This setting is dependent upon the encryption method selected BOP policy Indicates whet
198. gram kg 1000 grams approximately 2 2 pounds km kilometer 1000 Meters Approximately 5 8 mile L LAN Local area network A computer network within a limited area LCB Library Control Blade LCD See liquid crystal display LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol This allows the library to use login and password information that is stored on a server to grant access to the library functionality LDAPS Secure LDAP over SSL LDI Library Drive Interface LED Light emitting diode library certification In cryptography a certificate that is provided by the library library managed encryption Tape encryption that is controlled by the tape library Linear Tape Open LTO A type of tape storage technology that is developed by the IBM Corporation Hewlett Packard and Quantum LTO technology is an open format technology which means that its users have multiple sources of I 10 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide product and media The open nature of LTO technology enables compatibility between different vendors offerings by ensuring that vendors comply with verification standards The LTO technology is implemented in two formats the Accelis format focuses on fast access the Ultrium format focuses on high capacity The Ultrium format is the preferred format when capacity rather than fast access is the key storage consideration An Ultrium cartridge has a compressed data capacit
199. guration to be reset to the factory defaults Saving and restoring configuration data can be done using the Remote Management Unit RMU and or the Operator Control Panel OCP The feature has been implemented on the RMU and on the OCP but with slightly different functionality Note Configuration files saved with one version of library firmware may not be compatible with other versions of firmware It is recommended to save a configuration file each time the library firmware is upgraded Restore the Chapter 5 Operations 5 57 library using a configuration file that was saved with the same version of firmware currently installed in the library Since the RMU can be accessed remotely its implementation will save restore the configuration data to from a file on the host site When entering commands on the OCP the unit is accessed directly For this reason the OCP implementation will save restore the configuration data to from a USB memory stick that is inserted into the USB connector on the library controller Note Factory defaults must be restored when the library drive is changed from a LTO half height to full height configuration in order for the library to correct the element addressing and drive numbering If a new drive is added to the library configuration a restore factory default is not required Restore Defaults store Factory Defaults Restore Save Restore Configuration Confi tion to Fil ave Configuration ile par
200. gure Library gt Encryption in the left navigation panel Encryption is not supported for this Logical Library Encryption Feature Activation Key a 7ug199 Figure 4 29 Feature Activation Key screen 2 On the Encryption screen enter the Feature Activation Key to make available the library managed encryption options 3 Click Activate to save the key and expand the screen for additional encryption settings Encryption eee a Encryption Setting for Encryption is not supported for this Logical Library oN Logical Library 1 D 5 Ne N Figure 4 30 Configure Library Encryption Activation screen 4 Select Enable SSL for EKM to enable Secure Sockets Layer for the IBM SKLM application 5 Select an Encryption method for each logical library e Without an encryption license key select None or Application Managed Encryption e With an encryption license key select Library Managed Encryption 6 Select an Encryption policy for each logical library e Encrypt All This is the default policy It encrypts all cartridges using the default data keys specified in the key manager This setting applies to all drives in a TL2000 TL4000 logical library 4 28 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Internal Label Selective Encryption Check your tape backup software application documentation to see if this feature is supported e Internal Label Encrypt All Check your tape backup sof
201. harp object water or a chemical to clean the label area Examine the label before applying it to the cartridge Do not use the label if it has voids or smears in the printed characters or bar code a library s inventory operation will take much longer if the bar code label is not readable Remove the label from the label sheet carefully Do not stretch the label or cause the edges to curl Position the label within the recessed label area see J in Figure 6 1 on page 6 1 With light finger pressure smooth the label so that no wrinkles or bubbles exist on its surface Verify that the label is smooth and parallel and has no roll up or roll over The label must be flat to within 0 5 mm 0 02 in over the length of the label and have no folds missing pieces or smudges Do not place other machine readable labels on other surfaces of the cartridge They may interfere with the ability of the drive to load the cartridge Write Protect Switch The position of the write protect switch on the tape cartridge see J determines whether you can write to the tape If the switch is set to A The locked position solid red data cannot be written to the tape The unlocked position black void data can be written to the tape If possible use your server s application software to write protect your cartridges rather than manually setting the write protect switch This allows the server s software to identify a cartridge that no longer
202. he 32U position and above Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack cabinet Ensure that there are no empty U levels between devices that are installed in the rack cabinet below the 32U level e If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets detach the rack cabinet from the suite e Inspect the route that you plan to take to eliminate potential hazards e Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the loaded rack cabinet Refer to the documentation that comes with your rack cabinet for the weight of a loaded rack cabinet e Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2032 mm 30 x 80 in e Ensure that all devices shelves drawers doors and cables are secure e Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position e Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket that is installed on the rack cabinet during movement e Do not use a ramp that is inclined at more than 10 degrees e When the rack cabinet is in the new location Lower the four leveling pads Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet repopulate the rack cabinet from the lowest position to the highest position e If a long distance relocation is required restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it Pack the rack cabinet in the original packaging mate
203. he TL2000 TL4000 Library supports LTO 3 tape drives with these interfaces Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI SAS Fibre Channel interface FC LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 drives are Serial Attached SCSI interface SAS and Fibre Channel FC only Front Panel 8 a 7ug239 Figure 1 1 Front panel of a 2U library 1 1 a77ug240 8 Figure 1 2 Front panel of a 4U library Table 1 1 below contains front panel descriptions for both the 2U library in Figure 1 1 on page 1 1jand the 4U library in Table 1 1 2U library and 4U library front panel descriptions Number mem Descipfon OOS Power button Pressing this button powers ON the library Pressing and holding this button for 4 seconds will power OFF the unit soft power down No power switch or button can be found on the back panel of the library Front panel LEDs left to right Ready Activity Green LED It is illuminated any time the unit is powered ON and able to function It should blink whenever there is library or drive activity or when the library is in the process of powering up Clean Drive Amber LED It is illuminated when the drive needs to be cleaned The LED will be turned OFF after the drive is cleaned successfully Attention Amber LED It is illuminated when there has been a failure that indicates a piece of media is incompatible with the drive damaged marginal or invalid It will be cleared when all invalid cartridges have
204. he power supply seems to be delivering power to the library Operator Control Panel and front panel LED s may be functioning however air does not flow from the power supply cooling fan grill on the rear of the library replace the power supply refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 10 If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library Operator Control Panel and front panel LED s may be functioning and air is flowing from the power supply cooling fan grill on the rear of the library observe the Green LED lowest of the three If it is lit the power supply is OK Note If your library has 04 level redundant power supplies see label on top of power supply it is normal for the one in Standby mode to turn its Green LED off You can test this power supply by pulling the power connector from the other Active power supply The power supply that was in Standby mode will now become Active and its Green LED should light If it doesn t replace it refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 10 n page 10 10 If your library has 05 level redundant power supplies the Green LED will be ON on both power supplies If both Green LEDs are not ON replace the failed power supply refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 10 ge 10 10 If the Green LED is not lit and it is the only one in the Library replace it refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 10
205. her the Beginning of Partition BOP policy is enabled or disabled If encryption is enabled the policy type might display depending on the encryption method used Policy types include Internal label select Internal label always Enabled or Disabled Other type designations might display if Advanced Encryption Settings are set Engineering Support use only Density LTO drives do not support settings changes to X reporting report various densities thus LTO drives always report Other Hashed SAS address These features are not supported on Gen3 SAS drive types or any SCSI drive types 5 38 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Drive 2 Status At 13 32 22 Library Time Status oO Idle Cartridge In Drive N A Drive Error Code No Error Cooling Fan Active Drive Activity Ready Port A Status Not ready not connected Speed Hashed SAS 000000 address Encryption Status Encryption Disabled method Key path Default by method BOP policy Disabled Density reporting Other Drive 3 Status At 13 32 22 Library Time Status idle Cartridge In Drive N A Drive Error Code No Error Cooling Fan Active Drive Activity Idle Port A Status No light detected a77ug093 Refresh Figure 5 29 The 4U library Monitor Library Drive Status page Term Definitions e BOP Beginning of Partition BOP Beginning of Partition is a SCSI term which in a single part
206. ht magazine is Present or Not X Present X 2 Left Magazine This displays whether the upper left magazine is Present or Not Present 2 Right Magazine This displays whether the upper right magazine is Present or Not o a Present Library Status At 10 07 25 Library Time Status amp Ready Cartridge In Transport None Number Of Mowes 145 Total Power On Time 42d 17h 25min Accessor Status Ready 1 Left Magazine Present 1 Right Magazine Present 2 Left Magazine Present 2 Right Magazine Present a77ug092 Figure 5 28 The 4U library Monitor Library Library Status page Monitor Library Drive Status This page provides the following detailed dynamic information about the drive in the library No changes can be made from here The displayed information varies depending on the library model and drive type SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel Table 5 5 lists all available elements on the Drive Status page An X indicates that the element displays for the specified drive type Table 5 9 Drive Status page elements Menu Item Description 2U a 4U The status of the drive A check mark indicates that the drive is operating properly An exclamation point indicates that the drive is operating but has a problem An X indicates that the drive is not operational because of a serious problem Cartridge in The serial number of the cartridge currently in Drive the drive If the drive does not contain a cartrid
207. ialization starts all LEDs are extinguished and the Ready Activity LED flashes at a rate of approximately one second per cycle When the mechanical initialization is complete the Ready Activity LED will stop flashing and be constantly illuminated If a library failure occurs the Ready Activity LED will turn OFF and the Error LED illuminates The Operator Control Panel will also display an appropriate error code to help identify the failure 2 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide The following are additional operational details of LEDs e The Ready Activity LED is illuminated any time the unit is powered ON and functional The Ready Activity LED blinks whenever there is library or drive activity This LED will also blink when the unit is OFFLINE e The Clean LED is illuminated when either a cleaning requested or a cleaning required flag has been issued by the drive The LED is turned off after a successful drive cleaning operation e The Attention LED indicates one of the following conditions Bad media 1 Go to Monitor gt Inventory to locate the defective cartridge Move the defective cartridge to the I O Station Operator Control Panel Control gt Move Cartridges Open the I O Station to remove the defective cartridge Operator Control Panel Control gt Open I O Drive sled issues Do one of the following Install a drive sled see Removing Installing Adding a T
208. ice gt Drive Power and running POST e Refer to the error code displayed on the Operator Control Panel if the drive resets and POST fails e Retry the encryption operation if the drive reset and POST complete without errors Check the media e Ensure the correct media is being used Data encryption is supported with LTO Ultrium 4 5 and 6 Data and WORM Cartridges only Retry the encryption operation with the tape cartridge in another encryption enabled drive Replace the media if the problem repeats with the same tape cartridge in multiple drives If the problem occurred while the tape drive was running POST or diagnostics replace the drive The error code clears with the first attempted write read after the encryption key is changed or when the drive is placed in maintenance mode Check the IBM SKLM application s error logs device driver logs tape library error logs and tape drive error logs for entries that are related to encryption See Service Library View Logs on page 5 59 Service Library View Drive Logs on page 5 60 JChapter 8 Error codes on page 8 1 Jand Drive Sense Data on page available If the test fails a problem could exist with the IP address the Ethernet cable or the key management server Perform the following Check the Ethernet connection between the library and the key management server Check the TCP IP configuration of the library and the server Check that the ke
209. ied cartridges Left magazines of a 4U Library Chapter 5 Operations 5 15 Note Left magazine of a 2U Library has a 1 slot I O Station The black boxes are inventoried cartridges Press the up and down keys to scroll Note that this magazine has a 3 slot I O Station These slots can be changed to storage slots if needed See Configuring I O Stations and Reserving Slots on page 5 67 ge 5 67 Press SELECT to display all empty slots and cartridge serial numbers in the associated magazine _ gt Lower Left wa DT0632L4 LTO4 EC 3 3FB114L4 LTO4 ED 4 Empty 5 Empty Idle Rand a77ug236 Figure 5 8 Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine Table 5 3 Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine Magazine slot number B Media type generation of cartridge Cartridge volume serial number Encryption abbreviation for LTO4 cartridges or Empty meaning no cartridge currently residing in slot e EC encryption capable The LTO 4 cartridge does not contain encrypted data e ED encrypted data The LTO 4 cartridge does contain encrypted data Control Menu The Control Menu contains the following items e Open I O Station e Move Cartridges e Magazine e Re Inventory Control Open I O Station Use this menu item to open the I O station Control Open I O Station a 7ug052 Figure 5 9 Control I O station menu 5 16 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000
210. in Figure 4 18 There are 6 covers for each side for a total of 12 Attaching the Library to a Server The 2U library and the 4U library can be attached to servers using the following interfaces e SCSI LVD Ultra 160 e Fibre Channel e Serial Attached SCSI SAS Connecting the Host Interface Cable To connect the host interface cables to the library 1 It is recommended that you shut down and turn OFF the associated server Turn OFF all attached devices Remove the power cables from the server and all attached accessories Important Failure to remove the power cords from these devices before connecting the host interface cable could result in damage to the library 2 For a SCSI library attach one end of the host interface cable to one of the connectors on the back panel of the library see in Figure 4 19 on page 4 17 For a Fibre Channel library attach one end of the host interface cable to the connector on the back panel of the library see J in Figure 4 20 on page 4 17 For a Serial Attached SCSI SAS connected library attach the host end of the SAS cable to the SAS HBA see J in Figure 4 21 on page 4 17 Full high drives will have dual SAS connectors Half high drives will have one SAS 4 16 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide connector Unused SAS connectors do not need to be terminated ap mE EN A p n Ph i z e n Qed ott z a7 7ug017
211. inger Holes on back cide f 4U J library I O station 2U Library Control Keys 4U Library Control Keys Operator Control Panel Menu Tree Monitor Library menu Monitor Drive menu Example of a 4U Monitor inventory menu Overview of inventoried cartridges Left magazines of a 4U Library Detailed information on a residing in a magazine Control I O station menu Control Move Cartridges menu Control Magazine menu Control Re Inventory menu Configure Logical Libraries menu 4 17 4 17 4 17 4 18 4 23 4 25 4 25 4 26 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 28 4 30 4 30 4 32 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 34 4 35 4 39 4 39 4 40 4 40 4 41 4 41 5 16 5 16 5 17 lt D10 5 18 5 19 vii 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 3 29 5 30 JL 5 32 5 33 5 34 I 00 3 30 5 37 5 38 3 99 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 43 5 44 5 45 5 46 5 47 5 48 5 49 5 50 5 51 5 52 5 53 5 54 5 55 5 56 5 57 viii Configure Configure Library menu Drive menu Configure Network menu Configure Set Access PIN menu Pound sign shows accessible menus when access PIN is enabled but before it is entered Configure Save Restores menu Configure Set Date and Time menu Configure Path Failover Service Library Verify menu Service Run T
212. ink indicates the status of the fibre channel fibre library e Hashed Address an address calculated from the WWID Under Identity and Drive n are the following items e Firmware Rev the current level of drive firmware e Vendor ID Dell e Product ID drive inquiry string e Serial Number the drive serial number e Version Ultrium 3 and 4 half high SAS drives and Ultrium 4 Fibre Channel drives may be listed as Version 2 e SCSI ID the unique identifier assigned to a SCSI drive e WWNN the fibre channel drive s World Wide Node Name e Topology the topology chosen for the fibre channel drive e Speed indicates the speed of the fibre channel tape drive e Loop ID unique identifier assigned to a fibre channel tape drive e PID port identification SAS only Monitor Inventory This menu item displays the current library inventory of a 4U library 5 14 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Inventory Magazines Drive status Upper Left Graphic of left Graphic of right magazine magazine Figure 5 6 Example of a 4U Monitor Inventory menu Upper Right a 7ug036 Note 2U has a single right side magazine Under Magazine choose one of the following to see a graphical representation of the cartridge magazine s Slots containing cartridges will be highlighted Magazines gt Lower Left Idle Rand a77ug166 Figure 5 7 Overview of inventor
213. ion or in the dedicated cleaning cartridge slot See 2U Library I O Slot Stora Slots and Drive Slot Element Addresses and Physical Locations on e A llor 4U Library I O Slots Storage Slots and Drive Slots Element Addresses and Physical Locations on page A 2 for determining slot location 4 42 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 5 Put magazines back into the library The library will automatically start up and perform an inventory check Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge Important Cleaning cartridges placed in the library must be labeled with the correct bar code labels For additional information see Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media on page 6 1 Note Earlier versions of the 4U library contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot DCS This DCS can be retained and is supported by future library firmware updates However library firmware later than 3 90 will allow removal of the DCS thus enabling this slot to be used as a storage slot Once the DCS is removed the Auto Clean cleaning cartridge slot must be configured as described below If the DCS has been removed it can only be reinstated by restoring factory default settings To remove the DCS perform the following procedure using the Operator Control Panel OCP OCP gt Configure gt Library Settings gt General gt Remove DCS gt No Yes gt Save The following criteria must be followed for Auto Clean to function 1 A sto
214. isted 1 2 Visit http support dell com Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country Region menu at the bottom of the page Click Contact Us on the left side of the page Select the appropriate service or support link that is based on your need Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you iV Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Contents Read this first 4 Minimum firmware levels for common library features a s amp a eee e es mh amp ad Contacting Dell 4 lt 4 4 a Figures 1 ee we ew we ee ee VI Tables 1 we we we ee Xl Safety and environmental notices xiii Danger and caution notices Xi Laser Safety and Compliance gt s Body Performing the safety inspection precede s a KIV Rack safety s s s a s amp sog s ea X Preface a a aa XVII Chapter 1 Product silane 1 1 Front Panel L 1 Rear Panel amp 4 aaa amp Je3 Bar Code Reader 15 Encryption pane gt ee e yO Supported Internet Protocols 2 6 amp A amp eae SNMP Messaging 2 ww 17 SNMP Traps 1 7 Maximum Library Storage Capacity ond Data Transfer Rate Se 6 amp eles Ultrium Tape Drives 2 2 2 19 Speed Matching 1 10 Channel Calibration
215. it s in the first octet of your library s Netmask address c Press the SELECT button to highlight the digit s in the next octet of your library s Netmask address 29 5 p Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 21 d After entering the digits for the last octet of your Netmask address press the SELECT button to apply your entries 8 Press the DOWN button to select Gateway For IPv4 enter only an IPv4 Gateway address For IPv6 enter only an IPv6 Gateway address For IPv4 amp IPv6 enter a Gateway address for both IPv4 and IPv6 a b Press the SELECT button to highlight the Gateway field Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digit s in the first octet of your library s Gateway address Press the SELECT button to highlight the digit s in the next octet of your library s Gateway address After entering the digits for the last octet in your Gateway address press the SELECT button to apply your entries 9 Press the DOWN button to select Ethernet a b C d Press the DOWN button to highlight the Ethernet field Press the SELECT button to highlight the Ethernet setting Press the DOWN button to select a new setting Press the SELECT button to apply the new setting 10 Press the DOWN button to highlight SAVE Press the DOWN again to highlight CANCEL Continue to press the DOWN button to switch between SAVE and CANCEL If SAVE is highlighted press the SELECT button to apply your new con
216. ition format is the same as beginning of tape It means that policy is determined on writes at LB zero Appending to a tape or overwriting at a non zero LB does not change the policy already in use for that tape e Key Path The avenue where key resolution is completed This avenue is left to be determined by method and is the same but can be set differently for some hybrid modes e Density Reporting Affects host reporting of density and is included to support legacy needs for transparency The default of not masking encrypted densities means that the host can see a different density code for encrypted vs non encrypted tapes x72 enc as opposed to x52 non enc This feature masks this code so the drive reports the primary density only Normally this feature is set to the drive default which is to show encr density Note LTO drives do not support setting or reporting various densities thus LTO drives always report OxFE Other Monitor Library Inventory This page provides detailed information about the tape inventory in the library A summary of each magazine is shown To get detailed information about the cartridges that reside in a magazine click on the button This will expand the display for the magazine To determine whether a cartridge is encrypted refer to the Comments column in the Cartridge Details screen See Figure 5 31 on page 5 41 Chapter 5 Operations 5 39 Drive Inventory a a ee Magazine Inventory I
217. ive data compression status Drive Fibre Worldwide Node Name Drive Hashed SAS Address Drive Interface type Drive SCSI Inquiry string Drive turn power ON OFF Drive activity current Drive fan status Service gt Display Contrast Not available with this interface Configure gt Drive gt Drive Interface Configure gt Drive gt Drive Interface Service gt Service gt Clean Drive Monitor gt Drive gt Identity Monitor gt Drive gt Status Not available with this interface Monitor gt Drive gt Identity gt Drive n WWNN Not available with this interface Configure gt Drive gt Drive Interface Monitor gt Drive gt Identity Service gt Service gt Drive Power Monitor gt Drive gt Status gt Drive n Activity Not available with this interface Menu Navigation Shortcuts Operator Control Panel Web User Interface For More Info Not available with this interface Configure Library gt Network Configure Library gt Drives Configure Library gt Drives Service Library gt Clean Drive Monitor Library gt Drive Identity Monitor Library gt Drive Status Monitor Library gt Drive Identity gt Data Compression Monitor Library gt Drive Identity Monitor Library gt Drive Status Monitor Library gt Drive Identity Monitor Library gt Drive Identity Configure Library gt Drive Monitor Library gt Drive Sta
218. ive Sense Data Appendix D marg LUN opps in Linux Red Hat Enterprise nee n Enabling LUN Support in Netware Appendix E Notes on IPv6 Compatibility with Windows 2003 XP and 2008 Vista Notes on IPv6 Compatibility with TN Appendix F SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps Appendix G seein i sei Form Appendix H Accessibility Glossary Index vi Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 10 13 10 14 10 16 10 18 10 20 10 22 10 25 10 27 10 27 A 1 A 2 A 3 B 1 B 1 B 3 C 1 C 1 C 7 E 1 E 2 _ F 1 Figures 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 6 1 7 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 Front panel of a 2U library 1 1 Front panel of a 4U library 12 Rear panel drive sled only of a half height Fibre Channel drive 1 3 Rear panel of a 4U library with full height Fibre Channel drive and half E SAS drives d Rear panel of a 2U library with a full height dual port SAS drive 14 Library drive sled without ESD lt springs SCSI sled shown 1 10 Library drive sled with ESD springs 1 SAS sled shown a 4 1 10 Power ON screens how ee ee Web User Interface login pape TEn 2U library System Status
219. ive ere to the latest version See 12 Run the Library Verify test refer to E Library Verify on page 5 29 Note Use care when selecting the appropriate VPD to restore from to An error in selection here could cause a long downtime 13 Package the failed Library Controller Card in the same packaging in which the new control board was shipped to you and return to Dell 10 12 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Replacing Cartridge Magazines To replace a cartridge magazine refer to one of the following procedures e Using the Web User Interface refer to Manage Library Release Magazine on page 5 22 ge 5 42 e Using the Operator Control Panel refer to Control Magazine on page 5 17 e If your library can not be powered ON refer to Releasing the Magazines Manually on page 9 1 Replacing the Library Enclosure This procedure is necessary when the library enclosure accessor or display fails These components are contained within the replacement library enclosure Important Refer to the Installation Instructions that are included with the new replacement library enclosure Follow the procedures included in this document for replacing the Library Enclosure only if Installation Instructions are not included with the new replacement library enclosure The replacement library enclosure includes cartridge magazines a power supply a Library Controller Card and a packe
220. k one of the following e Refresh to cancel the changes made to the screen e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Configure Library SNMP This page shows the current SNMP configuration of the library and allows modification to the configuration When a change is requested a box checks to confirm the changes Click SNMP in the left navigation pane to display the SNMP page Enabled A paoe SNMP DESTINATIONS EE isv3 storage tucson ibm com Version SNMPv1 V IPv4 address or Host name and domain ee 0 0 0 0 Version SNMPv1 V IPv4 address or Host name and domain a 0 0 0 0 version SNMPvi V IPv4 address or Host name and domain Audit Logging SNMP V3 SECURITY User Name linitial Authentication Authentication Password Hels bok Privacy DES Vv a 7ug278 Figure 5 49 Configure Library SNMP page Note If SNMP is not enabled cleared all SNMP fields are disabled 5 56 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide SNMP e Enabled Check this box to have SNMP traps sent to an SNMP Management console e Community Name An SNMP community name is a text string that acts as a password to authenticate messages that are sent between the SNMP remote management application and the library Enter your preferred name or leave as public SNMP DESTINATIONS Target 1 IP Address If SNMP traps are enabled enter an IP address where SNMP traps are sen
221. ken offline by phoning the host operator or other means of communication Before performing any service functions ensure the host is not performing any data writing or retrieval The Service Menu contains the following items e Library Verify an overall library diagnostic e Run Tests other library diagnostics e Service diagnostics and procedures for servicing the drive e Display Contrast setting the display from light to dark e Telnet Service Port Service Library Verify This is an overall diagnostic that exercises all library components To run the Library Verify test complete the following procedure Chapter 5 Operations 5 29 Service Library Verify a 77ug047 Figure 5 22 Service Library Verify menu 1 On the Operator Control Panel navigate to Service gt Library Verify and start diagnostic e Push the Select key to highlight the drive field Use the Up Down keys to select the drive Push the Select key to complete the selection e Push the Down key to highlight lt Run gt e Push the Select key to execute Library Verify 2 When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I O Station opens insert a blank or scratch data cartridge 3 Close the I O Station by pushing it back into the library 4 While the test is running the Operator Control Panel will display library status If the test PASSES resume normal library operations e If the test FAILS an error code will be displayed Make not
222. le fatal errors otherwise text status messages are displayed Power ON Display When the library powers ON or resets it goes through several internally controlled processes that allow it to get initialized and running These processes are called Power On Self Test POST During the POST the Operator Control Panel displays information that may be meaningless until POST is complete When the POST is finished the library displays the Startup screen then the Home screen The Startup screen is the first screen that appears after powering ON the library It contains the following information e Firmware Rev the current level of library firmware e Drives the total number of drives that the library can support e Magazines the total number of magazines in the library e I O Station the current status of the I O Station While the library is going through its power up cycle you can monitor the state of the library via the OCP however you may not be able to make any configuration changes until the unit has completed its initialization routine Attempts to make changes will be ignored Firmware Rev 120R Drive 1 Magazines 2 I O Station empty idle Random TL4000 Accessor Drive ok Xn a 7ug187 Idle Rand Figure 2 1 Power ON screens Note about the Front Panel LEDs All LEDs are updated during power ON and reset sequences Upon power ON or software reset the library illuminates all LEDs as soon as POST allows When init
223. led while the library is powered ON Important In a 4U library a full height drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1 drive will occupy slot 1 and slot 2 or drive slot 3 drive will occupy slot 3 and slot 4 A full height drive sled should never be installed in drive slot 2 drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3 1 Before installing the new drive sled inspect all connectors on the drive sled Ensure that the connectors are intact free of any foreign objects and have no cracks deformed or bent contacts 2 Extend the black pull out tab E in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 located underneath the library near the lower right corner of the drive sled 3 Slowly insert the new drive sled into the drive slot while supporting the bottom of the drive sled see Figure 10 8 on page 10 7 Ensure that the black tab remains extended J in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 Important Push in on the drive sled handle MJ in Figure 10 6 on page while supporting the bottom of the drive sled until it is properly seated Damage to the connector pins may occur if this procedure is not followed 4 Push the drive sled slowly into the drive slot until the sled seats itself against the back of the library 10 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide a77ug028 Figure 10 8 Pushing the drive sled into the library drive sled without ESD springs shown 5 Tighten the captive thumbscrews RA in Figure 10 6 on page
224. lement redundant power e Line frequency 50 60 Hz Place the library near an AC outlet The AC power cord is the product s main AC disconnect device and must be easily accessible at all times Two separate power sources must be available for redundant power 4 1 Table 4 1 Location criteria continued Air quality The library should be placed in an area with minimal sources of particulate contamination Avoid areas near frequently used doors and walkways stacks of supplies that collect dust printers and smoke filled rooms Excessive dust and debris can damage tapes and tape drives Humidity 15 80 RH non condensing Clearance e Back Minimum of 15 4 cm 6 inches e Front Minimum of 30 8 cm 12 inches e Sides Minimum of 5 08 cm 2 inches Rack requirements Standard 19 inch rack with e 2U 88 90 mm 3 5 in of clearance for a 2U library e 4U 177 8 mm 7 in of clearance for a 4U library Rackmounting the library is optional Unpacking the Library 1 Clear a work surface to unpack the library 2 Open the shipping container and carefully remove the shipping materials from the top of the library Remove the accessory package and set it aside Note Once the drive is unpacked save and store the packaging materials for future moves or shipping 3 Lift the library out of the carton and remove the bag from the library Remove the foam cushion from the back of the library Save the packaging materials for futu
225. leshooting 7 5 Installation Problems Problems encountered during the installation of the library are usually caused by improper SCSI bus configuration application software configuration errors or an incorrectly configured operating system If the application software that you are using is not communicating with the library after installation check the following e Accessor Ship Lock Key Ensure that the Accessor Ship Lock Key on the top cover has been removed before powering on the library Refer to Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock on page 4 4 e Drive SCSI or Loop ID Ensure that the SCSI ID of the Drive or Fibre Channel Loop ID is correct and not the same as other devices that may be on the same bus or loop To determine the SCSI or Loop ID for each SCSI or Fibre Channel drive in your library navigate to Operator Control Panel Monitor gt Drive gt Identity Web User Interface Monitor Library gt Drive Identity To change a drive s ID navigate to Operator Control Panel Configure gt Drive gt Drive Interface Web User Interface Configure Library gt Drives e Host Bus Adapter HBA Compatibility Ensure that the library is compatible with the HBA For best performance the HBA used for this library should be SCSI 3 LVDS Pay particular attention to any steps describing settings of various jumpers and or switches e HBA LUN 0 1 Support A single ID will address both drive and library since
226. lf height drives are installed in a 2U library the library firmware will support partitioning in the same way that the 4U supports partitioning with two full height drives today The first partition will contain the first magazine and the first drive The second partition will contain the second magazine and the second drive The I O station if configured as I O will be shared as is done with the partitioned 4U library One full height drive is Drive 1 When using half height drives the first half height drive position will be called Drive 1 The second half height drive position will be called Drive 2 Partitioning of 4U Libraries When one or more half height drives are added to a 4U library the drive naming will change Currently the first full height drive is Drive 1 and the second full height drive is Drive 2 When you consider that each full height drive slot may contain one or two half height drives there are four potential drives in the space that used to occupy two As a result the first half height drive position or the first full high drive position will be called Drive 1 The second half height drive position will be called Drive 2 The third half height drive position or the second full height drive position will be called Drive 3 The fourth half height drive position will be called Drive 4 Important In a 4U library a full height drive sled may be installed in drive slot 1 drive will occupy slot 1 and
227. library 1 3 Remove replace procedures 10 1 reserve slot active slot 5 67 X 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Reserved Slots 4 24 RFC Request for Comments 1 7 Router assigned IPv6 address 5 10 S safety information laser compliance xiv laser safety xiv SAS interface 3 9 screens displayed at power ON 2 2 SCSI interface 3 7 bus termination 3 9 description 1 9 multiple buses 3 8 physical characteristics 3 8 SCSI LVD 3 7 3 9 SCSI Trade Association Web site 3 9 sending your comments iii Sense data using C 1 sense data library C 1 sequential mode starting 5 20 sequential mode stopping 5 20 serial number 5 33 serial number drive 5 34 Serial Port 1 3 server attachment SCSI interface 3 7 Sharing the library 3 1 shipment verification 4 2 shipping container 4 2 shipping label removing and storing 4 4 shipping lock and label storage location 1 3 shipping lock removing and storing 4 4 shortcut keys H 1 Simple Network Management Protocol 1 7 SKLM 4 27 5 46 SKLM Security Key Lifecycle Manager 1 5 SKLM Server Setting 4 27 sled description of tape drive 1 9 slot physical locations A 2 SME 5 46 SNMP 1 7 4 35 5 50 5 56 B 1 F 1 specifications 1 12 environmental operation 1 12 physical 1 12 1 12 power 1 12 Specifications cartridges 6 10 speed matching 1 10 SSL 4 30 5 50 storage capacity 1 8 support notification iii T tape cartridge 1 11 tape drive sled 1 3
228. lled in drive slot 2 drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3 Complete the following procedure to add a new tape drive to your library 1 Before installing the new drive sled inspect all connectors on the drive sled Ensure that the connectors are intact free of any foreign objects and have no cracks deformed or bent contacts 2 Slowly insert the new drive sled into the drive slot while supporting the bottom of the drive sled see Figure 10 8 on page 10 7 If necessary ensure that the black tab remains extended J in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 Push in on the drive sled handle QJ in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 while supporting the bottom of the drive sled until it is properly seated Important Damage to the connector pins may occur if this procedure is not followed 3 Tighten the captive thumbscrews W in Figure 10 6 on page 10 5 until the drive sled is secure 4 If you are installing a drive sled without ESD springs see Figure 10 4 on page 10 3 apply conductive tape to the sled as shown in Figure 10 9 on page 10 8 Note The small gray markers show where conductive tape should be placed to provide ESD protection 5 Install cover plates on any open drive slots in the library 6 Power ON the library 7 Run the Library Verify test Operator Control Panel Service gt Library Verify This test requires the use of a scratch blank cartridge e If the test passes When prompted by the Operator Co
229. ller Card Setting of sled motor parameters failed so Gripper blocked 1 If this is the first time that the Slider blocked library was powered ON or if it was moved to a new location path PIE ensure that the shipping lock was Rotation blocked removed The lock is on the top Sled blocked Refer to Isolating a Librar Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem on page 7 10 Possible Replacement CRUs e Primary Library Enclosure e Secondary Library Controller Card 8 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 8 1 Main Error Codes continued 8E Cannot find gripper block within the expected range sE Gripper outside range 69 Gripper reached a position beyond the expected range X ow O O O O O1 Slider outside range Slider reached a position beyond the expected range Q Elevator outside range Elevator reached a position beyond the expected range Rotation outside range Rotation reached a position beyond the expected range Isolating a Librar a ean Controller Card vs Accessor Sled reached a position beyond the expected range Enclosure Problem on page 7 40 Possible Replacement CRUs Cartridge present sensor not found e Primary Library Enclosure Slider home sensor not found e Secondary Library Controller Card Rotation home sensor not found N complete in the required amount of time 9A 9C 9E OF AO Al A2 A6 B1
230. llows modification to the configuration When a change is requested a pop up box confirms the request 1 Click Configure Library gt Network in the left navigation pane to display the Network page Network Protocol Stack IPv6 only w _ Host Name ATLOO8 Domain Name storage tucson ibm com Enable SSL for Web Oo Ethernet Settings Auto M IPv4 Enable DHCP Static Address Subnet Mask Gateway address DNS Primary DNS Secondary IPv6 DNS Primary 2002 90B E006 646 9 11 224 119 DNS Secondary 2002 90B E006 646 9 11 224 121 Enable Stateless Auto Config 1c Enable DHCP o Static Address 2002 908 E006 198 9 11 198 225 X Prefix length 64 9 Gateway address 2002 90B E006 198 1 X Figure 4 32 Configure Library Network Page Important Do not click the Submit button until all changes have been made to the Network page Once the Submit button has been clicked no other changes can be made until after the library has applied the current changes 4 30 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide a oe 10 11 After the Submit button has been clicked depending on the changes made you will either be disconnected and need to login again or reboot the library Clicking the Refresh button will refresh the page and any changes made will not be retained Select a Protocol Stack Choose IPv4 only IPv6 only or Dual Stack IPv4 amp IPv6 If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 amp IP
231. lover Encryption Drives Network 5 32 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 5 5 Web User Interface Menus continued User Access Date amp Time Logs amp Traces Email Notification SNMP Save Restore B Service Library Clean Drive Advance Diagnostic for Service Personnel only View Logs View Drive Logs Save Drive Dump Perform Diagnostics Key Path Diagnostics if feature is available Upgrade Firmware Reboot Monitor Library Menu The Monitor Library menu contains the following sub menu items e Monitor Library Drive Identity on page 5 34 Monitor Library Library Identity This page provides access to the static information about the library No changes can be made from this page Table 5 6 lists all available elements on the Library Identity page An X indicates that ie element displays for the specified library type Table 5 6 Library mes S page elements Menu Item Item Menu Item Description sees This is the unique identification number assigned by the manufacturer R Product ID Machine Type and Model this is the SCSI inquiry string of the Library a ae Currently This is the current level of firmware installed on the library For X X Installed Library information on updating your firmware refer to Service Library Firmware Upgrade Firmware on page 5 63 Bootcode This is the level of bootcode firmware currently installed on the library X
232. lving the error If the error does not recur run Library Verify before normal library operation is continued Complete the steps in Preparing to resolve an error code before you complete the User Action listed in Error codes on page 8 2 8 1 Error codes Errors that are described are hard errors If such an error occurs the library stops all operations and the Error LED starts flashing An appropriate message is posted on the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface These errors are also reported_by way of email notification if enabled To enable email notifications refer to i i 5 55 Table 8 1 Main Error Codes Bar code reader error cannot initialize BCR Bar code reader error no response from BCR Feror Code 90 0k mi ht Re poss a the library has a BCR bar code EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only reader that requires a minimum Memory error no response from EEPROM located on accessor level of library firmware Update the controller library firmware to 9 00 or higher If Accessor controller generic problem the problem still exists follow the procedure Seq Isolating a Library Setting of gripper motor parameters failed Controller Card vs Accessor Setting of slider motor parameters failed Enclosure Problem on page 7 10 Possible replacement CRUs 86 Setting of elevator motor parameters failed l e Primary Library Enclosure O A O OE AE A e Secondary Library Contro
233. magazines are released with the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface In case the Operator Control Panel or Web User Interface initiated process failed or the library no longer has power a manual emergency release is available anually on page 9 1 This manual process is used only if the magazine cannot be released with the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface Important To manually release a magazine see Releasing the Magazines Manually on page 9 1 2U library cartridge magazines The 2U library has two cartridge magazines The left cartridge magazine see has 11 storage slots and houses the elective 1 slot I O station The right magazine see Figure 4 40 on page 4 39 has 12 storage slots For information about Element Addressing see 4 38 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide DORIC TSAA kept ate Y ieee WEA io a i ea So 8 f T mA bi toms tie 4 A lt pa ERS a 7ug241 Figure 4 39 2U library left magazine a77ug242 Figure 4 40 2U library right magazine 2U Library I O station The I O input output station see Figure 4 41 on page 4 40 in a 2U library is part of the left magazine To open the I O station select Control gt Open I O Station The I O station slot opens and the Unlocking I O station message displays Wait for the Insert remove cartridge and close I O station message to insert or remove the car
234. mples of SCSI element addressing The SCSI specification does not allow gaps in the SCSI element addressing Special handling is needed for empty drive slots to fulfill the specification Also temporarily removed drives need to have their addresses preserved to not confuse the attached host and host application Generally only drives which are currently A 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide physically available or temporarily removed are reported Empty unused slots located at the bottom or the top should not be reported with an exception in case of a removed condition A drive slot which does not contain a drive and has a position between used slots needs to be reported as a SCSI element To signal the host application that this slot is not usable its ACCESS bit will be disabled Note When reducing the number of drives in your library update the Logical Library configuration This will remove the Attention LED on the front panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen indicating that a drive is missing Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element addressing and drive numbering Replacing LTO half height drives with full height drives may require you to execute Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the drive element addressing and drive numbering See Configure Library Save Restore Configuration on page 5 57 Appendix A SCSI Element Ty
235. ms CANCEL X The upper right button is used to cancel a user action and return to the previous menu screen SELECT v The lower right button is used to display a sub menu or force an accessor action Operator This component is a 128 X 64 monochrome graphic display Control Panel display 8 I O Station The Input Output I O Station is used to import and export cartridges into and out of the library e The 2U library has an elective 1 slot I O Station e The 4U library has an elective 3 slot I O Station Rear Panel a77ug300 a 7ug100 Figure 1 4 Rear panel of a 4U library with full height Fibre Channel drive and half height SAS drives Chapter 1 Product Description 1 3 a 7ug135 11 Figure 1 5 Rear panel of a 2U library with a full height dual port SAS drive Table 1 2 2U library and 4U library rear panel descriptions Number mem Deseipfon OOOO O Power connector s Both libraries require a 110 220 volt AC power connection e The 2U library has one power supply e The 4U library has a minimum of one power supply but has the capability of adding a redundant power supply Host interface The library has one or more of the following host interface connectors on the drive connectors sled e Fibre Channel connector e SFF 8088 mini SAS connector Tape drive sled __ This library supports the Ultrium 3 4 5 and 6 tape drive The tape drive in the library is packaged in a container called a drive sled
236. n adjective for use in qualifying some part or aspect of a servomechanism Glossary I 15 servomechanism A feedback control system in which at least one of the system signals represents mechanical motion signature A digital signature that is used in cryptography to identify one party to ensure authenticity SKLM IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager IBM s EKM application that assists encrypting tape drives in generating protecting storing and maintaining encryption keys that encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information that is read from tape media slot blocker A slot blocker is used to restrict close off a data cell so a data cartridge cannot be inserted Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI A standard that is used by computer manufacturers for attaching peripheral devices such as tape drives hard disks CD ROM players printers and scanners to computers servers Pronounced scuzzy Variations of the SCSI interface provide for faster data transmission rates than standard serial and parallel ports up to 320 megabytes per second The variations include e Fast Wide SCSI Uses a 16 bit bus and supports data rates of up to 20 MBps e SCSI 1 Uses an 8 bit bus and supports data rates of 4 MBps e SCSI 2 Same as SCSI 1 but uses a 50 pin connector instead of a 25 pin connector and supports multiple devices e Ultra SCSI Uses an 8 or 16 bit bus and supports data rates of 20 or 40 MBps e
237. n functions of a processor or other system component MIM Media information message mm Millimeter modifier That which changes the meaning mount a device To assign an I O device with a request to the operator MP Microprocessor ms Millisecond MSG Message multipath Pertaining to using more than one path N N A Not applicable Network Address Translation NAT NAT involves rewriting the source or destination addresses of IP packets as they pass through a router or firewall Most systems that use NAT do so to enable multiple hosts on a private network to access the Internet over a single public IP address NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association I 12 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide node In a network a point at which one or more functional units connect channels or data circuits NTP Network Time Protocol This protocol allows the library to set its internal date and time that is based on the date and time of a server NVS Nonvolatile storage A storage device whose contents are not lost when power is cut off O oersted The unit of magnetic field strength in the unrationalized centimeter gram second cgs electromagnetic system The oersted is the magnetic field strength in the interior of an elongated uniformly wound solenoid that is excited with a linear current density in its winding of 1 abampere per 47 centimeters of axial length offline Pertaining to
238. n its side 2 Peel the adhesive from the back of each of the six foot pads 3 Install the foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure by pressing each foot into one of the six areas J as shown in Figure 10 13 a 7ug085 Figure 10 13 Foot pads installed on the bottom of the library enclosure 3 Carefully return the library to an upright position 4 Remove the shipping lock from the top of the replacement library enclosure see Figure 10 14 on page 10 16 Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 15 a77ug195 Figure 10 14 Removing the shipping label and lock from the top of the library and storing on the rear panel 5 Store the lock and label on the back panel of the replacement library enclosure see Figure 10 15 ATTENTION _ Remov e before operation in Place in storage localon on rear panel a aeaeve En a 7ug019 Figure 10 15 Library shipping lock and label storage location on the real panel of the library 6 Proceed to Installing your drive in the replacement library enclosure Installing your drive in the replacement library enclosure Important It is important to install the drives from the defective library into the same positions in the replacement library enclosure to maintain your current library configuration 10 16 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 1 Remove all drives from the defective library see Figure
239. ncies reviewed the product and obtained approvals to the latest standards as they apply Performing the safety inspection procedure Before you service the unit complete the following safety inspection procedure 1 Stop all activities between the host and the library s tape drives 2 Turn off the power to the library by pushing in the Power button on the rear of the tape library for 4 seconds 3 If the drives are SCSI attached disconnect the SCSI cable and check the SCSI bus terminator for damage 4 Unplug the library s power cord from the electrical outlet and the library s power supply unit 5 Check the library s power cords for damage such as a pinched cut or frayed cord 6 If drives are SCSI attached check the tape drive s SCSI bus signal cable for damage 7 If drives are FC SAS attached check the tape drive s FC SAS cable for damage 8 Check the cover of the library for sharp edges damage or alterations that expose its internal parts 9 Check the cover of the library for proper fit It should be in place and secure 10 Check the product label at the rear of the library to make sure that it matches the voltage at your outlet X1V Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Rack safety The following general safety information must be used for all rack mounted devices DANGER CAUTION R001 Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet Always i
240. nd to end communications security in which the end point computers do the security processing trusted certification In cryptography a trustworthy certificate that is not registered with a certificate authority tunnel mode Port to port communications security in which security is provided to several machines by a single node U UART Universal asynchronous receiver transmitter UL Underwriter s Laboratories unload Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from the drive utilities Utility programs utility programs A computer program in general support of the processes of a computer for instance a diagnostic program uv Under voltage V VOLSER Volume serial number volume A certain portion of data together with its data carrier that can be handled conveniently as a unit VPD Vital product data The information that is contained within the tape drive that requires nonvolatile storage that is used by functional areas of the drive and information that is required for manufacturing RAS and engineering W word A character string that is convenient for some purpose to consider as an entity World Wide Node Name WWNN A unique character string which identifies Fibre Channel Host Bus adapters HBA I 18 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide WORM Write Once Read Many Write Write command WT World trade WWCID Worldwide Cartridge Identifier WWN Worldwide Name
241. ne Magazine Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3 Element Address Element Address 256 256 Drive 1 Drive 1 Element Address Element Address 256 256 Front side Figure A 1 Configuration of a one partition system a 7ug161 Configuration of a 2 Partition System A two partition system must have a minimum of two drives but may have three or four drives Partition 1 will contain any drives in drive position 1 and drive position 2 Partition 1 will also contain magazine 1 and magazine 2 Partition 2 will contain any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4 Partition 2 will also contain magazine 3 and magazine 4 A 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide When configured with two logical partitions the Element_Address assignments will be as follows DTE assignments will be as shown in STE assignments e Logical Library 1 Slot 1 through slot 21 4096 x1000 through 4116 0x1014 e Logical Library 2 Slot 22 through slot 45 4096 x1000 through 4019 0x1017 Drive 4 Drive 4 Drive 2 Element Address Sees Element Address rive 257 rive 257 Magazine Magazine Element Address Dri Element Address z z 256 rive 3 256 Drive 3 Element Address Element Address Drive 2 Drive 2 Element Address Element Address Magazine Magazine Drive 1 Drive 1 257 257 1 3 Element Address Element Address F 256 256 Drive 1 Drive 1 Element Address Element Address 256 256 Front side Figure A 2 Configuration of a two
242. nfigure gt Save Restore Monitor gt Drive gt Status gt Drive n Configure gt Drives gt Drive Interface Monitor gt Drive gt Status gt Drive n Service Library gt Save Drive Dump Configure Library gt Encryption Configure Library gt Encryption Service Library gt Key Path Diagnostics Monitor Library gt Drive Status Configure Library gt Network Configure Library gt Email Notification Service Library gt View logs Configure Library gt Logs amp Traces Configure Library gt Save Restore Monitor Library gt Drive Status Configure Library gt Drives Monitor Library gt Drive Status 5 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Service Library Save Drive Dump on page Diagnostics on Monitor Library Drive Status on Library Network on page 5 50 Library Event Notification on page 5 55 Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Information Menu Navigation Shortcuts Activity Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info Fibre Channel Configure gt Drives gt Drive Configure Library gt topology change Interface Drive on Drives page 5 23 Fibre Channel Monitor gt Drive gt Status gt Monitor Library gt Drive Monitor Library link status Drive n Link Drive on Status Drive Status on page 5 12 page 5 37 Firmware drive M
243. ng materials securely package the defective library including the left and right magazines Library Controller Card and power supply removed from the replacement library enclosure and return it to Dell Important Failure to return all of these components to Dell will result in you being charged for any missing components Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 27 10 28 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Appendix A SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing see Librar The following tables contain element addresses for the 2U library and the 4U library Table A 1 2U library SCSI Element Types and Element Addresses Element Type Element Address Range Media Transport Accessor Element MTE 1 0x01 I O Station Element IEE 16 0x10 Data Transfer Drive Element DTE 256 0x100 257 0x101 Storage Elements STE 4096 0x1000 4118 0x1016 Table A 2 4U library SCSI Element Types and Element Addresses Element Type Element Address Range Media Transport Accessor Element MTE 1 0x01 I O Station Elements IEE 16 0x10 17 0x11 18 0x12 Data Transfer Drives Elements DTE 256 0x100 257 0x101 258 0x102 259 0x103 Storage Elements STE 4096 0x1000 4140 0x102C 2U Library I O Slot Storage Slots and Drive Slot Element Addresses and Physi
244. ning allows you to partition your SAN into logical groupings of devices so that each group is isolated from the other and can only access the devices in its own group Two types of zoning exist hardware zoning and software zoning Hardware zoning is based on physical fabric port number Software zoning is defined with a World Wide Node Name WWNN or World Wide Port Name WWPN While zoning can be reconfigured without causing an outage some zoning configurations can become complicated The advantage of the library s WWNN implementation is that you can avoid the exposure of introducing zoning errors because you do not have to change the zoning configuration if a drive needs service or replacement Sharing on a Storage Area Network With Storage Area Network SAN components the possibilities for connecting multiple systems and multiple drives have increased Not all software and systems are designed to share drives Before you install a drive that would allow two systems to share it check that the systems and their software support sharing If your software does not support sharing note that Fibre Channel switches have a zoning capability to form a SAN partition For systems that do not cooperate use zoning to prevent the systems from sharing the same drive You can remove zoned partitions as you upgrade software and system levels Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 11 3 12 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide
245. nnel SAS Ultrium 4 Half Height Drive SAS Fibre Channel Ultrium 4 HH Fibre Drive V2 8Gb s Ultrium 4 HH SAS Drive V2 6Gb s Maximum storage capacity Interfaces 4 Gb s Fibre Channel 3 Gb s SAS Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization Table 1 10 Operation Specifications Ultrium 3 Library with l Uima adiye oo 4U library Maximum number of data cartridges 24 Maximum number of data cartridges 48 Native 9 6 TB Native 19 2 TB Compressed 19 2 TB 2 1 compression Compressed 38 4 TB 2 1 compression Number of slots 24 including I O Station 48 Including 3 I O station slots Ultrium 3 Full Height Drive 80 MB s Ultrium 3 Half Height V2 Drive 80 MB s Ultrium 3 Half Height Drive 60 MB s Ultrium 3 Full Height Drive types Drive SCSI Fibre Channel Ultrium 3 Half Height Drive Serial Attached SCSI SAS Ultra160 SCSI LVD 4 Gb s Fibre Channel Ultrium 3 HH SAS Drive V2 6Gb s 3 Gb s SAS Maximum storage capacity Sustained native data transfer rate Interfaces Chapter 1 Product Description 1 13 Environmental Specifications Table 1 11 Environmental Specifications Temperature Operating 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F Storage without cartridges 30 to 60 C 22 to 140 F Wet bulb operating 26 C 79 0 F maximum Temperature shock immunity maximum rate of change 10 C 18 F per hour Miscellaneous Micenas SOS
246. nstall stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet To avoid hazardous conditions because of uneven mechanical loading always install the heaviest devices in the bottom of the rack cabinet Always install servers and optional devices starting from the bottom of the rack cabinet Rack mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or workspace Do not place any object on top of rack mounted devices Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord Be sure to disconnect all power cords in the rack cabinet before you service any device in the rack cabinet Connect all devices that are installed in a rack cabinet to power devices installed in the same rack cabinet Do not plug a power cord from a device that is installed in one rack cabinet into a power device that is installed in a different rack cabinet An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired might place hazardous voltage on the metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures might exceed the manufacturer s recommended ambient temperature for all your rack mounted devices Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised Ensure that air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side front or back of a unit that is used for air flow thro
247. nt library enclosure a If power ON is successful 1 2 3 4 The Ready Activity LED J will turn ON indicating that all components are functioning properly After power is restored to the replacement library enclosure the library will automatically restore the VPD on the replacement library enclosure from the Library Controller Card If a VPD Selection message is displayed in the Operator Control Panel see the Read Me before Continuing section earlier in this procedure to determine how to respond to the message Power OFF the replacement library enclosure Proceed to Swapping b If power ON is not successful Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 21 1 The Error LED Pf in Figure 10 20 will turn ON This indicates that the Library Controller Card from the defective library is not functioning properly 2 Power OFF the replacement library enclosure 3 Refer to Dell technical support for further instructions a77ug258 Figure 10 20 Library front panel LEDs Ready Activity LED green Attention LED amber B Clean Drive LED amber B Error LED amber Swapping Cartridge Magazines 1 Manually release and remove all magazines from the defective library and from the replacement library enclosure To release and remove a cartridge magazine a Find the access holes for the right and left magazines see Figure 10 21 on page 10 23 and Figure 10 22 on page 10 24
248. ntication Failure 2A Encryption Invalid RDKi 2B Encryption 2C Encryption Key Wrapping Failure 2D Encryption Sequencing Failure 2E Encryption Unsupported Type 2F Encryption 30 oa 32 42 Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption Key Incorrect New Key Encrypted Write Pending Prohibited Request Key Unknown Keystore Related Problem EKM Challenge Pending E2 Encryption Key Translation Disallowed FF Encryption Security Prohibited Function 01 Encryption Key Service Not Configured 11 Encryption Incomplete Key Associate Data Set 12 Encryption T10 Vendor Specific Reference Key Not Found 08 Encryption T10 Maximum Number of Supplemental Keys Exceeded C 12 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table C 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued Bit Address or Name 12 13 Sense Key 6 Unit Attention EE 12 Encryption Key Change Detected EE 18 Encryption Changed Read EE Encryption Changed Write EE Encryption EKM Identifier Changed EE Encryption EKM Challenge Changed EE Encryption Initiator Identifier Changed EE Encryption Initiator Response Changed 2A Encryption Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Another I_T Nexus 2A Encryption Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Vendor Specific Event Sense Key 7 Data Protect EF 10 Encryption Key Required EF 11 Encryption Key Generati
249. ntil it is properly seated Note You will hear a snap when the Library Controller Card is fully engaged and installed properly 3 Tighten the thumbscrews 10 20 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide a66mi097 Figure 10 19 Removing a Library Controller Card from the library Note If you power on the replacement library without first swapping the Library Controller Card from the original defective library enclosure the following message will appear on the Operator Control Panel shortly after applying power New library detected Please remove library power and insert Library Controller Card from old Library The library requires the library serial number and other library attributes from the original library which is located in the VPD on the original Library Controller Card in order to continue library initialization See Important Read Me Before Continuing message listed above As a further Note if the replacement library does not complete library initialization successfully after swapping in the original Library Controller Card be sure to retain the original Library Controller Card so it can be swapped into the new replacement library enclosure which will have to be ordered 2 Plug one end of the power cord removed earlier from the defective library into the rear panel of the replacement library enclosure and plug the other end into a power source 3 Power ON the replaceme
250. ntrol Panel display and the I O Station opens remove the cartridge used in the test Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen Proceed to Configuring the Tape Drive on page 10 10 e If the test fails an error code will be displayed Make note of the error then refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in the Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide for additional instructions Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 9 Configuring the Tape Drive 1 2 T Log on to the Web User Interface Verify that you are running the latest versions of Library and Drive firmware Upgrade the firmware at Service Library gt Upgrade Firmware Use the Web UI to update the Logical Library Configure Library gt Logical Libraries and Drive Configure Library gt Drives configurations Refer to Chapter 5 Operations on page 5 1 Select Submit on the Configure Library gt Logical Libraries web page even if there are no required changes This action will refresh the Data Transfer Element DTE for the drives Refer to Configurations on page A 1 for information regarding DTE addressing If Configure Library gt Logical Libraries does not correctly refresh update the DTE addresses execute step 3 and step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 5 Reconfigure your library using the OCP to configure your network settings then using the Web UI to complete your library configur
251. ny library or drive reset This is because a new drive may have been added or an existing drive may have been swapped with another drive 1 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Supported Internet Protocols The library supports the following Internet protocols e IPv4 e IPv6 To learn more about Internet protocols visit http www iana org SNMP Messaging Occasionally the library may encounter a situation that you want to know about such as an open magazine or a fault that causes the library to stop The library provides a standard TCP IP protocol called Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP to send alerts about conditions such as need for operator intervention over a TCP IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring station These alerts are called SNMP traps Using the information supplied in each SNMP trap the monitoring station together with customer supplied software can alert operations personnel of possible problems or operator interventions that occur SNMP Traps SNMP traps are alerts or status messages that can be collected monitored and used to proactively manage attached libraries using SNMP protocol with the host server s In summary each trap provides the following information e Product Identification such as product name description manufacturer model number firmware level and the URL that the trap is designated for e Product Status such as the severity of the trap stat
252. o all sense field reporting as specified in the SCSI standards Note 1 The Error Code field Byte 0 is set to 70h to indicate a current error that is one associated with the most recently received command It is set to 71h to indicate a deferred error which is not associated with the current command 2 The segment number Byte 1 is zero since the Copy Compare and Copy and Verify commands are not supported 3 The File Mark flag Byte 2 bit 7 is set if a Space Read or Verify command did not complete because a file mark was read 4 The End of Media EOM flag Byte 2 bit 6 is set if a Write or Write File Marks command completed in the early warning area Spacing into BOM also causes this flag to be set It is also set on an attempt to read or space past EOD or if an attempt is made to space into Beginning of Media 5 The Illegal Length Indicator ILI flag Byte 2 bit 5 is set if a Read or Verify ended because a block was read from tape that did not have the block length requested in the command 6 The Information Bytes Bytes 3 5 are only valid if the Valid flag is set This occurs only for current errors and not for deferred errors 7 The Field Replaceable Unit field Byte 14 is set to either zero or to a non zero vendor specific code indicating which part of the drive is suspected of causing the failure 8 The Clean CLN flag Byte 21 bit 3 is set if the drive needs cleaning and clear otherwise 9 The Volum
253. o exchanging a library component This situation can be noted by the ACTIVITY line on the Operator Panel posting Recovery Prism integrity verification can be done by releasing the magazines and inspecting the cell prisms Normal initialization or inventory time for a 2U library once the picker mechanism starts its operation should be approximately 1 to 2 minutes For a 4U library 2 to 3 minutes A single missing or damaged prism can add 1 to 2 minutes If the accessor tray sensor emitter is inoperable or several prisms are missing or damaged initialization or inventory could exceed 30 minutes or longer Refer to Troubleshooting table Cartridge Movement Problems Procedures for Isolating CRU Problems Isolating a Power Supply Problem Note Not all power supplies have LEDs The original power supply for the 2U library did not have LEDs though any power supplies replaced will likely have LEDs The 4U library has power supplies with LEDs Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 7 Figure 7 1 A 250w power supply with LEDs A DOE Say CY a Figure 7 2 A 80w power supply without LEDs Table 7 2 Power Supply LED Meanings If the blue LED is lit AC voltage is available a If the amber LED is lit there is a possible fan problem or other power supply issue The powe
254. o ovement totomstr fet storing second ripper movemens get range fed O is emor during ser hold current wo avoid orion e roeden OOOO a9 Pnsibe motor defect because both directors bioced ae Inventory lon because destination posly aD Could not pull ape out of slot from magazine OOO w Movefrom todrvefsied O O Oo e Error during second gripper movement ger arge fea es Bro during third slider movement move home fate mo keemia OOOO p Eror during sted movement to oration positon SSS Chapter 8 Error codes 8 9 Table 8 2 Sub error codes continued 73 Error during move sled to block Opening I O slot failed QO j Error during movement to I O slot open position QO N Error during moving back sensor was found Movement to home position failed Elevator movement to home position failed Error during sled movement to rotation position Q9 Error during rotation to home or far position Sled movement to home sensor position failed g Sled movement to transport position failed Error during rotation movement to rotation min position Movement of I O slot failed Sled movement to sensor failed Sled movement to rotation position failed Go Elevator movement to home position failed Error during rotation to far position Ol Sled movement to I O slot position failed SN Error during elevator movement to position N Error during mailslot detection EEPROM on robotics controller not
255. ode 1 11 LUN 3 7 D 1 D 2 LUN scanning 3 7 LVD SCSI interface 1 9 M MAC Address 1 7 magazines 1 1 4 38 Maximum Transmission Unit MTU 1 7 media 1 11 Media 6 1 media capacity 1 1 menu shortcuts 5 1 menu tree Operator Control Panel 5 9 Menus Configure network settings 4 20 MIB 1 7 B 1 Monitor menu Drive 5 12 Library 5 10 Move Media 4 42 5 17 5 41 Multiple control paths 3 2 N Navigation 5 7 Netmask 4 20 Network Address Translation NAT 1 7 network configuration 5 24 Network Mask 4 30 5 24 5 50 network settings 5 24 O OCP 4 37 ON OFF power button 2 4 operation specifications 1 12 Operator Control Panel Access PIN 5 25 Configure Save Restore 5 26 control keys on front panel 1 1 display 1 1 menu tree 5 9 Monitor menu Drive 5 12 Library 5 10 power ON display 2 2 Operator Control Panel menus Configure Drive 5 23 Configure Library 5 20 Ordering Media Ordering WORM cartridges 6 3 P packaging materials 4 2 partitioning 3 3 4 25 A 3 partitioning your 4U library 5 44 path failover 4 26 5 29 physical specifications 1 12 power button 1 1 2 4 power connector 1 3 power management 1 11 power ON display 2 2 power source 4 1 power specifications 1 12 Power Supply Problem 7 7 product ID 5 33 PTF 4 37 7 12 Q Quiesce 5 62 R rack installation 4 1 4 6 safety xv rack mounting the library 4 6 rack requirements 4 1 RAID controllers 3 7 Read Write capability 6 3 rear panel of
256. ograms Internet Protocol Version 4 IPv4 See Pv4 Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 See Pv6 intervention required Manual action is needed INTRO Introduction I O Input output I O Station Cartridge location that is dedicated for the insertion of cartridges into and the removal of cartridges from the library IOP Input output processor IP Internet Protocol Glossary I 9 IP address An identifier for a computer or device on an Internet Protocol TCP IP network Networks that use the TCP IP protocol route messages that are based on the IP address of the destination See Pv4 and IPv6 IPL Initial program load IP Stack A TCP IP protocol stack that manages static IP addresses IPv4 A network layer protocol for packet switched networks IPv4 supports 2 about 4 3 billion addresses IPv6 A network layer protocol for packet switched networks It is the designated successor of Pv4 for general use on the Internet The main improvement that is brought by IPv6 is the increase in the number of addresses available for networked devices allowing for example each mobile phone and mobile electronic device to have its own unique address ISV Independent software vendor ITDT IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic tool ITST Idle time self test K Kerberos Kerberos Authentication is a standard RFC 1510 third party authentication protocol that provides end to end security for distributed computing environments kilo
257. om the host to the library Select this option for each drive that you want to be a control path drive At least one drive in each logical library must be designated as a control path drive Port A Configuration Speed This is the current speed setting of the drive For each Fibre Channel drive click on the drop down list and select Automatic 1Gb s 2Gb s 4 Gb s or 8 Gb s For each SAS drive select Automatic 3 Gb s or 6 Gb s Selecting Automatic will allow library speed to automatically negotiate to the current server speed FC AL Loop This is the loop position number The options are X X ID Manual or Automatic Port B Configuration Port B is supported for SAS full height drives X X only Note Port B is only supported for failover Drives Drive 1 Logical Library 1 Port A Configuration Speed Topology FC AL Loop ID Port B Configuration Power On Control Path Automatic LNF Port 5 Ml Port not available a 7ug064 Refresh Submit Figure 5 41 The Configure Library Drives page for a 2U library Chapter 5 Operations 5 49 Drives Drive 1 Logical Library 1 Power On Control Path Note SAS drives do not require user configuration Drive Logical Library Power On Control Path SCSI ID Drive 3 Logical Library 3 Bowen in Control Path Port A Configuration Speed Automatic M Topology FC AL Loop ID Port B Configuration Port not available a 7ug095
258. on EF 13 Encryption Key Translate EF 1A Encryption Key Optional EF CO Encryption No Operation 26 10 Encryption Data Decryption Key Fail Limit 2A 13 Encryption Data Encryption Key Instance Counter Has Changed 74 00 Security Error 74 01 Encryption Unable to Decrypt Data 74 02 Encryption Unencrypted Data Encountered While Decrypting 74 03 Encryption Incorrect Data Encryption Key 74 04 Encryption Cryptographic Integrity Validation Failed 74 05 Encryption Error Decrypting Data Ea FRU code SKSV Reserved BPV Bit pointer When set to 1 the bit pointer is valid Dag 17 SKSV 0 First Error Fault Symptom Code FSC SKSV 1 Field Pointer lal First Error a Data Reserved S Cant re Volume Label Current Wrap Relative LPOS 34 SCSI Address Frame number Drive number Appendix C Sense Data C 13 Table C 2 LTO Tape Drive Sense Data continued A 36 39 45 48 49 52 Bit Address or Name Be 7 6e 5 a 2 1 o Port Identifier Relative Target Port Address Reporting Sense This is the port address of the drive port through which sense is being reported On Fibre Channel drives it is the Fibre Channel Fabric Port Address for example 011E13 or 000026 with byte 36 being reserved On SAS drives it is the Hashed SAS Address of the drive port for example F32A94 with byte 36 being reserved On SCSI bytes 36 through 38 are reserved
259. on Specifications Ultrium 6 Operation Specifications Ultrium 5 Operation Specifications Ultrium 4 Operation Specifications Ultrium 3 Environmental Specifications Host Drive Interface Support Maximum bus length between eao Recommended maximum quantity of drives per SCSI bus Location criteria Menu navigation oriente Library Control Keys Detailed information on ee residing in a magazine Factory Default Settings Web User Interface Menus Library Identity page elements Drive Identity page elements Library Status page elements Drive Status page elements Configure Library General page elements Configure Library Specific page elements Drive Identity page elements Cartridge Types and Colors iii 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 8 1 12 1 12 1 12 1 12 1 13 1 13 1 14 3 7 3 8 3 8 4 1 5 1 D 8 5 16 5 27 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 36 5 37 5 43 5 43 5 49 6 1 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 7 1 7 2 8 2 8 3 10 1 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 B 1 C 1 C 2 F 1 Cartridge Data Capacity and Recording Formats Nominal Cavtidge ne Load Unload Cycles Ultrium data cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive Bar code label requirements for Ultrium tape drives and libraries Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium Tape Drives e Location of the write protect switch Environment for operating storing and shipping the LTO
260. onitor gt Drive gt Identity Monitor Library gt Drive current level i Identity Drive Identity on Firmware library Monitor gt Library gt Identity Monitor Library gt Library identify current Library on Identity Library Identity level Firmware library Not available with this Service Library gt Upgrade Service Library or drive update _ interface Firmware O i JES O ne eS o Goya FF O 5 mp yo an h O Gateway current Monitor gt Library gt Network Configure Library gt address gt Gateway Library onl Network Library Network page 5 50 O O 5 mp yo an h O Gateway Configure gt Network gt Configure Library gt Address modify Gateway Network on Network Library Network O 5 go fa OQ T on Control gt Re Inventory Manage Library gt Manage Library Re Inventory Perform Inventory on page 5 18 I O Station Configure gt Library Settings gt Configure Library gt configuring I O Station General I O Station Monitor gt Library gt Status System Status screen current status Library on I O Station open Control gt Open I O Station Not available with this interface IP Address Monitor gt Library gt Network Monitor Library gt Library current Library on Identity IP Address Configure gt Network gt IP Configure Library gt modify Address Network on Network Library current
261. ontact your Backup Application vendor for this information Library Recovery Problem Determination The 2U and 4U library firmware will generally retry failed operations up to three times before posting a failure to complete the operation or in some situations proceeding with an operation that can be completed in an alternative manner Of course if the operation is successful within the allotted retry count the appropriate retry counter is updated and recorded in the retry log and the next library operation will commence For example failure to pick or place a cartridge from or to a designated cell or drive location after exhausting the retry count will result in a failed operation with the appropriate error code However failure to detect a particular cell location by sensing the prism fiducial located on the cell shelf because it is missing or damaged will eventually result in the cell location being located by the gripper bar code reader and positional emitter pulse count after the prism detection retry count is exhausted If several prisms are missing or damaged or if the accessor prism sensor emitter is inoperable initialization and or inventory functions can take a prolonged amount of time to complete due to the lengthy retry recovery procedure If the library is taking an extended amount of time to initialize to perform an inventory or even move a cartridge within the library the magazines prism integrity should be verified prior t
262. ory chip Set when a cartridge memory CM failure is detected on the loaded tape cartridge Forced eject Set when you manually unload the tape cartridge while the drive was reading or writing N Media loaded is Read only format Set when a cartridge marked as read is cleared when the cartridge is ejected m m m Media life Set when the tape cartridge reaches its end of life EOL cartridge type into the drive or when only is loaded into the drive The flag Hard error Set for any unrecoverable read write or positioning error This flag is set in conjunction with flags 4 5 or 6 Media Set for any unrecoverable read write or positioning error that is due to a faulty tape cartridge Read failure Set for any unrecoverable read error where isolation is uncertain and failure could be due to a faulty tape cartridge or to faulty drive hardware See the Action Required column for Flag Number 4 5 or 6 in this table Replace the tape cartridge If Flag 4 is also set the cartridge is defective Replace the tape cartridge If Flag Number 9 is also set make sure that the write protect switch is set so that data can be written to oo If Flag Number 4 is also set the cartridge is defective Replace the tape cartridge 1 Copy the data to another tape cartridge 2 Discard the old EOL tape Replace the tape with a data grade tape Ensure that the cartridge s write protect switch is set so
263. ost or to a switch e For a SAS library connect the Host Interface Cable to the host HBA using a direct SFF 8088 connection or an interposer as required Unused SAS connectors do not need termination 4 Plug the network ethernet cable 4 in Figure 4 19 on page 4 17 5 in Figure 4 20 on page 4 17 or in Figure 4 21 on page 4 17 into the ethernet port on the back panel of the library If the ethernet connection is directly attached to a server or laptop a crossover ethernet cable may be required Note It is the customer s responsibility to supply the crossover cable if one is required Connecting a Power Cord Attention This product can ONLY be used with an approved power cord for your specific geographic region Use of an unapproved power cord may result in e not meeting individual country specific safety requirements e overheating with potential personal injury and or property damage and e a fracture resulting in the internal contacts being exposed which potentially could subject the user to a shock hazard For every power supply in the library complete the following steps 1 Remove the protective label from the power receptacle on your library a77ug197 Figure 4 22 Removing the protective label from the power receptacle 2 Plug one end of the power cord fJ in Connecting the Host Interface Cable on page 4 16 n page 4 16 into each power supply connector on the back panel of the library 4 18
264. otal I O Station Closed Library Time 15 27 45 Auto Clean Status Chk Media Rsvd Slot D Power Supply 2 Online Ej Status x Figure 2 4 4U library System Status screen Status icons indicate the following conditions e The green check mark indicates that the library is fully operational and that no user intervention is required e The yellow exclamation point indicates that user intervention is necessary but that the library is still capable of performing operations This condition can be caused by a media library redundant power supply power supply fan or a drive sled problem To determine which view the System Status screen e The red X indicates that user intervention is required and that the library is not capable of performing operations 2 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide e If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present or if a cleaning cartridge is present but not in a reserved slot Auto Clean status will show Chk Media Rsvd Slot and Status will show a green check mark and the words Media Attention The Auto Clean status disappears from the system status screen once Auto Clean has been properly configured You will get messages if the cleaning media expires System Status View Legend 10 15 2008 13 28 52 Library Name rb4Ui139 Status Media Attention Drive 1 Status ae Ready Drive 3 Status F Ready Slots 40 44 Empty Total I O Station Closed Library
265. oving the Shipping lock and label 2 Store the lock K and label A on the rear panel of the library as shown in Figure 4 5 on page 4 6 Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 5 ee aM n ai _ ATTENTION _ x a Remov e before operation Place in storage location on rear panel a 7ug019 Figure 4 5 Library shipping lock and label storage location on rear panel of library Rackmounting the Library for Rack Installation ONLY The 2U library and the 4U library are easily installed into a standard 19 inch rack system The 2U library requires 2U 3 5 in of space The 4U library requires 4U 7 in of space If you are not rackmounting your library skip this procedure and go to Attaching the Library to a Server on page 4 16 Important A 2U library weighs 15 59 kg 34 37 lbs with one drive and without media A 4U library weighs 21 32 kg 47 Ibs with one drive and without media To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the library 1 observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual material handling 2 obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the library during installation or removal and 3 always remove all cartridges to reduce the overall weight of the library To install your library in a rack perform the following steps 1 Verify which rack kit was included in your shipment Although there are two different rack kits the steps to install
266. ownload prevented due to Use correct drive firmware image incompatible drive version Movement Retry Fan Alert Clean request from drive Media Attention Drive reported warning or critical tape alert flag Network problem Check network connections configuration and settings Not h cleani trid t PE a a a ce Insert more cleaning cartridges to the empty reserved slots to autoclean Drive disabled b t t ENA E a Check drive type and install only supported drives supported for use in this library Drive firmware unchanged after This is normal if the old and new drive firmware is the same version upgrade Power Supply Fan operation warning Check the power supply status Power Supply failed Check the power supply status and replace the failed power supply Power supply failed Check the power supply status and replace the failed power supply Invalid Robotic Code Install the latest version of library firmware 65 67 6A 70 71 72 13 74 75 igs 78 79 81 82 83 84 85 87 88 8A 8B 8C SE Cleaning tape nearly expired Continue with cleaning cartridge until it is expired then replace the expired cleaning cartridge with a new cleaning cartridge I2C bus recovery Run library System Test 8F 92 VPD data have been restored from EEPROM This is normal when the VPD is restored EEPROM Chapter 8 Error codes 8 13 Table 8 3 Warning events continued External cooling fan error
267. owsers you will still receive a security certificate warning error each time you log in to the Web User Interface your transmission is secure SSL is enabled when the URL to your library begins with https and some browsers will show a lock If the ethernet connection is a direct connection between the PC and the library a special crossover ethernet cable needs to be used Note On newer PCs either straight through or crossover ethernet cables may be used since the crossover requirement is provided internally Check the ethernet cable carefully or try another cable and if the cable is connected to a network hub or switch try a different port If the Web User Interface is still malfunctioning replace the Library Controller Card CRU refer to Replacing a Library Controller Card on page 10 11 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 11 Isolating Accessor Scanner Problems If the server has reported inventory problems relating to inability to read bar code labels or if some or all of the cartridge labels are not being displayed on the Web User Interface use the following procedure to determine if the scanner library enclosure CRU needs to be replaced 1 Ensure that a supported bar code label or labels are being used 2 With library power OFF reseat the library controller card CRU refer to Replacing a Library Controller Card on page 10 11 and then switch library power ON 3 Perform a re inventory via the Operator
268. pD Chapter 10 Check ines Remove and Replace 10 1 Tools Required 2 2 4 amp amp d0 Electrostatic Discharge 4 a JOEL Relocating Your Library 10 1 Removing Installing Adding a Tape Drive Sled 10 3 Removing a Tape Drive Sled 10 4 Installing a Tape Drive Sled 10 6 Adding a Tape Drive Sled 10 9 Replacing a Power Supply 10 10 Replacing a Library Controller Card 10 11 Replacing Cartridge Magazines lt 10 13 Replacing the Library Enclosure 10 13 Preparing the Defective Library for Replacement Unpacking and Preparing ihe Replacement Library Enclosure Installing your drive in the replacement library enclosure Swapping Power uppie Swapping Library Controller Cards Swapping Cartridge Magazines Installing the Replacement Library Fadosure Completing the Installation of the Replacement Library Enclosure Returning the Defective Library Brclosure Appendix A SCSI Element Types SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations 2U Library I O Slot Storage Slots and Dave Slot Element Addresses and Physical Locations 4U Library I O Slots Storage Slots and Drive Slots Element Addresses and Physical Locations Library Partitioning and Element Addressing Appendix B TapeAlert Flags TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Drive Appendix C Sense Data Library sense data Dr
269. pacities and can also read LTO Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges with improved data rates Ultrium 4 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges Ultrium 4 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 3 capacities and can also read LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges with improved data rates Ultrium 3 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges Ultrium 3 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 2 capacities and can also read LTO Ultrium 1 Data Cartridges with improved data rates of up to 20 MB second native data transfer rate 40 MB second with 2 1 compression Note Ultrium 4 tape drives cannot read or write to Ultrium 1 tapes Ultrium 5 tape drives cannot read or write to Ultrium 1 or Ultrium 2 tapes Ultrium 6 tape drives cannot read or write to Ultrium 3 Ultrium 2 and Ultrium 1 tapes Supported cartridges include e LTO Ultrium 2500 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 6 e LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 5 e LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 4 e LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 3 e Write Once Read Many WORM Data Cartridge Ultrium 3 Ultrium 4 Ultrium 5 Ultrium 6 LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 2 e 100 GB Data Cartridge Ultrium 1 read only e LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge Important Cartridges placed in the library must be labeled with the correct bar code labels For additional information
270. page Current date and time displayed in System Status screen Not available with this interface Note Dedicated Cleaning Slot DCS only available on earlier versions of the 4U library Refer to Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge on page 4 43 Monitor gt Library gt Network gt DHCP Configure gt Network gt DHCP Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Not available with this interface Service gt Library Verify Service gt Run Tests Service Run Service gt Run Tests Tests on page Library Network Librar 7 Network Configure Library gt Network Configure Library gt Network Not available with this interface Not available with this interface Not available with this interface Not available with this interface Service Library gt Key Path Diagnostics Not available with this interface Service Library Service Library gt Perform Diagnostics Service Library gt Perform Diagnostics 5 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Information Activity Display Contrast DNS modify settings Drive change interface configuration Drive change SCSI Loop ID Drive clean Drive current SCSI Loop ID Drive current status Dr
271. page 10 10 Web User Interface Help Pages Each screen on the Web User Interface has an associated Help page To access a Help page click on Help in the upper right corner of the screen A new web page will open Using the left navigation pane select the desired Help page To close the Help page click the red X in the upper right corner of the screen Logging out of the Web User Interface To log out of the Web User Interface click Logout in the upper right corner of the current screen Important If you click the X in the upper right corner of your internet browser window you will not log out of the Web User Interface 2 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Chapter 3 Installation Planning Before installing your library take time to review the following information Determining the Number of Logical Libraries You can partition the library into as many logical libraries as there are drives in the library Basic Guidelines e Each logical library must contain at least one drive e A library configuration of exactly one logical library equals the entire physical library e The library issues a warning to the user if media is moved across logical libraries Library Sharing The library s default configuration allows a single application to operate the library through a single control path Often it is advantageous to be able to share a single library between heterogeneous dissimilar
272. pes SCSI Addresses and Physical Configurations A 7 A 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Appendix B TapeAlert Flags This appendix is intended to provide additional information to the reader about the tape drive All error code and diagnostic information contained in this chapter can be accessed from the Operator Control Panel of the Library The drive portion of the Operator Control Panel Display will contain any drive error codes Therefore there is no need to open the Library to access the buttons on the drive as described in this chapter TapeAlert is a standard that defines status conditions and problems experienced by devices such as tape drives autoloaders and libraries The standard enables a server to read TapeAlert messages called flags from a tape drive via the SCSI bus The server reads the flags from Log Sense Page 0x2E This library is compatible with TapeAlert technology which provides error and diagnostic information about the drives and the library to the server Because library and drive firmware may change periodically the SNMP interface in the library does not require code changes if devices add additional TapeAlerts that are not supported today However should this occur the Management Information Block MIB is written to minimize impact to the SNMP monitoring station At the time of this writing the TapeAlert flags in this appendix correctly represent TapeAlerts that will
273. ple for control path failover 3 2 D daisy chaining 3 9 Data Cartridge 5 65 data transfer rate 1 8 DCS 5 67 dedicated cleaning slot A 2 default settings 5 26 description 1 1 desktop installation 4 1 Device drivers supported 1 14 DHCP 4 20 4 30 5 24 5 50 Diagnostics 5 62 display contrast 5 32 dll 4 37 7 12 Drive channel calibration 1 10 power management 1 11 speed matching 1 10 drive configuration 5 48 Drive Density 5 37 Drive Diagnostics 5 31 5 62 drive dump saving to host 5 61 drive firmware current version 5 34 drive interface 5 23 Drive Log 5 60 drive serial number 5 34 drive sled description 1 9 drive status 5 37 drive clean 5 58 E EC 5 14 ED 5 14 element addresses 3 3 A 2 A 3 element addressing A 1 element types A 1 Encryption 1 5 4 27 environment 1 14 operating 1 14 particulates 1 14 environmental specifications 1 12 Error codes 8 1 Error LEDs 7 7 Error log 8 1 Ethernet Port 1 3 Export Media 4 42 5 17 5 41 5 65 9 1 IF factory default settings 5 26 fan vents 1 3 feature activation key 5 45 features optional drives 1 9 Fibre Channel 3 7 Fibre Channel interface cables and speeds 3 10 sharing ona SAN 3 11 zoning 3 10 Fibre Channel ports 3 10 Firmware updating using ITDT Tool 9 5 firmware upgrade 5 63 foot pads installing 4 3 front panel components 1 1 G Gateway address 4 20 Gateway Address 4 30 5 24 5 50 glossary I 1 H Host Attachment 7 12 host bus adapter 3 7
274. power OFF loosen the two thumb screws which secure the controller card to the library enclosure and slide it out e Inspect the card for any broken components or other anomalies 7 10 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide If the error code indicates an accessor type error slider elevator sled etc e If the card appears to have no abnormalities reseat the card back in the library tighten the thumb screws and turn library power ON If both the Operator Control Panel and Web User interfaces are inoperable or frozen and the latest firmware has been installed the controller card CRU electronics is the most likely failure If only the Web User Interface has failed please see Isolating Web User Interface Problems before replacing any CRUs If a control card error code has been obtained and reseating power cycling and updating the library firmware did not fix the problem the controller card CRU is the most likely failing CRU refer to Replacing a Library Controller Card on page 10 11 release and remove both ma Manage Library Release Mag o Magazines Manually on page 9 1 and observe the accessor path for any obvious obstruction or problems Resolve any observed problem if possible Execute a Library System_Test See page 5 62 for the web or for the OCP If the problem is persistent contact Dell technical support If the library is taking an extended amount o
275. pply Problem on page 7 7 The Operator Control Panel is 4 Power cycle the library blank or frozen 2 If possible log on to the Web User Interface and check the error log Service Library gt View Logs Look up the error code and try to resolve see Chapter 8 Error codes on page 8 1 3 Upgrade reinstall the latest library firmware To download the latest library firmware visit http www support dell com e If the problem is corrected run Library Verify before resuming normal library operations Refer to Service Library Verify on page 5 29 If the problem persists refer to Dell technical support 7 1 Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table continued ENCRYPTION Encryption Error Displayed when the drive detects an error associated with an encryption operation if the problem occurred while the tape drive was writing data to or reading data from tape Encryption related error is posted Connection problem with the IBM SKLM application There is an error code in the error log 1 Check the host application to ensure the key management application is providing the correct encryption key e Refer to the Drive Sense Data on page C 7 returned for an encryption operation e Retry the encryption operation after the key management application problems have been resolved Check the operation of the tape drive by resetting the drive Operator Control Panel Service gt Serv
276. properly trained in media handling procedures e Include media handling procedures as part of any services contract e Define and make personnel aware of data recovery procedures Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 7 Ensure Proper Packaging When shipping a cartridge use the original or better packaging Always ship or store a cartridge in a jewel case Use only a recommended shipping container that securely holds the cartridge in its jewel case during transportation Never ship a cartridge in a commercial shipping envelope Always place it in a box or package If you ship the cartridge in a cardboard box or a box of a sturdy material ensure the following Place the cartridge in polyethylene plastic wrap or bags to protect it from dust moisture and other contaminants Pack the cartridge snugly do not allow it to move around Double box the cartridge place it inside a box then place that_box inside the shipping box and add padding between the two boxes see Figure 6 5 a a69i0076 Figure 6 5 Double boxing tape cartridges for shipping Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions Before you use a tape cartridge acclimate it to the operating environment for 24 hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive the time will vary depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was exposed Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting i
277. r Desktop Installation ONLY Removing and Storing the Shipping Lock Rackmounting the Library for Rack Installation ONLY Connecting the Host interface Cable Connecting a Power Cord Configuring Your Library i Choosing Your Configuration Method Using Factory Defaults as Your Configuration Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface Configuring Your Library v using the Operator Control Panel i Preparing the Host Verifying the Connection Cartridge magazines Populating the Library with Data Cartridges Inserting the Cleaning Cartridge Chapter 5 Operations Operator Control Panel Navigation Operator Control Panel Menu Tree Monitor Menu Control Menu Configure Menu Service Menu Web User Interface Menus Monitor Library Menu Manage Library Menu Configure Library Menu Service Library Menu T Import and Export Media during Normal Library Operation Configuring I O Stations and Reserving Slots 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 7 3 7 3 7 39 3 10 _ 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 43 4 4 46 4 16 4 18 4 19 4 19 4 19 4 20 4 37 4 37 4 38 4 38 4 42 4 43 5 1 5 7 x a D9 5 10 5 16 5 18 e 0 29 ee oy 5 33 5 41 5 43 5 58 5 65 5 67 Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media 6 1 Data Cartridges amp Ol Cartridge Compatibility y e 4 Oa WORM Write Once Read Many Cartridges
278. r Of Failed Logins Before Password Is Locked Choose the maximum number of failed logins before the password is locked The factory default value is 5 Possible range for this configuration option is 0 10 There is no limitation if 0 is selected Note When a password is locked the login cannot continue First you must complete a valid login with an admin account where the admin can Chapter 5 Operations 5 53 change a password or a restore factory default password from the operator panel if the admin account is the one that is locked out e Maximum Number Of Days Before Password Must Be Changed Choose the maximum number of days before the password must be changed The factory default value is 90 Possible range for this configuration option is 0 365 There is no limitation if 0 is selected Click one e Refresh Cancels the changes that are made to the screen e Submit Applies the changes that are made to the screen Configure Library Date amp Time This page allows the user to set the time and date and how it will be displayed Datestime a SS Time 24H fiz a1 iv Date Month foa Day hi Year 2008 Retresh Submit a 7ug061 Figure 5 46 The Configure Library Date amp Time page Time 24H Using a 24 hour format enter the current hour minutes and seconds Date Enter the current month day and year Click one of the following e Refresh to cancel the changes made to the screen e Submit to
279. r supply will need replacement If the green LED is lit DC power is OK and active Cooling Fan Grill D a Thumb Screws a Power Receptacle 7 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide If the Library does not power on 1 With library power OFF and the power cord unplugged loosen the three thumb screws H grasp two of the thumb screws pull the power supply out half way reseat the power supply and tighten the three thumb screws Ensure the power cord is plugged in at the power supply H and at the electrical outlet then turn library power ON a For power supplies with LED s the Blue LED will be lit if AC power is good b If your power supply does not have LED s feel for air flowing out of the cooling fan grill on the rear of the library Ef AC is good if air is flowing from the cooling fan grill If power appears to be missing a Plug the power cord into another electrical outlet b If power is still missing plug another device into the outlet to test c If the outlet tests OK try another power cord with the library For power supplies with LED s if the Amber LED is lit replace the power supply refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 10 If your power supply has no LED s and you have verified that the electrical outlet works properly but the power supply is still failing replace it refer to Replacing a Power Supply on page 10 10 If t
280. rage slot must be reserved Res or RSVD e Reserving a slot is accomplished by reducing the Active Slot count in any particular logical library A reserved slot or slots is always the last slot in the last magazine of any particular logical library A cleaning cartridge that is in a reserved slot is available to any logical library drive even if the reserved slot is not in that particular logical library If the library contains multiple logical libraries typically the last logical library is chosen to be the reserved slot containing the cleaning cartridge As with a library with a single logical library this slot is the last physical slot in the library top right magazine uppermost rear slot 2 The Auto Clean function must be Enabled e Operator Control Panel Configure gt Library Settings gt Auto Clean Enabled e Web User Interface Configure Library gt General gt Auto Clean Enabled gt check box Note Enabling Auto Clean without first reserving a slot for the cleaning cartridge will result in the library System Status screen web UI reporting the following attention conditions e Media Attention e Chk Media Rsvd Slot 3 To install a cleaning cartridge in the 2U or 4U library a Properly label the cleaning cartridge CLNxxxLx Refer to Chapter 6 b Place the cleaning cartridge in the library using the same procedure described in Populating the Library with Data Cartridges on page 4 42 Ensure the cleaning cartridg
281. rary Moves The total number of cartridge moves that are carried out by the library accessor I O Station Indicates whether the I O station is open or closed Date Time Gives the current date and time that is set in the library Under Monitor gt Library gt Identity are the following items Service Tag the service tag of the library Version the current level of library firmware installed Vendor ID Dell Product ID TL2000 TL4000 Active Slots Number of active slots in each logical library WWNN Worldwide Node Name of the library Lib x Mode Current library mode Random or Sequential Note X the number of logical libraries 1 4 partitions Under Monitor gt Library gt Error Log a list of errors is logged by the library The errors are displayed beginning with the most recent error Under Monitor gt Library gt Network are the following items IP Stack Internet Protocol used by the library DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol records whether DHCP is ON or OFF IP Addresses IP Internet Protocol addresses of the library Stateless auto configuration Indicates whether stateless auto configuration is enabled Prefix Length The length of the IP address prefix Netmask The Network Mask address of the library Static IPv6 Address The static IPv6 address of the library Link Local IPv6 Address Local link only IPv6 address of the library Assigned IPv6 Address IPv6 address or addr
282. re predefines the selection of the cartridges After initialization the firmware causes the library to select the first available cartridge found counting from the I O Station through the last slot in your library for loading into the drive Important If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than one drive only the first drive in the Logical Library will be utilized Autoload Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first available cartridge slot with the lowest numerical value that contains a cartridge automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive Loop Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the lowest numerical slot after the cartridge in the highest numerical slot has been filled and sent back to its home slot This allows endless backup operations without user interaction e Active Slots Select the number of active slots you would like to assign in your library This item will affect the number of Res Reserved Slots in our library For more information refer to Configuring I O Stations and Reserving Slots on page 5 67 Note Slots can be reserved so that they are invisible to the host It may be necessary to reserve slots in order to match the number of available slots to the ISV software licensing Slots will be reserved starting with the highest element address If your library does not have a dedicated cleaning cartridge slot and you desire to enable Auto Clean
283. re use Important Do not place the library on the front panel or the rear panel as this may damage the library The display should NOT be touched during the removal of the unit from the packaging 4 Remove all clear plastic protective sheets from the library a77ug194 Figure 4 1 Removing the plastic protective sheets from the library Verifying the shipment Verify that the following items are included in your library shipment e With every library Power cord 4 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Bar code labels Foot pads for desktop installation e With every library that contains a SCSI drive SCSI terminator one per SCSI drive SCSI library to host cable if ordered by customer e With every library that contains a Fibre Channel drive Fibre Channel library to host switch cable if ordered by customer e With every library that contains a SAS drive SAS library to host cable if ordered by customer e Rack Mount Kit Important If your library did not contain preinstalled drives then install them now Refer to Removing Installing Adding a Tape Drive Sled on page 10 3 for instructions on installing your tape drives Installing the Library Foot Pads for Desktop Installation ONLY If you intend to install your library in a rack skip this step and proceed to e 4 4 Important Operating your library on a flat surface without foot pads may d
284. reconfigured 4U Unit with only FH drives 1 logical library 257 256 4U Unit with FH and HH drives 1 logical library a77ug165 Figure 3 5 Examples of SCSI element addressing The SCSI specification does not allow gaps in the SCSI element addressing Special handling is needed for empty drive slots to fulfill the specification Also temporarily removed drives need to have their addresses preserved to not confuse the attached host and host application Generally only drives which are currently physically available or temporarily removed are reported Empty unused slots located at the bottom or the top should not be reported with an exception in case of a removed condition A drive slot which does not contain a drive and has a position between used slots needs to be reported as a SCSI element To signal the host application that this slot is not usable its ACCESS bit will be disabled Note When reducing the number of drives in your library update the Logical Library configuration This will remove the Attention LED on the front panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen indicating that a drive iS missing Updating the Logical Library configuration will also update the drive element addressing and drive numbering Replacing LTO half height drives with full height drives may require you to execute Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the drive element addressing and drive numbering See Configure
285. required or latest available Operating System files and or updates dll s PTF s etc have been installed and applied Identifying a Suspect Cartridge The amber Attention LED will be lit on the front panel of the library when there has been a failure that indicates a piece of media is bad marginal or invalid It will be cleared when all invalid cartridges have been exported from the library Note The amber LED may also be lit because a power supply or a power supply fan is failing Refer to Isolating a Power Supply Problem on page 7 7 1 Identify the media using the Web User Interface Monitor Library gt Inventory Expand the cartridge details for each magazine and look for media status in the Attn column of the inventory table 2 Make note of the cartridge location Slot and VOLSER Label in the inventory table 3 To remove the cartridge from the library a Using the web select Manage Library gt Move Media If the cartridge is not in an I O Station slot move the cartridge to an I O Station slot b Using the OCP select Control gt Open I O Station 7 12 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 4 Remove cartridge If cartridge was reported as Bad properly dispose the cartridge 5 Close the I O Station If the amber LED was lit because of bad media the Attention LED will turn OFF If the amber LED is still on check the power supply or the power supply fans See
286. required to reboot the library after library diagnostics completes to ensure proper library re detection on some backup applications Service Service Drives Clean Drive Service Service Drive Power a 7ug058 Figure 5 24 Service Service menu The following drive diagnostics and service procedures are available in this menu e Clean Drive The accessor takes the cleaning cartridge from the dedicated cleaning cartridge slot DCS or previously reserved slot if no DCS is available and inserts it into the drive After the cleaning is complete the accessor removes the cleaning cartridge from the drive and returns it to the dedicated cleaning cartridge slot or reserved slot e Drive Tests Power On Self Test POST Normal Read Write Test Head Test Media Test 1 4 op Navigate to the desired test Service gt Service gt Drive Tests Select the drive if more than one is installed Press the Enter button Press either or to toggle drive test options Move the cursor to the lt Run gt option ooo oF P Press the Enter button to apply the test Follow the instructions displayed on the Operator Control Panel and if required insert a blank or scratch cartridge into the I O Station when requested The test will execute If the test PASSES resume normal library operations If the test FAILS an error will be displayed Make note of the error then refer to Isolating Drive Sled Probl
287. rial or equivalent Also lower the leveling pads to raise the casters off the pallet and bolt the rack cabinet to the pallet R002 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Preface This manual contains information and instructions necessary for the installation operation and service of the Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library Related Publications Refer to the following publications for additional information e Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library Getting Started Guide provides installation information e Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library SCSI Reference provides supported SCSI commands and protocol governing the behavior of SCSI interface xvii xviii Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Chapter 1 Product Description The Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library 2U library and the Dell PowerVault TL4000 Tape Library 4U library provide compact high capacity low cost solutions for simple unattended data backup The 4U library houses up to 48 tape cartridges or 45 and an elective 3 slot I O Station in a compact 4U form factor with easy access to cartridges via four removable magazines The 2U library houses up to 24 tape cartridges or 23 and an elective 1 slot I O Station in a compact 2U form factor with easy access to cartridges via two removable magazines T
288. ries and leave the settings as they were e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Configuring Logs and Traces using the Web User Interface This function is not available on the Operator Control Panel 1 Click Configure Library gt Logs amp Traces in the left navigation pane Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 33 Logs amp Traces ro ea rete O Continuous O Stop Trace At First Error Stopped Trace Lewel Cmd Response Event Trace Data Low Level Recovered Trace Error Hard Error Trace Filter Main Drive CDB Interpreter Robotic Trace OCP Input OCP SCSI Module SDCI Module Qutput a77ug071 Figure 4 36 The Configure Library Logs and Traces screen 2 For Error Log Mode select Continuous so all information for logs and traces will be captured 3 Trace Level and Trace Filter options can be changed by Service personnel only 4 Click one of the following e Refresh to cancel all of your entries and leave the settings as they were e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Entering Email Notification Information using the Web User Interface This function is not available on the Operator Control Panel Use this menu item to set up email notification of library errors and warnings 1 Click Configure Library gt Email Notification in the left navigation pane Event Notification otify Errors C on otify Wamings C On o Email Address MTP Server Address IPv4 0 0 0
289. rmware can be found at http support dell com 2 Enable library managed encryption on the library via the license key if not already licensed Please refer to Confi i l ion e 5 46 for activation instructions If you purchased library managed encryption at the time you purchased your library a hard copy of the license key is provided with your library as a backup If there are any issues with the license key for library managed encryption purchased with the library please visit E TAE obtain your license key You will need the library serial number and worldwide node name to obtain the license key Please refer to the following tables in this document for instructions on locating this information e Table 1 2 for library serial number e Table 5 6 for library worldwide node name If this does not resolve your issue please contact Dell technical support 3 Configure library managed encryption on your library Please refer to Configure Library Encryption on page 5 46 for instructions 4 Install the IBM SKLM application on the server designated as the key manager Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for information 5 Configure the IBM SKLM application Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for information 6 Start the IBM SKLM application Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for information Note All encryption settings should be configured or re verified in the drive after a
290. rtificate is installed at manufacturing time Each drive receives a unique serial number and certificate The T10 application may validate each drive instance by checking the drive s digital certificate Chapter 1 Product Description 1 5 CAUTION The library must be offline from any user and all media must be removed from the drives before license keys are installed or an configuration modifications are made Please refer to Power ON OFF on page 2 4 and Removing Cartridges from Magazine Slots on page for instructions to take the library offline and to eject media from the drives To prevent possible data loss due to a key management server failure Dell recommends the use of a primary and secondary key management server This configuration provides redundancy in the event the primary key management server is down or unavailable Please refer to IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online at http www 01 ibm com support knowledgecenter SSWPVP welcome lang en for information on configuring a primary and secondary key management server for your library If the backup job fails due to a key management server failure the job recovers if connectivity is restored to the key management server prior to expiration of the timeout set in the tape backup software application Enabling library managed encryption on a PowerVault TL2000 or TL4000 is a 6 step process 1 Upgrade the library and drive firmware to the latest versions The fi
291. rtridges must have CLNxxxLx as part of the bar code With Auto Clean disabled the cleaning tape can be stored in any data slot if you wish to manually clean the drives This is not recommended With Auto Clean disabled the cleaning tape can be stored in any data slot if it was put there under Backup Application control In other words the Backup Application is controlling the cleaning of the tape drives and the cleaning tape would be imported into this library under its control Chapter 5 Operations 5 21 Note The universal cleaning cartridge has a bar code CLNUxxLx This cleaning cartridge is used to clean all LTO generation tape drives For Auto Clean to function the following criteria must be met On 4U libraries with library firmware of 80 or lower that still contain a Dedicated Cleaning Slot DCS or 4U libraries with library firmware higher than 1 95 that chose to retain the DCS in their library a CLN cartridge must be present in that slot On libraries that don t have a DCS a storage slot must be reserved RSVD by reducing the active slot count by one A cleaning cartridge CLNxxxLx must be placed or moved to the reserved slot Auto Clean must be enabled Note Cleaning cartridges must be replaced after 50 cleanings The Web User Interface inventory screen will show the number of times the media has been loaded not the number of cleaning sessions remaining Subtract this number from 50 to determine
292. s Refer to Isolating a Librar Controller Card vs Accessor Enclosure Problem on page SCSI cartridge belongs to another Check apelicaionsolnvare partition Incompatible medium Check the compatibility of media and drive generation All slots full no movement possible Remove a cartridge to make a move possible All slots empty required for wellness test Fill up required slots before the wellness test is started SCSI failure in LME interface 1 49 4A AB 4C 4D E PT SCSI robotic axes motors aren t initialized 50 51 52 53 Check your Encryption configuration Run Key Path Diagnostics Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for information SCSI invalid license key entered Reenter license key If problem persists refer to technical support Recovered Error SCSI parity error No user action is required Recovered Error Error log overflow Illegal request downgrade prohibited Disable encryption for firmware downgrade Incompatible medium generation Replace incorrect cartridges Illegal request downgrade that is prohibited because of incompatible network stack Illegal request wrong drive FW for drive Obtain correct drive firmware image Full height drive in illegal position Check correct Drive position Cleaning cartridge installed Complete the cleaning process and retry the operation 1 Cleaning failure Cleaning process could not be performed 55 58 39 5A 5B
293. s Half High drive and TD means Full High drive Serial This is the unique identification number of the tape X X Number drive that was assigned by the manufacturer 5 34 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 5 7 Drive Identity page elements continued Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U aii Only Version 2 V2 half high drives will have a Rp separate version line with the number 2 gt lt This is the current level of firmware installed on the drive For information on updating your firmware refer Firmware Revision SCSI ID This is the unique identifier assigned to the SCSI drive to enable it to receive communications from the host computer This is the unique identifier assigned to the drive that allows the host to recognize and communicate with the drive Control Path If the drive communicates all messages from the host to the library then it is considered the control path drive If the drive is the control path drive this element displays Yes If not this element displays No All drives in a logical library may be a control path drive Data If the drive is compressing data this element displays Compression Yes If not this element displays No Interface This identifies the drive host interface Type Node Name _ This is the Worldwide node Name assigned to a Fibre X drive Worldwide This is the Worldwide ID assigned to a SAS drive X ID a
294. s added you will have to rebuild the initrd and reboot the server There is a way to test this before editing the files and rebooting but there s too much of a risk of taking down other SCSI devices in the process Rebuilding the initrd will be the tricky part You have to know exactly which kernel version you want to use to do this properly You can find out the kernel version by using the uname command uname r 2 4 9 e 38 Note There is a list of known kernel versions on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux page 4 So given the version is 2 4 9 e 38 cp boot initrd 2 4 9 e 38 img boot initrd 2 4 9 e 38 img bak mkinitrd f v boot initrd 2 4 9 e 38 img 2 4 9 e 38 This should give some output then go to a new prompt If it gives any errors check the syntax you put into etc modules conf or contact someone knowledgeable with Linux 5 If successful the server WILL need to be rebooted Once it comes back up check proc scsi scsi again cat proc scsi scsi Attached devices Host scsiQ Channel 00 Id 06 Lun 00 Vendor IBM Model ULT3580 HH3 Rev 88M3 Type Sequential Access ANSI SCSI revision 03 Host scsi0 Channel 00 Id 06 Lun 01 Vendor IBM Model 3573 TL Rev 7 10 Type Medium Changer ANSI SCSI revision 05 Enabling LUN Support in Netware 1 From the System Console verify the LUN device is not being detected by using the list storage adapters command Typical output where only the tape drive is being recognize
295. s serviced by DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server the network parameters will be automatically set Once remote access has been established you can complete the configuration of your library using the Web User Interface 1 Access the Configure menu using the Operator Control Panel a From the screen that shows the library logo Home screen press either the UP or DOWN button to get to the Main Menu b Press the DOWN button to select Configure c Press the SELECT button to display the Configure menu 4 20 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 2 Press the DOWN button to highlight the Network menu 3 Press the SELECT button to display the Network screen 4 Select IP STACK and press the SELECT button to highlight the Internet Protocol field a Press the DOWN or UP button to scroll through the Internet Protocol options b Press the SELECT button on the desired Internet Protocol If you select IPv6 protocol the Configure Network menu will include options for Stateless Autoconfig and Prefix length e Stateless Autoconfig Press the DOWN button to highlight Stateless Autoconfig Press the SELECT button to highlight the Stateless Autoconfig option field Press the DOWN button to scroll through the Stateless Autoconfig options Press the SELECT button to apply the option e Prefix Length Press the DOWN button to highlight Prefix Length Press the SEL
296. screen 2 6 4U library System Status screen 2 6 4U library System Status screen showing media attention status B 4U library System Status screen honna a power supply failure 2 7 Configuration of a one painon ro 3 4 Configuration of a two partition system 3 4 Configuration of a three partition system 3 5 Configuration of a four partition system 3 5 Examples of SCSI element addressing 3 6 Removing the Plastic protective sheets from the library 4 2 Installing foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure 44 Shipping lock and label 4 5 Removing the Shipping lock and label 4 5 Library shipping lock and label storage location on rear panel of library 46 Rack Kit A mounting hardware 4 7 Rack Kit B mounting hardware 4 8 Examples of EIA units for round hole and square hole installations 4 9 Rear view of Rack Kit A which hon Me narrow part of the rail located at the rear of the rack 4 9 Rear view of Rack Kit B howe a Aiton mounting method 4 10 Kit A top picture with circles horne rails installed Rack Kit B is below showing the front view of this kit installed 4 11 2U library rack anchors and mounting brackets 4 12 Close up view of moue of the anchor on both sides of the library 4 12 2U library side screws to remove 4 13 Sliding the 2U library into the rack 4 14 Sliding the 4U library into the rack 4 14
297. see Chapter 6 Using Ultrium Media on page 6 1 Chapter 1 Product Description 1 11 Library Specifications Physical Specifications Table 1 5 Physical Specifications Rack mount 87 6 mm 3 44 in Rack mount 175 2 mm 6 9 in Height stand alone 97 6 mm 3 84 in stand alone 185 2 mm 7 3 in Wid Dep 447 5 mm 17 6 in 447 5 mm 17 6 in Rack mount 740 mm 29 13 in Rack mount 740 mm 29 13 in th stand alone 810 mm 31 9 in stand alone 810 mm 31 9 in Weight with 1 drive and without media 15 59 kg 34 37 Ibs 21 32 kg 47 lbs Weight with media 20 67 kg 45 57 lbs 31 71 kg 69 9 lbs Power Specifications Table 1 6 Power Specifications AC power voltage 100 127 VAC 200 240 VAC 4 2 A Line frequency 50 60 Hz Operation Specifications Table 1 7 Operation Specifications Ultrium 6 Library with l Hoare dn A 2 4U Library Maximum number of data cartridges 24 Maximum number of data cartridges 48 Native 60 TB Native 120 TB Compressed 150 TB 2 5 1 compression Compressed 300 TB 2 5 1 compression Number of slots 24 including I O Station 48 Including 3 I O Station slots sustained native Ultrium 6 Drive 160 MB s data transfer rate Drive t Ultrium 6 Half Height Drive PES Fibre Channel SAS 8 Gb s Fibre Channel Interfaces 6 Gb s SAS Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization Maximum storage capacity Table 1 8 Opera
298. ser has to make sure they match the EKM properties file Note If SSL is enabled the encryption host configuration will request a SSL port instead_of a TCP port Review your IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online at http www 01 ibm com support knowledgecenter SSWPVP welcome lang en for instructions to locate the appropriate port settings 8 Click Submit to apply the changes 9 Install the IBM SKLM application on your host Refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online for information on locating the appropriate IP address and port Choosing Drive s Interface Identification Settings 1 Click Configure Library gt Drives in the left navigation pane Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 29 Drives Drive 1 Logical Library 1 Power On Control Path Note SAS drives do not require user configuration Drive Logical Library Power On Control Path SCSI ID Drive 3 Logical Library 3 Powe Gin Control Path Port A Configuration a Automatic Topology LN Port FC AL Loop ID Port B Configuration Port not available a 7ug095 Figure 4 31 The Configure Library Drive screen 2 Select the desired settings for each drive listed either SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel See Figure 4 31 3 Click one of the following e Refresh to update the current screen e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Entering Library Network Settings This page shows the current network configuration of the library and a
299. shortcuts to activities that can be performed via the Operator Control Panel and or the Web User Interface Before using the Operator Control Panel or the Web user Interface please review the information in Chapter 3 User Interfaces Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts Information Activity Accessor number of cartridge moves Auto Clean enable Cartridge currently active moving Cartridge determine encryption Cartridge Move Cartridge currently in drive n Cartridge label and slot source Cartridge in drive n cartridge slot source Configuration Menu Navigation Shortcuts Monitor gt Library gt Status gt Cycles Monitor Configure gt Library Settings gt Auto Clean Monitor gt Library gt Status gt Act Cart Not available with this interface Monitor gt Inventory gt Magazines Control gt Move Cartridges Monitor gt Inventory gt Drive n Monitor gt Drive gt Status gt Drive n Configure gt Save Restore Status Configure Library gt General Monitor Library gt Library Status Monitor Library gt Inventory Manage Library gt Perform Inventory Manage Library gt Move Media Monitor Library gt Drive Status Monitor Library gt Drive Status Configure Library gt Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info Monitor Library gt Library Monitor Library Library Status on
300. slot 2 or drive slot 3 drive will occupy slot 3 and slot 4 A full height drive sled should never be installed in drive slot 2 drive will occupy slot 2 and slot 3 Mixing of Drives The library supports a mix of full height and half height drives in the same physical library and the same logical library They support a mix of drives in the same physical library and the same logical library They will also support a mix of SCSI SAS and Fibre Channel in the same physical library and the same logical library however mixing drive interface types in the same logical library is not recommended Important Drives that do not share a common media type cannot be mixed in the same logical library For instance Gen 3 and Gen 6 drives cannot use the same media and so they cannot be mixed LTO 3 media cannot be read on LTO 6 drives Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 3 Drive 2 Element Address Drive 1 Element Address 256 Configuration of a 1 Partition System A one partition system configured for a 4U library contains any and all drives present in any drive positions and it will contain all four magazines When configured with one logical partition the Element Address assignments will be as follows DTE assignments will be as shown in STE assignments e Logical Library 1 Slot1 through 23 4096 0x1000 through 4118 0x1016 as shown in Figure 3 4 on page 3 5 Drive 4 Drive 4 Element Address es Element Address 259 rive 259
301. smatch and display a message entitled VPD Selection on the Operator Control Panel The library will need your input to determine which copy of VPD to write to the replacement library enclosure If you are replacing both the Library enclosure and the Library Controller Card transfer VPD after installing one part before installing the other If the message VPD Selection is displayed at the Operator Control Panel carefully highlight the VPD from Controller option before selecting OK This will copy VPD from the controller to the replacement library enclosure 1 Swap the Library Controller Card in the defective library with the Library Controller Card in the replacement library enclosure a Remove the Library Controller Card see Figure 10 19 on page 10 21 in the defective library and in the replacement library enclosure To remove a Library Controller Card 1 Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews on the Library Controller Card 2 Grasp the thumbscrews and pull the card out of the library b Install the Library Controller Card from the defective library in the replacement library enclosure Install the Library Controller Card from the replacement library enclosure in the defective library to return to Dell To install a Library Controller Card 1 Grasp the Library Controller Card faceplate and align the Library Controller Card with the groove in the enclosure rails 2 Push the Library Controller Card forward u
302. ss allows access outside the local network Enter IPv6 settings if applicable a Enable DHCP Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by the DHCP server b Enable Stateless Auto Config Stateless Auto config is ALWAYS on not defeatable c Static Address Enter the assigned IPv6 address The format of an IPv6 IP address is a 128 bit numeric address written as 8 groups of four numbers separated by colons d Prefix length The default prefix length is set to 64 but can be set to any length depending upon the address used e Gateway address Enter the assigned IPv6 Gateway address This address allows access outside the local network Click one of the following Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 31 e Refresh to cancel the changes made to the screen e Submit to apply the changes made to the screen Note Depending on the changes made you will either be disconnected and need to login again or reboot the library If a reboot is required the following Warning message will appear after the Submit button is clicked Changes Will Take Effect After A Reboot a 7ug171 Figure 4 33 Warning Screen The library must be rebooted or the changes will not take place Entering User Access Information using the Web User Interface The Configure Library gt User Access page is only accessible to the Admin and Service login Access is denied to User and Superuser logins
303. structions in the Dell PowerVault TL4000 Failover Configuration Guide to configure your environment for failover Configure Library Encryption Note Application Managed Encryption AME does not require a license key Library Managed Encryption requires a license key Contact your TSR technical sales representative to purchase this feature Important The Advanced Encryption Settings are for Engineering Support use only These fields should always be set to No Advanced Setting Minimum Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption AME LTO 6 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 6 Tape Drive e Ultrium 6 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level B 50 or higher e Drive firmware level C800 or higher for reference go to http support dell com e Tape backup software application that supports LTO 6 encryption Minimum Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption AME LTO 5 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Drive e Ultrium 5 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level 9 00 or higher e Drive firmware level BBNE BBNEF or higher for reference go to http support dell com e Tape backup software application that supports LTO 5 encryption Minimum Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption AME LTO 4 e SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive e Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge e Library firmware level 5 80 or higher e Drive firmware level 77BE or higher e Tape backup software application that supports
304. such as Library Mode the entry of one option precludes any other options from being selected In such cases the details of the non applicable options are not shown If OCP Access PIN has been enabled the default PIN is 1234 5 28 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Configure Set Date and Time Use this menu item to set the current date and time in your library Configure Set Date and Time a 7ug046 Figure 5 20 Configure Set Date and Time menu Configure Path Failover Use this menu item to enter the Path Failover Feature Activation key Supported on 4U library only for library firmware levels at or below 8 xx Supported on both the 2U and 4U libraries with library firmware levels above 8 xx Configure Path Failover a 7ug119 Figure 5 21 Configure Path Failover Library firmware levels higher than 8 xx support Path Failover on LTO 5 and LTO 4 drives For LTO Ultrium 6 Tape Drives use Library firmware B 50 or greater if you want to support Path Failover For more information refer to the Dell Power Vault TL2000 TL4000 Failover Configuration Guide included with the library documentation Service Menu The 2U 4U library is always online except for when the user enters the Service Library area A warning message appears stating that the library should be taken offline from the host before performing any Service functions It is up to the operator to ensure that it is ta
305. sure if this was not done previous see Installing your drive in Installing your drive in our drive in the replacement library enclosure on page 10 16 the replacement library enclosure on page 10 16 library enclosure on page 10 16 10 18 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 2 Swap the Power Supply in the defective library with the Power Supply in the replacement library enclosure a Remove the power supply from the defective library and from the replacement library enclosure To remove a power supply from a library 1 2 3 Loosen the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply Pull on two of the thumbscrews on opposite sides of the power supply and pull the unit away from the rear panel of the library Grasp the top and bottom edges of the power supply and remove it from the library b Install the power supply removed from the replacement library enclosure in the defective library to return to Dell To install a power supply 1 2 3 While supporting the power supply align the power supply with the groove in the enclosure rails Push the power supply forward until it is properly seated Tighten the thumbscrews a66mi096 Figure 10 18 A power supply being removed from a library 3 4 Plug the power cord into the replacement library enclosure then into a power source Power ON the replacement library enclosure a If power ON is suc
306. system must have four drives Each partition contains one drive and one magazine When configured with four logical partitions the Element_Address assignments will be as follows DTE assignments will be as shown in STE assignments e Logical Library 1 Slot 1 through slot 9 4096 x1000 through 4104 0x1008 e Logical Library 2 Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 x1000 through 4107 0x100B e Logical Library 3 Slot 22 through slot 33 4096 x1000 through 4107 Ox100B e Logical Library 4 Slot 34 through slot 45 4096 x1000 through 4107 0x100B Drive 4 Element Address Drive 3 Element Address Magazine VECE 2 4 Drive 2 Element Address SE 1 3 Front side Drive 1 Element Address a 7ug164 Figure 3 4 Configuration of a four partition system Chapter 3 Installation Planning 3 5 SCSI Element Addressing Every logical library starts at the first drive slot with the current assigned element start address default value 256 It will be incremented from the bottom to the top slots for every drive slot There is one exception to this addressing scheme to accommodate libraries currently in the field A 4U library containing only full height drives will continue to have the addresses assignments 256 and 257 thus causing no interruptions to their operation Drive slots will still be incremented by 1 for each drive slot position Note Exchanging drives with different form factors will result in the library needing to be
307. t e Target 2 IP Address Enter an optional second IP address where SNMP traps are sent or leave as 0 0 0 0 e Target 3 IP Address Enter an optional third IP address where SNMP traps are sent or leave as 0 0 0 0 e Version The library offers three versions of the SNMP protocol v1 v2 and v3 Select a version for each Target IP address e Audit Logging If SNMP is enabled and Audit Logging is enabled the library sends SNMP traps to an SNMP Management console when the library or tape drive configuration changes Note This option is available only if the library firmware is 9 00 or higher and the latest library MIB file is added to the SNMP Management console SNMP V3 SECURITY e User Name Enter your preferred name or leave as initial e Authentication The options for Authentication are none MD5 or SHA e Authentication Password The Authentication Password must be at least 8 characters in length If Authentication is set to none this field and the Privacy and Privacy Password fields are disabled e Privacy The options for Privacy are none or DES If Privacy is set to none then the Privacy Password field is disabled e Privacy Password The Privacy Password must be at least 8 characters in length Note The factory default settings for SNMP V3 Security are e User Name initial e Authentication none e Privacy none Configure Library Save Restore Configuration This page allows the library confi
308. t Do not expose the cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight Do not expose recorded or blank cartridges to stray magnetic fields of greater than 100 oersteds for example terminals motors video equipment X ray equipment or fields that exist near high current cables or power supplies Such exposure can cause the loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge unusable Environmental and Shipping Maintain the conditions that are described in 6 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Perform a Thorough Inspection After purchasing a cartridge and before using it perform the following steps e Inspect the cartridge s packaging to determine potential rough handling e When inspecting a cartridge open only the cartridge door Do not open any other part of the cartridge case The upper and lower parts of the case are held together with screws separating them destroys the usefulness of the cartridge e Inspect the cartridge for damage before using or storing it e Inspect the rear of the cartridge the part that loads first into the tape load compartment and ensure that there are no gaps in the seam of the cartridge case If there are gaps in the seam see Figure 6 6 the leader pin may be dislodged a69i0078 Figure 6 6 Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge e Check that the leader pin is properly seated e If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it
309. t If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than one drive only the first drive in the Logical Library will be utilized Chapter 5 Operations 5 43 Table 5 11 Configure Library Specific page elements continued Active Slots It may be necessary to modify the number of active slots to agree with the number of slots allowed by your host software To modify the number of active slots in your library click on the drop down list and select the number of slots you want active in your library Also the Auto Clean function requires the cleaning cartridge to be in a DCS or reserved slot Reserved slots are created by reducing the number of active slots General Library Name 1 0 Station Enabled Auto Clean Enabled Barcode Label Length ia iy Reported To Host Extended Configuration for Logical Libraries Logical Library 1 Library Mode ordain O Sequential Autoload Loop Active Slots 37 a Logical Library 2 Library Mode TE O Sequential Autoload Loop Active Slots 33 ae Apply Selections Figure 5 35 The 4U library Configure Library General and Extended page Configure Library Logical Libraries a 7ug094 To partition your multi drive library select the number of logical libraries you would like to create in your library then click Submit One cartridge magazine cannot be assigned to two logical libraries If you partition a multi drive library each of the magazines must
310. t Control gt Magazine Choose the desired magazine to unlock remove 2 Pull out the magazine and insert a data cartridge s into the empty slots 3 Push the magazine back into the library The library will automatically start an inventory 4 To move cartridges in the magazine once they are inserted from the OCP Main Menu select Control gt Move Cartridges and move the data cartridges into the desired slots See Control Move Cartridges on page 5 17 or Move Media on page 5 41 for more information Note If you run a library configuration backup program on your host computer use the program to run an audit of the library after new cartridges have been added to update the backup program Export Media To remove cartridges from your library using your I O Station follow these steps 1 From the OCP Main Menu select Control gt Move Cartridges and move the 2 From the OCP Main Menu select Control gt Open I O Station The I O Station will unlock itself The I O station slot opens and the Unlocking I O station message displays Wait for the Insert remove cartridge and close I O station message to insert or remove the cartridge then close the I O station by gently pushing the slot back into the left magazine Note It is recommended to wait for the messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure that the library is ready to handle the cartridges 3 Pull out the I O Station and take out the dat
311. t is designed to prevent eavesdropping tampering and message forgery SSP Serial SCSI Protocol ST Store standard feature The significant design elements of a product that are included as part of the fundamental product START Start maintenance StartTLS Secure LDAP communication that uses TLS Storage Management Initiative Specification SMI S A storage standard that is developed and maintained by the Storage Networking Industry Association SNIA It is also ratified as an ISO standard The main objective of SMI S is to enable broad interoperable management of heterogeneous storage vendor systems subsystem A secondary or subordinate system capable of operating independently of or asynchronously with a controlling system SUPP Support sync Synchronous synchronize Occurring with a regular or predictable time relationship System managed encryption Tape encryption is set up implicitly through the device driver T tachometer tach A device that emits pulses that are used to measure check speed or distance tape cartridge A container that holds magnetic tape that can be processed without separating it from the container tape void An area in the tape in which no signal can be detected Glossary I 17 TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCU Tape control unit TH Thermal thread load operation A procedure that places tape along the tape path TM Tapemark transport mode E
312. t not supported by the drive 30 02 Incompatible Format An operation could not be completed because the Logical Format is not correct 30 03 Cleaning Cartridge Installed An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge in the drive is a cleaning cartridge 30 05 Cannot write medium incompatible format 30 07 Cleaning Failure A cleaning operation was attempted but could not be completed for some reason 30 OC Data Protect WORM overwrite attempted The drive rejected a write operation because it would have resulted in an overwrite Overwrite is not allowed on WORM media 30 OD Medium Error WORM integrity check The drive rejected a Read or Write operation because the cartridge is a suspicious WORM cartridge 31 00 Media format corrupted Data could not be read because the format on tape is not valid but is a known format A failure occurred attempting to write the FID 37 00 Rounded parameter A Mode Select command parameter has been rounded because the drive can not store it with the accuracy of the command 3A 00 Media Not Present A media access command has been received when there is no cartridge loaded 3B 00 Sequential Positioning Error A command has failed and left the logical position at an unexpected location 3B OC Position past beginning of medium 3D 00 Invalid bits in identify Message An illegal Identify Message has been received at the drive at the start of a command 3E 00 Logical
313. t of library foot pads These items are included with the replacement library enclosure due to safety agency requirements These unused parts will be removed from the replacement library enclosure and returned to Dell in the defective library The old parts currently in your defective library will be removed and installed into the replacement library enclosure Note To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment e observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual material handling e obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the library during installation or removal Minimum Installation Time 1 hr Minimum Number of Persons Required 2 Recommended Tools 2 Phillips screw driver paper clip blank or scratch data cartridge Preparing the Defective Library for Replacement 1 If possible use the Operator Control Panel to unload any drives that contain a cartridge Control gt Move Cartridges 2 Power OFF the defective library 3 Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the defective library 4 If the defective library is rack mounted remove the two screws iJ in Figure 10 12 on page 10 14 from the front of the defective library anchoring the mounting brackets on the library to the rack With assistance remove the defective library from the rack Chapter 10 Check Adjust Remove and Replace 10 13 a 7ug244 Figure 10 12 Removing the two mounting bracket screws anchorin
314. t panel e If the problem persists contact technical support Library Pick Retry There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader picking a cartridge from a drive or slot e No action needs to be taken at this time If the problem persists contact technical support This flag is cleared when the next move command is received Drive Load There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader or drive when Retry placing a cartridge into a drive e No action needs to be taken at this time If the problem persists contact technical support This flag is cleared when the next move command is received There is a mechanical problem with the library media I O Station It is set when a magazine is removed from the changer W Library security has been compromised The door was opened then closed during operation It is set when the changer is set offline Library I O Station 04d 13d 14d 15d 17d 18d 19d Library Security 21d 2 25d 27d 32d E E Library Place W There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader placing a cartridge Retry into a slot e No action needs to be taken at this time e If the problem persists contact technical support This flag is cleared when the next move command is received E a sO Media I Changer 4d Library C The library has detected an inconsistency in its inventory Inventory e Redo the library inventory to correct inconsistency e Restart th
315. t when a hardware failure occurs that requires that you reset the tape drive to recover 31 Hardware B Set when the tape drive fails its Note the error code on the internal Power On Self Tests single character display then 32 Interface Set when the tape drive detects a problem with the host interface 33 Eject media Set when a failure occurs that requires Unload the tape cartridge then you to unload the cartridge from the reinsert it and restart the operation drive Download fail Set when an FMR image is Ensure that it is the correct FMR unsuccessfully downloaded to the image Download the FMR image tape drive through the host interface in Drive voltage Set when the drive detects that the externally supplied voltages are either approaching the specified voltage limits or are outside the voltage limits cartridge 2 Replace the tape cartridge Predictive failure of Set when a hardware failure of the drive hardware tape drive is predicted Diagnostics required Set when the drive detects a failure that requires diagnostics for isolation Tape directory invalid at Set when the tape directory on the Use your backup software to unload tape cartridge that was previously rebuild the tape directory by unloaded is corrupted The file search reading all the data performance is degraded OZ Tape system area write Set when the tape cartridge that was Copy the data to another tape failure previously unloaded
316. tend to fit a variety of rack depths Each rail requires 2U of rack space H in Figure 4 9 O O O D 5 N N 14 Figure 4 9 Rear view of Rack Kit A which shows the narrow part of the rail located at the rear of the rack Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 9 Figure 4 10 Rear view of Rack Kit B shows a different mounting method 4 10 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide a N N D 5 NX N 14 a 7ug196 b u NR N D 5 N N a Figure 4 11 Kit A top picture with circles showing rails installed Rack Kit B is below showing the front view of this kit installed Note The rail must be fastened with the bottom of the rail parallel to floor and at the same level 4 Using the Torx wrench included in your shipment remove the screws F as shown in Figure 4 12 on page 4 12 Screw locations on the 4U library are similar Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 11 a 7ug269 Figure 4 12 2U library rack anchors and mounting brackets 5 Install the library rack anchors H as shown in Figure 4 12 on each side of your library using the longest counter sunk screws included in the rack kit O N N D 5 N N 14 Figure 4 13 Close up view of mounting of the anchors on both sides of the library 4 12 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide a77ug267 Figure 4 14 2U library side screws to remove 6
317. tes As a note drive dump retrievals can be performed by the tool as well The ITDT Tool e Runs quick or extended diagnostics on tape drives If the library is online to the server host where the tool resides ITDT will communicate with the drive through the library to load and unload a test cartridge thereby exercising some library functions e Retrieves firmware dumps from tape drives and libraries e Performs a firmware update on tape drives or libraries See note below regarding library firmware update e Tests the performance of the environment by completely writing a cartridge and measuring performance e Retrieves and displays cartridge information e Verifies the encryption environment e Does not require special device drivers e Is available for most major platforms Note ITDT Version 7 or higher is required for Ultrium 5 and Ultrium 6 tape drives Before using ITDT verify that your library host operating system is at the latest released level This will ensure optimum read write operations for diagnostics Note If the library has a BCR Barcode Reader that requires 9 00 or greater firmware the Update function will terminate with an error code of Unexpected Data if you attempt to downlevel the library firmware To download the ITDT tool and instructions for using the tool visit http support dell com Chapter 9 Service Procedures 9 5 9 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User
318. that are supported by the HBA If the library attaches to a switch the supported distances are e For a multi mode 50 micron cable 1 Gbit link speed up to 500 m 1640 ft 2 Gbit link speed up to 300 m 984 ft 4 Gbit link speed up to 175 m 574 ft 8 Gbit link speed up to 150 m 492 ft e For a multi mode 62 5 micron cable 1 Gbit link speed up to 300 m 984 ft 2 Gbit link speed up to 90 m 295 ft 4 Gbit link speed up to 50 m 164 ft 8 Gbit link speed up to 21 m 68 ft Note Minimum distance for both 50 micron and 62 5 micron is 2 m 6 ft The library uses 50 micron cables internally Therefore you must use a 50 micron cable to attach to the library s port To attach to a 62 5 micron SAN you must attach the 50 micron cable to an active port such as a port on a switch Using Zoning to Isolate Devices and Enhance Security For security reasons it is important to limit the devices that a server or servers can recognize or access Also some performance configurations and SAN configurations can result in a device being seen multiple times from the same server For example if you have two HBAs from the same server connected to an Ultrium Tape Drive in the library the drive will be detected and appear as two logical devices That is there will be two special files for one physical device Zoning can address these issues 3 10 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Zo
319. the drive is LUN 0 and the library is LUN 1 These models require an HBA that supports LUN scanning which must be enabled at the HBA Refer to Logical Unit Number LUN Scanning on page 3 7 e Cable Connections Ensure that there are no bent pins on cables and that all connections are securely fastened e Fibre Channel Tape Support Ensure that Fibre Channel Tape Support is enabled on the HBA if you are installing a library with a Fibre Channel drive e SCSI Cable Length Ensure that the maximum cable length is not over 25 meters 82 ft for a single device on the bus or 12 meters 40 ft for multiple devices Internal SCSI length within the library accounts for 2 ft e SCSI Termination Verify proper termination on both ends of the SCSI bus Refer to Connecting the Host Interface Cable on page 4 16 e SAS Cables Ensure that SAS Cables are properly attached Refer to Interface Cable on page 4 16 e Backup Application Installation Refer to the documentation included with your backup application software for instructions on how to verify proper installation e Device Driver Installation 7 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Ensure that the proper device driver if applicable is installed for the library Note Many backup applications use their own drivers for the library and drive Before installing a driver make sure it will not be in conflict with the software C
320. the following 1 Unplug the power cord from the library 2 Find the access holes for the right and left magazines 9 1 gat ifi ord at W A Pa Siw heavtee Se gt See Figure 9 1 Access holes for the left magazine 9 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide a77ug025 ATTE i T Remove belore _ Operation Place in Storage location On ear panel a 7ug024 Figure 9 2 Access holes for the right magazine 3 To manually release the magazines push the end of a straightened paper clip into the access hole for each magazine at the back of the library While holding the paper clip have a second person pull the magazine out of the front of the unit DO NOT push the paper clip in more than 1 2 inch Chapter 9 Service Procedures 9 3 a 7ug248 Figure 9 3 Left magazine pulled out of the 2U library 9000000000008 Panacan a8 99908 Sees 999900000906 a 7ug246 Figure 9 4 Left Magazines pulled out of the 4U Library 4 If there are additional tapes still in the library or if you were unable to manually remove the magazines and drive contact technical support for further instructions 9 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Using the ITDT Firmware Update Dump Retrieval and Drive Test Tool ITDT has multiple functional capability and is a very quick convenient and efficient method for drive firmware upda
321. the library sends SNMP traps to an SNMP Management console when the library or tape drive configuration changes Note This option is available only if the library firmware is 9 00 or higher and the latest library MIB file is added to the SNMP Management console SNMP V3 SECURITY e User Name Enter your preferred name or leave as initial e Authentication The options for Authentication are none MD5 or SHA e Authentication Password The Authentication Password must be at least 8 characters in length If Authentication is set to none this field and the Privacy and Privacy Password fields are disabled e Privacy The options for Privacy are none or DES If Privacy is set to none then the Privacy Password field is disabled e Privacy Password The Privacy Password must be at least 8 characters in length Note The factory default settings for SNMP V3 Security are e User Name initial e Authentication none e Privacy none Testing encryption configuration for Library Managed encryption Refer to http support dell com to determine the availability of this feature If you purchased an encryption activation key and any LTO 4 or higher Fibre Channel or SAS drive for your library and the library is configured for library managed encryption run the Key Path Diagnostic to ensure that your encryption configuration is correct Important Ensure that library firmware and drive firmware are up to date before the Key Path Di
322. tion Specifications Ultrium 5 Library with f l Diona sdin oo 4U Library Maximum number of data cartridges 24 Maximum number of data cartridges 48 Maximum storage Native 36 TB Native 72 TB capacity Compressed 72 TB 2 1 compression Compressed 144 TB 2 1 compression Number of slots 24 including I O Station 48 Including 3 I O Station slots Sustained native Ultrium 5 Full Height Drive 140 MB s data transfer rate Ultrium 5 Half Height Drive 140 MB s 1 12 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 1 8 Operation Specifications Ultrium 5 continued Library with Come daye fo May 4U Library Ultrium 5 Full Height Drive Fibre Channel SAS Ultrium 5 Half Height Drive Fibre Channel SAS Interfaces 8 Gb s Fibre Channel 6 Gb s SAS Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization Drive types Table 1 9 Operation Specifications Ultrium 4 Library with Ultrium 4 drive s 2U Library 4U Library Maximum number of data cartridges 24 Maximum number of data cartridges 48 Native 19 2 TB Native 38 4 TB Compressed 38 4 TB 2 1 compression Compressed 75 2 TB 2 1 compression Number of slots 24 including I O Station 48 Including 3 I O station slots Sustained native Ultrium 4 Full Height Drive 120 MB s data transfer rate Ultrium 4 Half Height Drive 120 MB s Ultrium 4 Full Height Drive Drive types Fibre Cha
323. tly Configured x section shows the number of logical libraries currently configured Logical Libraries of Logical Libraries Currently Configured x a 7ug116 Figure 5 13 Configure Logical Libraries menu Note The maximum number of Logical Libraries in a 2U is two Note This menu is only available on libraries with multiple drives Note Whenever there is a hardware configuration change such as drives being swapped with different form factors i e HH to FH or FH to HH a library configuration change is needed Reconfiguring the library by reassigning the amount of logical libraries will clear this issue Chapter 5 Operations 5 19 Configure Library Logical Library Settings Logical Lib Settings cle Auto Clean I O Station s enabled Host Label Length Autoload a 7ug056 Active Slots Note The Remove DCS No is only available on libraries with the DCS feature Figure 5 14 Configure Library menu The following library configuration items are in this menu e Mode Random In random mode the library allows the server s host s application software to select any data cartridge in any order Sequential In sequential mode the library s firmware predefines the selection of the cartridges After initialization the firmware causes the library to select the first available cartridge found counting from the I O Station through slot 23 for loading into the drive Import
324. to contact for Web User Interface or library support Support Email The email address of the individual within your company to contact for Web User Interface or library support Password Rules Minimum Number Of Characters Choose the minimum password length The factory default value is 8 Possible range for this configuration option is 8 20 The maximum password length is 20 Minimum Number Of Upper Case Alphabetic Characters A Z Choose the minimum number of uppercase alphabetic characters The factory default value is 1 Possible range for this configuration option is 0 3 Minimum Number Of Lower Case Alphabetic Characters a z Choose the minimum number of lowercase alphabetic characters The factory default value is 1 Possible range for this configuration option is 0 3 Minimum Number Of Numeric Characters 0 9 Choose the minimum number of numeric characters The factory default value is 1 Possible range for this configuration option is 0 3 Minimum Number Of Special Characters 6 amp _ L j lt gt Choose the minimum number of special characters The factory default value is 0 Possible range for this configuration option is 0 3 Maximum Number Of Identical Consecutive Characters Choose the maximum number of identical consecutive characters The factory default value is 2 Possible range for this configuration option is 0 3 There is no limitation if 0 is selected Maximum Numbe
325. to a link local IPv6 address e The IPv6 address cannot be entered into a browser window in the same way an IPv4 address is when connecting via a link local IPv6 address E 1 e After upgrading the WinInet API by upgrading to IE 7 the library RMU can be accessed from the browser by using the following format Replace all with Append s lt interface gt ipv6 literal net to the end of the IPv6 address For example if the IPv6 address is fe80 1234 5678 abc and the interface number is 13 the address to browse to would be http fe80 1234 5678 abcs13 ipv6 literal net e Using the same IPv6 address as above another alternative to this would be to edit the hosts file in the lt Windows Base Directory system32 drivers etc directory and add the following line fe80 1234 5678 abc 13 lt hostname gt The address to browse to would be HYPERLINK http 3chostname 3e http lt hostname gt Note that the interface number can change with a reboot of the Windows host Windows 2008 Vista Windows 2008 and Vista natively support IPv6 Also interface numbers have been removed from these versions of Windows All that is needed to browse to an address would be to add brackets around the IPv6 address Thus if the TL2000 4000 IPv6 address is fe80 1234 5678 abc enter http fe80 1234 5678 abc into the browser window This is applicable for both link local and global unicast IPv6 addresses Notes on IP
326. ton IPv6 is now enabled Windows 2003 and XP comes with a WinINet API that does not fully support Pv6 literals Upgrading to Internet Explorer 7 in Windows 2003 is recommended for IPv6 browser support as the WinINet API is updated with the installation of Internet Explorer 7 Third party browsers such as Firefox also use the WinINet API either directly or indirectly so an upgrade to IE7 will be recommended for all users As multiple IPv6 addresses can be associated with one physical interface Windows 2003 and XP use an interface number associated with each link local IPv6 address that must be included for connectivity to any link local IPv6 address The interface number then must be appended to any outgoing IPv6 traffic otherwise the IPv6 packet does not know which logical interface to egress from The interface number can be determined through the command line of Windows 1 Go to Start gt Runand type cmd to enter the command prompt 2 At the command prompt type ipconfig and find the link local IPv6 address Appended to the end of this will be a x where x is the interface number Browser connectivity to a global unicast IPv6 address e Global unicast IPv6 addresses can be browsed to by entering this syntax into the browser address line HYPERLINK http 3cIPv6_Global_Unicast_Address 3e http lt Pv6_Global_Unicast_Address gt e The IPv6 address must be enclosed in square brackets Browser connectivity
327. tridge then close the I O station by gently pushing the slot back into the left magazine Note It is recommended to wait for the messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure that the library is ready to handle the cartridges Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration 4 39 a 7ug248 Figure 4 41 2U library I O station in the left magazine 4U library cartridge magazines The 4U library has four cartridge magazines two on each side see Figure 4 42 and Figure 4 43 on page 4 41 The upper left magazine has 12 storage slots The lower left magazine has 9 storage slots and houses the elective 3 slot I O station f in Figure 4 42 The upper right magazine has 12 storage slots The lower right magazine has 12 stora a77ug245 Figure 4 42 4U library left magazines 4 40 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide m wen an Tia is oie Le a77ug249 Figure 4 43 4U library right magazines 4U library I O station The I O station in a 4U library see Figure 4 44 is part of the lower left magazine To open the I O station select Control gt Open I O Station The I O station slot opens and the Unlocking I O station message displays Wait for the Insert remove cartridge and close I O station message to insert or remove the cartridge then close the I O station by gently pushing the slot back into the left magazine Note It is recommended to wait for the
328. tridge is loaded into the drive that is where the sequence starts from For example if a cartridge from the fifth lowest numeric storage slot containing a cartridge is loaded using the Move Cartridges option after the host issues a rewind unload command the next cartridge loaded will be the cartridge from the next higher numeric slot Cartridges need not be in contiguous slots e Loop Option If the Loop option is set to ON Configure gt Library Settings gt gt Loop when the last cartridge cartridge in the highest numeric slot is unloaded and placed back into storage the accessor will immediately start over again loading the first cartridge into the drive Stopping Sequential Mode To stop sequential mode use the Move Cartridges option from the Control menu Control gt Move Cartridges to unload the drive the next sequential cartridge will NOT be loaded To restart sequential mode use the same Control menu command to load a cartridge The loading sequence will resume from that numeric slot in the cartridge inventory e Active Slots the number of active slots in each logical library Note Slots can be reserved so that they are invisible to the host It may be necessary to set the number of Active Slots to match the number of slots that are available to the ISV software Reserved slots are created by reducing the number of active slots e Auto Clean Use this menu item to enable the Auto Clean function All cleaning ca
329. tridge magazine s The magazines can now be removed from the library by gently pulling each magazine out of the library To replace a magazine insert the back of the magazine into the front of the library and gently push the magazine into the library The magazine will lock when inserted into the library i a7 7ug054 Figure 5 11 Control Magazine menu Attention After inserting the magazines into the library you must wait for the library to complete its inventory before proceeding with normal library operations If the magazines are not pulled out of the library within 15 seconds after they are unlocked the command will cancel and you will have to repeat the process to unlock the magazines Control Re Inventory Use this menu item to initiate a scan of the cartridges currently in the library Control Re Inventory a 7ug055 Figure 5 12 Control Re Inventory menu Note It may take up to five minutes to complete the library inventory Configure Menu The Configure Menu is used during the initial setup of your library and when changes need to be made to your library s configuration This menu contains the following items e Logical Libraries e Library Settings e Drive e Network 5 18 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide e Set Access PIN e Save Restore e Set Date and Time Configure Logical Libraries Use this menu item to select the number of logical libraries The Curren
330. trol Panel display shows the correct value press the SELECT button to apply the value Toggling Values Toggle values are used to switch between two different states like ON and OFF 1 After navigating to the menu item press the SELECT button to select the menu item 2 Using the UP and DOWN buttons select one of the various predefined states for that item 3 Press the SELECT button to apply the new state Entering Numerical Values Numerical values are needed for network addresses password entries and other configuration entries 1 After navigating to the menu item the current value is displayed and the cursor highlights the first digit of the value that can be changed 2 For each digit to be changed in the value a Use the UP and DOWN buttons to increment decrement the digit b Press the SELECT button to highlight the next editable digit 3 Press the SELECT button at the last digit to apply the complete entry or press the CANCEL button to cancel the whole edit process and maintain the original value Power ON OFF Part of the Operator Control Panel is the Power ON OFF button If the library is powered ON pressing this button for 4 seconds will initiate a controlled power down of the library soft landing The following operations will take place before the library shuts down completely e The display indicates with an appropriate message that the shutdown is in progress e The library controller finishes all
331. tus Monitor Library gt Drive Status Chapter 5 Operations Configure Library Network Configure Library Drives on page 5 48 Configure Library Drives Service Library Clean Drive on Monitor Library Drive Identity on page 5 34 Monitor Library Drive Status on Monitor Library Drive Identity on page 5 34 Monitor Library Drive Status on Monitor Library Drive Status on page 5 34 on page 5 48 5 3 Table 5 1 Menu navigation shortcuts continued Information Activity Drive Dump save Encryption activate Encryption configure Encryption testing configuration if feature is available Encryption determine method current method Ethernet settings Email notifications add modify and delete Error log view Error logs and traces set mode Factory Default settings restore Fibre Channel speed Fibre Channel speed change Fibre Channel topology Menu Navigation Shortcuts Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info Not available with this interface Not available with this interface Not available with this interface Not available with this interface Not available with this interface Monitor gt Library gt Network Not available with this interface Monitor gt Library gt Error log Not available with this interface Co
332. tware application documentation to see if this feature is supported 7 A primary and secondary key management server can be set for each logical library Each partition has its own Encryption and key management settings Maintaining primary and secondary key management servers is desired for maximum availability of encrypted backup and recovery These settings are required for Library Managed Encryption only Enter the EKM Server Setting information Note The IP address of the key management host must be consistent with the library Network settings This means if the library is set to IPV4 only network support the key management host must be an IPV4 address If the Dell PowerVault library is required to function in a mixed network environment the library must be set to IPv4 IPv6 e Primary IP address IPv4 or IPv6 Enter the IP address of the primary key management server e Primary TCP port After entering the Primary IP address the library will automatically set the value of the Primary TCP port e Secondary IP address IPv4 or IPv6 Enter the IP address of the secondary key management server e Secondary TCP port After entering the Secondary IP address the library will automatically set the value of the Secondary TCP port Note The Default Port for TCP SSL disabled is 3801 The Default Port for SSL is 443 These values are the default values set by the library They can be changed depending on the user configuration but the u
333. tware is loaded This does not prevent the backup application from detecting the LUN and binding the appropriate driver Note The command scan all must be typed upon OS boot every time If backup software services automatically start on OS boot you must disable them run the scan all command and re enable the services Appendix D Enabling LUN Support in Linux D 3 D 4 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Appendix E Notes on IPv6 Compatibility with Windows 2003 XP and 2008 Vista IPv6 addressing is different from traditional IPv4 addressing IPv4 addressing is listed in the format 255 255 255 255 with each value 1 byte a total address of 4 bytes IPv6 addresses require 16 bytes and are listed in the format FFFF FFFF FFFF PPPP PPPP PPPP FRFF FFFF where there are 8 segments each 2 bytes long Windows 2003 XP IPv6 support in Windows 2003 is not turned on by default Use the following instructions to enable IPv6 support 1 Go to Control Panel gt Network Connections and right click on the Local Area Connection interface that is to be enabled with IPv6 support 2 Select Properties from the drop down menu and the Local Area Connection Properties window should open Click on the Install button 3 In the new Select Network Component Type window select Protocol and click on the Add button 4 In the Select Network Protocol window select Microsoft TCP IP version 6 and click on the OK but
334. u or force an accessor action DOWN v Lower left button Used to scroll downward through menu items Keys CANCEL X Upper right button Used to cancel a user action and return to the previous menu screen 5 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide 1 Press the UP iJ or DOWN Ef keys to enter Interaction Mode The Main Selection Menu will appear The Main Selection screen shows Monitor Control Configure and Service 2 Scroll to your selection then press the SELECT key The sub menu for the selected menu item will appear 3 Use the UP f or DOWN J and SELECT keys to scroll until you get to the area screen you wish to configure 4 Use the CANCEL H key if you wish to move backwards through the menu selections Operator Control Panel Menu Tree The Operator Control Panel Main menu is made up of the following items e Monitor e Control e Configure e Service The table below shows each Main menu item and the associated sub menu items Chapter 5 Operations 5 9 Logical Libraries Drive Move Cartridges Library Run Tests Settings Magazines Service Drives Re Inventory Display Contrast Set Access PIN Telnet Service Port Save Restore Library Library Verify Open I O Station Inventory Set Date and Time Control Path Failover a77ug050 Figure 5 3 Operator Control Panel Menu Tree Note Depending on the version of library
335. ugh the unit Consideration must be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit so that overloading of the circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or overcurrent protection To provide the correct power connection to a rack refer to the rating labels on the equipment in the rack to determine the total power requirement of the supply circuit For sliding drawers Do not pull out or install any drawer or feature if the rack stabilizer brackets are not attached to the rack Do not pull out more than one drawer at a time The rack might become unstable if you pull out more than one drawer at a time For fixed drawers This drawer is a fixed drawer and must not be moved for servicing unless specified by the manufacturer Attempting to move the drawer partially or out of the rack might cause the rack to become unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the rack Safety and environmental notices XV xvi CAUTION Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves rack stability during relocation Follow these general guidelines whenever you relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building e Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment starting at the top of the rack cabinet When possible restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it If this configuration is not known you must do the following Remove all devices in t
336. ult TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide RID tag Repair identification tag RML Rack Mount Line robot Picker robotics Picker assembly root CA certification In cryptography a root certificate from a certificate authority CA RPQ Request for price quotation RSA key Encryption key type R W read write S S Seconds of time SAN Storage area network SAS Serial Attached SCSI A computer bus technology and serial communication protocol for direct attached storage devices SAS is a replacement for parallel SCSI with higher speeds but still utilizing SCSI commands scratch cartridge A data cartridge that contains no useful data but can be written to with new data SCD Single Character Display SCSI Small computer system interface SE Single ended segment A part sel Select Serial Attached SCSI SAS A drive with a SAS interface can be linked directly to controllers SAS is a performance improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS enables multiple devices up to 128 of different sizes and types to be connected simultaneously with thinner and longer cables It supports full duplex signal transmission up to 3 Gb s In addition SAS drives can be hot plugged serialize To change from parallel by byte to serial by bit serializer A device that converts a space distribution of simultaneous states which represents data into a corresponding time sequence of states servo Servos A
337. ure contaminants and physical damage Ship the cartridge in a shipping container that has enough packing material to cushion the cartridge and prevent it from moving within the container Table 6 8 gives the environment for operating storing and shipping LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridges Table 6 8 Environment for operating storing and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge Environmental Specifications Environmental Factor Operating Operational Storage Archival Storage Shipping 10 to 45 C 50 to o o P 23 to 49 C 9 to Temperature 113 F 16 to 32 C 61 to 90 F 16 to 25 C 61 to 77 F 120 F panier 10 to 80 20 to 80 20 to 50 5 to 80 non condensing Maximum wet bulb 26 C 79 F 26 C 79 F 26 C 79 F 20 CUO F temperature Note 1 The short term or operational storage environment is for storage durations of up to six months 2 The long term or archival storage environment is for durations of six months up to ten years 6 10 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Chapter 7 Troubleshooting e The library consists of the following CRUs Customer Replaceable Units Control Card electronics processor memory etc Power Supply Drive Sled drive plus drive to library connectivity Cartridge Magazines e Service Spare Library Enclosure accessor Operator control panel display etc e Other possible Replacement Parts are Data Cartridg
338. urrent status of the drive When the LED is green it a normal drive activity Service Tag Serial The service tag and serial number on the pull out label links the library to your Number watranty These vents allow air to escape from the power supply and tape drive sled Bar Code Reader The bar code reader is an integral part of the library accessor The bar code reader provides inventory feedback to the host application Operator Control Panel display and Web User Interface by reading cartridge bar code labels The library stores the customized inventory data in memory Library firmware supports a 6 or 8 character volume serial number VOLSER on the bar code label on the tape cartridge Bar code selection is available for libraries with library code 4 50 or greater Encryption The LTO Ultrium 5 and 6 Tape Drive supports Application Managed Encryption AME and Library Managed Encryption LME using T10 encryption methods for SAS and Fibre Channel drives only Data encryption is supported with LTO Ultrium 4 Ultrium 5 and Ultrium 6 Data Cartridges only Encryption is also supported with library firmware version 5 80 and higher and drive firmware version 77BE for LTO 4 and higher drive code level The encryption enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to encrypt and decrypt host tape application data Encryption policy and encryption keys are provided by the host application or host server A drive digital ce
339. us current and previous and the time the trap occurred e Library State physical device status such as identification and status of devices that are monitored In the case of the library it would include enclosure power supply controller magazine status drive count cartridge slot count and I O station count Also included would be certain library statistics and where appropriate the fault FSC fault symptom code including the severity and description of that fault e Drive Status such as the identification of each drive in the library firmware level serial number and other address and status information Trap Definitions such as library status change open magazine I O accessed hard fault information drive cleaning requests excessive retries and_librar returning to normal operations For additional information refer to Appendix G SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps on page G 1 e SNMP MIBs The library s Management Information Base MIB contains units of information that specifically describe an aspect of the system such as the system name hardware number or communications configuration Status and error data is also gathered by MIBs and sent to one or more IP addresses defined during the SNMP configuration operation Download the SNMP MIB file for this library from http www support dell com Chapter 1 Product Description 1 7 Maximum Library Storage Capacity and Data Transfer Rate Maximum library storage
340. user access create or modify Menu Navigation Shortcuts Operator Control Panel For More Info Web User Interface For More Info Monitor page 5 10 Monitor gt Library gt Status Note Varies according to the number logical libraries Single partition Configure gt Logical Library Settings Multiple partitions Configure gt Logical Library Settings gt Logical Library n Not available with this interface Service gt Telnet Service Port Monitor gt Library gt Status Configure gt Set Access PIN Not available with this interface Operator Control Panel Navigation System Status screen Library General on page 5 43 Configure Library gt General Configure Library gt SNMP Not available with this interface Monitor Library Library Status on Monitor Library gt Library Status Not available with this interface Configure ibrary User ccess on page 5 Configure Library gt User Access The four control keys on the front of a 2U or 4U library enable the user to navigate through the library settings and make changes as needed to configure the library Chapter 5 Operations 5 7 a77ug254 Figure 5 1 2U Library Control Keys a77ug253 Figure 5 2 4U Library Control Keys Table 5 2 Library Control Keys UP a Upper left button Used to scroll upward through menu items SELECT v Lower right button Used to display a sub men
341. ust have 4 or more data cartridges in the library prior to the start of the test If there are fewer data cartridges than drives in the library an error message Slot Empty will occur and the test will not complete successfully The media type must be compatible with the drive type Otherwise an error message Incompatible Media will occur and the test will fail This page provides the system administrator with general tests to verify the usability and reliability of the library The System Test will use resident data cartridges to test the load and unload capability of the drives and ensure that the library mechanics are working satisfactorily No data will be written to the cartridges and the cartridges will be returned to their normal slot location The Slot To Slot test will move each resident data cartridge from one slot to another for each test cycle requested When completing the Slot To Slot test you will need to Inventory your library before placing it back online since this test scrambles the cartridge slot locations The user selects the number of test cycles before starting the test from the EXECUTE button To cancel the test before it completes the cycles select the STOP button Note The Web User Interface System Status screen will indicate progress and completion of the activity Perform Diagnostics System Test ve No Cycles 1 Me a 7ug075 Execute Stop Figure 5 57 Service Library Perform Diagnosti
342. v4 Address 19 11 221 201 Link local Pw address FEBO 20E LIFFiFE14 4740 TPv static assigned address 2002 306 6002 653 3 11 221 201 Router discovery Pv6 address 1 2002 9068 6002 653 20E 11 FF FE14 4740 Router discovery IPw address 2 2002 908 6006 653 20E 11FF FE14 4740 IMAC Address j00EL1144740 Mode Random Wide Node Name 2000000E11144740 Logical Library 1 Library Mode Random Logical Library 2 Library Mode Sequential Loop Autoload Logical Library 2 Library Mode Random 2 Logical Library 4 Library Mode Sequential Loop Autoload N Figure 5 26 The 4U library Monitor Library Library Identity page This view is correct for a library with multiple logical partitions The Library Identify screen will be different for a library with a single logical partition Monitor Library Drive Identity This page provides the following detailed information about the drive No changes can be made from this page The displayed information will vary depending on the library model and drive type SCSI SAS or Fibre Channel Table 5 7 lists all available elements on the Drive Identity page An X indicates that the element displays for the specified drive type Table 5 7 Drive Identity page elements Menu Item Description 2U Library 4U Library SCSI SCSI Fibre SAS Vendor ID This identifies the manufacturer of the tape drive X X k k X X i Product ID This is the Type and Model of the Library X X Note HH mean
343. v6 you must be prepared to enter both IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses The sections below will gray out depending on the choices made here Enter the Host Name Note The underscore _ is not allowed as part of a host name Enter the Domain Name DNS Primary Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server DNS Secondary Enter the IP address of your secondary DNS server Enable SSL for Web If you desire to have SSL Secure Sockets Layer enabled place a check in this box Note If you get a security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User Interface you can install the certificate or allow an exception depending on the internet browser you are using SSL is enabled when the URL begins with https and some browsers will show a lock Ethernet Settings Ethernet Settings choices are Auto the default 10 Mbit Half 10 Mbit Full 100 Mbit Half 100 Mbit Full Please refer to http support dell com to determine the availability of manual Ethernet settings in your library s firmware Enter IPv4 settings if applicable a Enable DHCP Click this item ON to have the IP Address of your library automatically set by the DHCP server b Static Address Enter the assigned IPv4 address The format of an IPv4 IP address is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods c Network Mask Enter the assigned IPv4 Network Mask d Gateway address Enter the assigned IPv4 Gateway address This addre
344. v6 Compatibility with Linux 1 While IPv6 is supported under Linux IPv6 literals for link local addresses are not currently supported in Linux browsers so the RMU will not be accessible in Linux via a link local IPv6 address Global unicast IPv6 addresses are supported in the same manner as in Windows 2008 Vista browsers 2 The RMU is accessible through IPv4 E 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Appendix F SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps Note For additional information refer to SNMP Messaging on page 1 7 Table F 1 SNMP Status Events Coas S ioa Mail Slot Accessed 3 Library I O Station has been accessed Fault Posted Library has posted a hard fault error Request Drive Clean Drive has requested a clean Drive Error Drive has reported an error Loader Retries Excessive Library has reported excessive load retries Loader OK Library has resumed normal operations Account Password Change Account password in the library has changed Note Trap ID 9 requires library firmware level 8 0 or greater and the latest SNMP MIB file Configuration Change Library or drive configuration has changed Library Login 11 Someone has logged into the library via the Web User Interface Library Logout Someone has logged out of the library via the Web User Interface Note Trap IDs 10 11 and 12 require library firmware level 9 00 or greater and the latest SNMP MIB file
345. vel error recovery and interfaces to one or more tape drives FP File protect frayed Damaged as if by an abrasive substance FRU Field replaceable unit FSC Fault symptom code FSI Fault symptom index FTSS Field Technical Sales Support functional microcode Microcode that is resident in the machine during normal customer operation G g Gram GB gigabyte GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter Gbs gigabits second Gbi _ gigabit gigabit Gbit 1 000 000 000 bits gigabyte GB 1 000 000 000 bytes Gigabit Interface Converter GBIC Converts copper interface to optic interface end Ground H HBA Host Bus Adapter HD Slot Technology High density HD slot technology Allows multiple cartridges to be stored in a tiered architecture hertz Hz Unit of frequency 1 hertz equals one cycle per second hex Hexadecimal High Voltage Differential HVD A logic signaling system that enables data communication between a supported host and the library HVD signaling uses a paired plus and minus signal level to reduce the effects of noise on the SCSI bus Any noise that is injected into the signal is present in both a plus and minus state and is canceled Synonymous with differential HVD SCSI Bus High Voltage Differential Hz Hertz cycles per second I 8 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager SKLM IBM s EKM application that assists encrypting
346. ver to manual startup mode If your application uses other device drivers see the appropriate documentation for those drivers to obtain the sense data In addition to device drivers other methods exist for obtaining sense data and error information The sections that follow describe alternatives for gathering such information Library sense data The following table lists the Additional Sense Codes ASC and Additional Sense Code Qualifiers ASCQ associated with the reported Sense Keys A sense key of 00h no sense has no ASC ASCQ associated with it A few ASC ASCQs are associated with more than one sense key The sense keys that gives particular ASC ASCQs are indicated within the Sense Key column ASC ASCQs can indicate an abnormal element state as part of element descriptor Table C 1 Library Sense ae ASC and ASCQ ssc Tre C 1 Not Ready 02 Table C 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued a Medium Error 03 Incompatible media installed Cleaning tape installed Cleaning failure C 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table C 1 Library Sense Keys ASC and ASCQ continued ASC Description Hardware Error 04 81h 80h Cannot initialize bar code reader 81h 81h No response from bar code reader 81h 82h No response from EEPROM 81h 83h Slave robotic generic problem 81h 84h Setting of gripper pic value failed 81h 85h Setting of slider pic value failed 81h 86h Setting of
347. ves on page 5 31jor Service Library Upgrade Firmware on page 5 63 CARTRIDGE MOVEMENT PROBLEMS Cartridge placement problems Magazine slot prism fiducials NOT seated properly can result in gripper or slider error codes due to the fiducial interfering with the back edge of the cartridge Release and pull magazines out of the library for inspection To release the magazines using the Operator Control Panel navigate to Control gt Magazine and select Left or Right To release the magazines using the Web User Interface navigate to Manage Library gt Release Magazines Inspect the light pipe fiducials on each slot of the magazine for proper seating Cartridge will not eject from i m Allow the drive to complete all operations This may take as long as 1 hour if rive you reset or cycle power on the library while the cartridge is positioned at the physical end of the media Ensure that the backup software is not reserving the slot or preventing the drive from ejecting the cartridge The backup software needs to cancel the reservation and any hold it has on the drive Temporarily disconnecting the library from the host server and power cycling eliminates the host and its software as a problem source 3 Ifthe problem still exists contact technical support Cartridge can not be removed Removing Cartrid from storage slot MEDIA Cleaning or data cartridge Ensure that you are using data and cleaning cartridges that are
348. work email See electronic mail encryption A method of storing data in a format that helps protect data from inadvertent or deliberate compromise An encryption enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to encrypt and decrypt host tape application data Encryption policy and encryption keys are provided by the host application or host server encryption key manager EKM A software program that assists encrypting tape drives in generating protecting storing and maintaining encryption keys that encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information that is read from tape media entitlement Entitlement is the official right to receive service and support for your tape library EPO Emergency power off I 6 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide EPROM Erasable programmable read only memory EQC Equipment check equipment check An asynchronous indication of a malfunction Error log A data set or file in a product or system where error information is stored for later access ESD Electrostatic discharge ESP Encapsulating Security Payload An Internet Protocol that provides origin authenticity integrity and confidentiality protection of a packet ESP also supports encryption only and authentication only configurations but encryption without authentication is discouraged because it is insecure F fault symptom code FSC A hexadecimal code that is generated b
349. xpire after 5 minutes of inactivity in the OCP there is no log out function in the library for this feature A library reboot is recommended after making configuration changes to the library Set Access PIN New Access Access PIN PIN 0000 Enabled Disabled a77ug057 Figure 5 17 Configure Set Access PIN menu Setting the Operator Control Panel Access PIN using the Operator Control Panel 1 Navigate to Configure gt Set Access PIN Chapter 5 Operations 5 25 Press the SELECT button to highlight the first digit of the 4 digit Access PIN Use the UP and DOWN buttons to select each digit Press the SELECT button to move to the next digit Repeat these steps for repeating the Access PIN 2 roe E After entering the final digit press the DOWN button and select one of the following e Save to apply your settings e Cancel to delete your settings Note In Figure 5 18 menus with the pound sign are the only menus accessible when the Access PIN is enabled but entered incorrectly or before it is entered To gain access to all menus disable the Access PIN or enter the correct PIN number when requested a Open I O Station i Logical Library Verify Move Cartridges Library Settings Re Inventory Network Display Contrast Set Access PIN Telnet Service Port Restore Default Set Date and Time a 7ug231 Path Failover Figure 5 18 Pound sign shows accessible menus when access
350. y Green and Silvery gray Purple All generations contain 1 2 inch dual coat magnetic tape 6 1 When processing tape in the cartridges Ultrium Tape Drives use a linear serpentine recording format The native data capacity and recording format of Ultrium data cartridges is as follows Table 6 2 Cartridge Data Capacity and Recording Formats Native Data Capacity Recording Format Ultrium 6 2500 GB 6250 GB at 2 5 1 Reads and writes data on 2176 compression tracks sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 5 1500 GB 3000 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 1280 compression tracks sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 4 800 GB 1600 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 896 compression tracks sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 3 400 GB 800 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 704 compression tracks sixteen tracks at a time Ultrium 2 200 GB 400 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 512 compression tracks eight tracks at a time Ultrium 1 100 GB 200 GB at 2 1 Reads and writes data on 384 compression tracks eight tracks at a time The first set of tracks is written from near the beginning of the tape to near the end of the tape The head then repositions to the next set of tracks for the return pass This process continues until all tracks are written and the cartridge is full or until all data is written The cartridge door M Figure 6 1 on page 6 1 protects the tape from contamination when the cartridge is out of the drive The tap
351. y manager is correctly installed and configured and that the application is properly started refer to your key management documentation Ensure that the tape drive is registered in the key manager refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online Ensure that a default key label is defined in the key manager refer to the IBM SKLM Knowledge Center online If you are using application managed encryption check your tape backup application documentation for a similar test Most library or drive errors will result in an error code or error message on the Operator Control Panel display i is maintained in the library or drive error log See get the error log over the Operator Control Panel and Service EE View Logs on page 5 59 to view logs using the Web User Interface Look up the error code and try to resolve see Chapter 8 Error codes on page 8 1 and or Appendix C Sense Data on page C 1 7 2 Dell PowerVault TL2000 Tape Library and TL4000 Tape Library User s Guide Table 7 1 Troubleshooting table continued FRONT PANEL LEDs Attention LED To determine why the Attention LED is turned ON log in to the Web User Interface and select Service Library gt View Logs gt Warning Trace Drive Sled Issues e Refer to Isolating Drive Sled Problems on page 7 9 e Whenever there is a hardware configuration change such as drives being swapped with different form factors i e HH to FH or FH to HH a li
352. y of up to 6250 GB 2 5 1 compression and a native data capacity of up to 2500 GB liquid crystal display LCD A low power display technology that is used in computers and other I O devices loadable The ability to be loaded LME Library Managed Encryption LTO cartridge memory LTO CM Within each LTO Ultrium data cartridge an embedded electronics and interface module that can store and retrieve a cartridge s historical usage and other information LUN Logical Unit Number LVD SCSI Bus Low Voltage Differential M MAC address The Media Access Control address of a computer networking device magnetic tape A tape with a magnetic surface layer on which data can be stored by magnetic recording MAP Maintenance analysis procedure mask A pattern of characters that controls the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of characters To use a pattern of characters to control the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of characters master file A file that is used as an authority in a job and that is relatively permanent even though its contents might change Synonymous with main file Maximum Transmission Unit MTU The size of the largest packet that a network protocol can transmit MB Megabyte expressed as data rate in MB s or MB second media capacity The amount of data that can be contained on a storage medium expressed in bytes of data media type identifier Pertaining to the b
353. y the drive or the control unit microcode in response to a detected subsystem error FC Feature code FCC Federal communications commission fiducial A target that is used for teaching a physical location to a robot field replaceable unit FRU An assembly that is replaced in its entirety when any one of its components fails file A named set of records that are stored or processed as a unit Also referred to as a data set file protection The processes and procedures that are established in an information system that are designed to inhibit unauthorized access to contamination of or deletion of a file file transfer protocol FTP In the Internet suite of protocols an application layer protocol that uses TCP and Telnet services to transfer bulk data files between machines or hosts firmware Proprietary code that is delivered as microcode as part of an operating system Firmware is more efficient than software loaded from an alterable medium and more adaptable to change than pure hardware circuitry An example of firmware is the Basic input output system BIOS in read only memory ROM on a PC system board FLASH EEPROM An electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM that can be updated FMR Field microcode replacement format The arrangement or layout of data on a data medium Glossary I 7 formatter Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that performs data conversion speed matching encoding first le
354. y with the Web User Interface For IPv4 or Dual Stack IPv4 IPv6 enter your library s static IP Address using the 0 0 0 0 format four octets For IPv6 enter your library s static IP Address or Router Assigned IP Address using the following format http 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 To determine your Router Assigned IP Address navigate to Monitor gt Library gt Network on the Operator Control Panel If the dual IP stack is enabled IPv4 IPv6 IPv6 addresses cannot be configured in the OCP Operator Control Panel and must be configured through the Web User Interface IPv6 addresses can only be configured in the OCP if the Pv6 only stack is enabled In the case where the dual stack is enabled the IPv6 address must be configured through the web interface either using the IPv4 address or a known Chapter 2 User Interfaces 2 5 other IPv6 address User ID Admin Password at Figure 2 2 Web User Interface login page a77ug070 System Status The System Status screen is always present after login giving current status of the library System Status View Legend 03 28 2007 15 59 24 Library Name BOSTONI41 Status Ready Drive 1 Status Ready Slots Empty Total 22 23 1 0 Station Disabled 2 Library Time 15 59 24 gt Figure 2 3 2U library System Status screen System Status View Legend 03 28 2007 15 27 45 Library Name ATLANTA1E2 Status Ready Drive 1 Status O keid Drive 2 Status Ready Slots 42 44 Empty T

Dell PowerVault TL2000 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents